% \iffalse meta-comment
%
% memoir.dtx
%
%    This program is provided under the terms of the
% LaTeX Project Public License distributed from CTAN
% archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt.
%
% Author: Peter Wilson (CUA) 
%         now at: peter.r.wilson@boeing.com
% Copyright 2001 Peter R. Wilson
% 
% \fi
% \CheckSum{13781}
%
% \changes{v0.1}{2001/05/20}{First public alpha release}
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{First beta release}
% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Bug fixing}
% \changes{v0.31}{2001/07/09}{Bug fixing}
% \changes{v0.32}{2001/08/03}{Fix for old versions of amsmath package}
% \changes{v0.33}{2001/08/03}{Added controllable chapter/LoF spacing}
% \changes{v0.33}{2001/08/03}{Fixed bug in \cs{appendixpage}}
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/10/30}{First production release}
% \changes{v1.0a}{2001/12/07}{Feature fixes} ^^A never released
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{More fixups}
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Replaced all the subfigure code}
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/28}{Added sidebars}
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/28}{Upgraded verse typesetting}
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/07}{Added 17pt option}
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/07}{Added extra \cs{provide} commands}
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Major verbatim, box and file additions}
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Removed extraneous space from change marks}
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Extra optarg in \cs{chapter} and \cs{chapter*}}
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Twiddled font sizes a little}
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/27}{Fixed 12pt bug}
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/09/27}{Minor tweaks wrt v1.2}
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Extra trimming styles}
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Major extensions for indexing}
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Automatically call a patch file}
% \changes{v1.3a}{2002/11/22}{Fixed nasty figure/table bug}
%
% ^^A \def\fileversion{v0.1}
% ^^A \def\filedate{2001/05/20}
% ^^A \def\fileversion{v0.2}
% ^^A \def\filedate{2001/06/03}
% ^^A \def\fileversion{v0.3}
% ^^A \def\filedate{2001/07/14}
% ^^A \def\fileversion{v0.31}
% ^^A \def\filedate{2001/07/24}
% ^^A \def\fileversion{v0.32}
% ^^A \def\filedate{2001/08/03}
% ^^A \def\fileversion{v0.33}
% ^^A \def\filedate{2001/08/31}
% ^^A \def\fileversion{v1.0}
% ^^A \def\filedate{2001/11/17}
% ^^A \def\fileversion{v1.0a}
% ^^A \def\filedate{2001/12/07}
% \def\fileversion{v1.1}
% \def\filedate{2002/03/28}
% \def\fileversion{v1.1a}
% \def\filedate{2002/04/28}
% \def\fileversion{v1.2}
% \def\filedate{2002/08/10}
% \def\fileversion{v1.2}
% \def\filedate{2002/08/27}
% \def\fileversion{v1.3}
% \def\filedate{2002/11/14}
% \def\fileversion{v1.3a}
% \def\filedate{2002/11/22}
% \title{The LaTeX \Lpack{memoir} class for configurable book 
%        typesetting: Source code\thanks{This
%        file has version number \fileversion, last revised
%        \filedate.}}
%
% \author{%
% Peter Wilson\\
% Catholic University of America \\
% Now at \texttt{peter.r.wilson@boeing.com}
% }
% \date{\filedate}
% \maketitle
%
% \begin{abstract}
% The \Lpack{memoir} class is designed for typesetting
% general books such as novels, biographies, histories, 
% and so on, although as it supports all the functionality of the 
% standard \Lpack{book} class it can also be used for technical writing.
% It provides more functions than the standard class as well as 
% presenting a more friendly interface for the book designer.
% It can also simulate the typesetting style of the standard \Lpack{article}
% class.
%
%    Version 0.33 of the class was the last of the  beta releases and
% version 1.0 was the first production release.
% \end{abstract}
%
% \tableofcontents
% \listoftables
%
% \StopEventually{}
%
% 
%
% \section{Introduction}
%
% This document provides the commented source 
% for the LaTeX \Lpack{memoir} class, which is designed for typesetting
% general books such as novels, biographies, histories, 
% and so on. It has all the functionality of the standard \Lpack{book}
% class and, as well as providing some extra functions, also provides
% a more friendly interface for the document designer. As it can encompass
% everything that the \Lpack{book} class provides it may also be used
% for technical writing.
%
%   The default appearance of a document typeset with this class is
% the same as if it had been typeset with the \Lpack{book} class and
% it can be made to simulate the \Lpack{article} class..
% The class, though, includes extra facilities that make it easy to
% change the appearance of such things as the page headers and footers,
% the style of chapter and other sectional headings, and the style of
% captions. It also makes it easy to both change the style of the
% Table of Contents, List of Figures, etc., as well as creating new
% kinds of `List of\ldots'. New types of floats, if needed, can be
% created very simply. Epigraphs can be put into the document in a
% variety of styles.
%
%    The class provides a variety of page, chapter and captioning
% styles that you can choose from if you don't want to create your own.
%
%    Documents can be typeset in 9pt, 10pt, 11pt, 12pt, 14pt or 17pt font
% sizes and there is a reasonably intuitive means of setting the margins
% and placement of the text on a page. There is an option to put
% trim marks on the printed pages if the stock sheets need to be trimmed
% down to the final page size. For those whose publishers like a
% manuscript to look as though it was typewritten, there is an option
% to do this (double spacing, ragged right, no hyphenation, 
% fixed width font). There is also an unsophisticated means of flagging any
% revisions to the text.
%
%    As this is a new class, by default it does not support the old 
% LaTeX v2.09
% font commands, namely the |\bf|, |\sl|, |\it| and |\sc| commands;
% it warns about using the |\em| command but does support it.
%
%
% I hope that apart from the font commands the class 
% is compatible with
% `standard' LaTeX.
%
%    Development of this class would never have been started without
% the wonderful work done by Leslie Lamport and others~\cite{CLASSES}
% from whom I have learned a great deal and borrowed much code. 
%
%    Sections~\ref{sec:docstrip} through~\ref{sec:ic} describe some
% administrative elements and code for general use later in the 
% specification.
% The macros forming the class file are defined in sections~\ref{sec:opt}
% through~\ref{sec:init}. 
% 
% This manual is typeset according to the conventions of the
% \LaTeX{} \textsc{docstrip} utility which enables the automatic
% extraction of the \LaTeX{} macro source files~\cite{GOOSSENS94}.
%
%
% \section{A driver for this document} \label{sec:docstrip}
%
% The next series of code contains the documentation driver file for
% \LaTeX, i.e., the file that will produce the documentation you are
% currently reading. This will be extracted from this file by the 
% \textsc{docstrip} program.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*driver>
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
\usepackage{url}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    We do not want the following basic elements to appear in the index.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DoNotIndex{\',\.,\@M,\@@input,\@addtoreset,\@arabic,\@badmath}
\DoNotIndex{\@centercr,\@cite}
\DoNotIndex{\@dotsep,\@empty,\@gobble,\@gobbletwo,\@ignoretrue}
\DoNotIndex{\@input,\@ixpt,\@m}
\DoNotIndex{\@minus,\@ne,\@nil,\@nomath,\@plus,\@set@topoint}
\DoNotIndex{\@tempboxa,\@tempcnta,\@tempdima,\@tempdimb}
\DoNotIndex{\@tempswafalse,\@tempswatrue,\@viipt,\@viiipt,\@vipt}
\DoNotIndex{\@vpt,\@warning,\@xiipt,\@xipt,\@xivpt,\@xpt,\@xviipt}
\DoNotIndex{\@xxpt,\@xxvpt,\\,\ ,\addpenalty,\addtolength,\addvspace}
\DoNotIndex{\advance,\Alph,\alph}
\DoNotIndex{\arabic,\ast,\begin,\begingroup,\bfseries,\bgroup,\box}
\DoNotIndex{\bullet}
\DoNotIndex{\cdot,\cite,\CodelineIndex,\cr,\day,\DeclareOption}
\DoNotIndex{\def,\DisableCrossrefs,\divide,\DocInput,\documentclass}
\DoNotIndex{\DoNotIndex,\egroup,\ifdim,\else,\fi,\em,\endtrivlist}
\DoNotIndex{\EnableCrossrefs,\end,\endgroup}
\DoNotIndex{\endlist,\everycr,\everypar,\ExecuteOptions,\expandafter}
\DoNotIndex{\fbox}
\DoNotIndex{\filedate,\filename,\fileversion,\fontsize,\framebox,\gdef}
\DoNotIndex{\global,\halign,\hbox,\hfil,\hfill,\hrule}
\DoNotIndex{\hsize,\hskip,\hspace,\hss,\if@tempswa,\ifcase,\or,\fi,\fi}
\DoNotIndex{\ifhmode,\ifvmode,\ifnum,\iftrue,\ifx,\fi,\fi,\fi,\fi,\fi}
\DoNotIndex{\input}
\DoNotIndex{\jobname,\kern,\leavevmode,\let}
\DoNotIndex{\list,\llap,\long,\m@ne,\m@th}
\DoNotIndex{\month,\newcommand,\newcounter,\newenvironment}
\DoNotIndex{\NeedsTeXFormat,\newdimen}
\DoNotIndex{\newlength,\newpage,\nobreak,\noindent,\null,\number}
\DoNotIndex{\numberline,\OldMakeindex,\OnlyDescription,\p@}
\DoNotIndex{\par,\paragraph,\paragraphmark,\parfillskip}
\DoNotIndex{\penalty,\PrintChanges,\PrintIndex,\ProcessOptions}
\DoNotIndex{\protect,\ProvidesClass}
\DoNotIndex{\refstepcounter,\relax,\renewcommand,\reset@font}
\DoNotIndex{\rightskip,\rlap,\rmfamily,\roman}
\DoNotIndex{\roman,\secdef,\selectfont,\setbox,\setcounter,\setlength}
\DoNotIndex{\settowidth,\sfcode,\skip,\sloppy,\slshape,\space}
\DoNotIndex{\symbol,\the,\trivlist,\typeout,\tw@,\undefined,\uppercase}
\DoNotIndex{\usecounter,\usefont,\usepackage,\vfil,\vfill,\viiipt}
\DoNotIndex{\viipt,\vipt,\vskip,\vspace}
\DoNotIndex{\wd,\xiipt,\year,\z@}
\DoNotIndex{\@namedef,\@nameuse,\csname,\endcsname}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    We do want an index, using linenumbers, but not update information.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\EnableCrossrefs
\CodelineIndex
%% \RecordChanges
%    \end{macrocode}
% We had better have page headings to aid navigation, but I don't
% like Uppercased titles.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\MakeUppercase}[1]{#1}
\pagestyle{headings}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    We use so many \file{docstrip} modules that we set the
%    \texttt{StandardModuleDepth} counter to 1.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    Some commonly used abbreviations
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\Lopt}[1]{\textsf {#1}}            % typeset an option
\newcommand*{\file}[1]{\texttt {#1}}            % typeset a file
\newcommand*{\Lcount}[1]{\textsl {\small#1}}    % typeset a counter
\newcommand*{\pstyle}[1]{\textsl {#1}}          % typeset a pagestyle
\newcommand*{\Lenv}[1]{\texttt {#1}}            % typeset an environment
\newcommand*{\Lpack}[1]{\textsf {#1}}           % typeset a package
%    \end{macrocode}
%    We want the full details printed.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\begin{document}
\DocInput{memoir.dtx}
\PrintIndex
%% \PrintChanges
\end{document}
%</driver>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%
%
%
%
% \section{Identification} \label{sec:id}
%
%    The \Lpack{memoir} document class can only be used with LaTeX2e, 
% so we make
%    sure that an appropriate message is displayed when another TeX
%    format is used.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<class>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    Announce the name, option files and version for LaTeX2e files:
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<class>\ProvidesClass{memoir}[2002/11/22 v1.3a configurable document class]
%<9pt>\ProvidesFile{mem9.clo}[2002/07/27 v0.2 memoir class 9pt size option]
%<10pt>\ProvidesFile{mem10.clo}[2002/07/27 v0.2 memoir class 10pt size option]
%<11pt>\ProvidesFile{mem11.clo}[2002/07/27 v0.2 memoir class 11pt size option]
%<12pt>\ProvidesFile{mem12.clo}[2002/08/27 v0.2a memoir class 12pt size option]
%<14pt>\ProvidesFile{mem14.clo}[2002/07/27 v0.2 memoir class 14pt size option]
%<17pt>\ProvidesFile{mem17.clo}[2002/07/07 v0.1 memoir class 17pt size option]
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%
% \section{Initial Code} \label{sec:ic}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*class>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Note (2001/08/03): Old versions of the \Lpack{amsmath} package did odd
% things with |\@tempa|, |\@tempb| and |\@tempc|. I have now replaced
% any use of these with |\@memtempa|, etc.
%
%    In this part we define a few commands that are used later on.
%
% \begin{macro}{\@ptsize}
%    This control sequence is used to store the second digit of the
%    pointsize we are typesetting in. So, normally, it's value is one
%    of 0, 1 or 2.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@ptsize}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% Any new lengths that depend on the point size option must be declared
% before the options are executed.
% \begin{macro}{\onelineskip}
% \begin{macro}{\lxvchars}
% \begin{macro}{\xlvchars}
% The length |\onelineskip| is the vertical space taken
% by a normal line of text. The lengths |\lxvchars| and |\xlvchars| are
% the approximate lengths required for typesetting lines with either 65 or 45
% characters.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\onelineskip}
\newlength{\lxvchars}
\newlength{\xlvchars}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@memcnta}
% We need a scratch count register.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcount\@memcnta
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \changes{v1.0a}{2001/11/28}{Deleted count register \cs{@memtempa}}
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@restonecol}
%    When the document has to be printed in two columns, we sometimes
%    have to temporarily switch to one column. This switch is used to
%    remember to switch back.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@restonecol
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@openright}
% This is TRUE if chapters are to start on righthand (recto) pages;
% this is the default. FALSE means chapters can start on any page.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@openright
  \@openrighttrue

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@openleft}
% This is TRUE if chapters are to start on lefthand (verso) pages.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@openleft
  \@openleftfalse

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@mainmatter}
% This is TRUE if the main part of the document is being currently procesed;
% this is the default.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@mainmatter
  \@mainmattertrue

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@memoldfont}
% This is TRUE if the \Lopt{oldfontcommands} option is used.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/29}{Added \cs{if@memoldfont}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@memoldfont
  \@memoldfontfalse

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifsamename}
% \begin{macro}{\nametest}
%    The macro |\nametest{|\meta{name1}|}{|\meta{name2}|}| tests whether the
% characters forming the two arguments are the same or not. If they are the
% same then |\ifsamename| is set TRUE, otherwise it is set FALSE. \meta{name1}
% and \meta{name2} must both be either macro names (including the backslash)
% or must both not be macro names. That is, you cannot do |\nametest{\cs}{cs}|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifsamename
\newcommand{\nametest}[2]{%
  \samenamefalse
  \begingroup
  \def\@memtempa{#1} \def\@memtempb{#2}
  \ifx \@memtempa\@memtempb
    \endgroup
    \samenametrue
  \else
    \endgroup
  \fi
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Deleted \cs{fillline} and \cs{makecommand} as
% they were not used}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\kill@lastcounter}
% |\kill@lastcounter{|\meta{cntr}|}|\footnote{With thanks to Stefan Ulrich
% (\texttt{ulrich@cis.uni-muenchen.de}) who answered a question on this
% on \texttt{ctt}, 2001/07/09. (Also answered by Heiko Oberdiek,
% \texttt{oberdiek@ruf.uni-freiburg.de}).}
%  kills the counter \meta{cntr}. This macro is an extension to the
% suggestions as it also makes the last count register reusable.
% \emph{The macro must only be used when the last allocated counter is to
% be killed.}
% For example with:\\
% |\newcounter{fred} \kill@lastcounter{fred} \newcounter{fred}| \\
% there is no error with the second |\newcounter|.
% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Added \cs{kill@counter}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\kill@lastcounter}[1]{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Deallocate the last counter register. From the TeXbook, |\count10| is
% the number of the last register.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \advance\count10 \m@ne
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set the internal counter definition to |\relax|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \expandafter\let\csname c@#1\endcsname\relax}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifpdf}
% This can be used to check whether or not a document is being processed
% by LaTeX or pdfLaTeX. 
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/09/21}{Made checking of \cs{pdfouput} more robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifpdf
\ifx\pdfoutput\undefined
\else
  \ifx\pdfoutput\relax
  \else
    \ifcase\pdfoutput
    \else
      \pdftrue
    \fi
  \fi
\fi

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\phantomsection}
% A command needed if the \Lpack{hyperref} package is used, for putting
% before certain |\addcontentsline| commands.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\phantomsection}{}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Extending an existing macro}
%
%
%    My usual technique for modifying the code of an existing
% macro was to use |\renewcommand|. However it slowly became apparent that
% many of such modifications merely consisted of adding some code at
% either the start or end of the existing definition. In June 2000 I 
% posed a question
% on the |comp.text.tex| newsgroup about this, and 
% Michael Downes\footnote{\texttt{epsmjd@ams.org}} and
% Heiko Oberdiek\footnote{\texttt{oberdiek@ruf.uni-freiburg.de}} 
% were kind enough to respond.
% The responses arrived almost simultaneously, both
% supplying methods for adding code at the end of a macro defined to take
% one argument. Michael Downes' response included a remark about it probably
% being too much effort to formulate a general way of doing this.
% Heiko Oberdiek almost immediately replied with such a generalisation.
%
%    The following code, which I have extracted from a package that I
% wrote but which I did not submit to CTAN, incorporates the work of both
% Michael and Heiko. I have added a bit. All errors are my responsibility.
% Michael went on the write the \Lpack{patchcmd} package which is
% a generalisation of the facilities below and so there was no need for
% my more restricted package.
% \changes{v0.33}{2001/08/31}{Replaced \cs{appendiarg} with \cs{addtodef}
%                             and friends}
%
% \begin{macro}{\wo@dmacro}
%    Heiko Oberdiek suggested\footnote{Via email on 2000/07/12.} that
% \meta{macro} should be tested for being the name of a macro, rather than
% using the normal \LaTeX{} test against it being undefined. He supplied
% the code for performing the macro name test.
%
% |\wo@dmacro| is a helper for handling the string `macro:'.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\edef\wo@dmacro{%
  \string m\string a\string c\string r\string o\string :%
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\wo@difmacro@begingroup}
% This appears to take two arguments: 
% |\wo@difmacro@begingroup{|\meta{macro}|}{|\meta{code}|}|, where 
% \meta{macro} should be the name of a defined macro and \meta{code}
% is code to be executed if and only if \meta{macro} \emph{is} a
% defined macro.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\wo@difmacro@begingroup#1{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Start a group.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \begingroup
%    \end{macrocode}
% Test if |#1| is a defined macro; |\wo@dparsemacro| does most of the work.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \edef\x{%
      \noexpand\wo@dparsemacro\meaning#1\wo@dmacro\string -%
    }%
    \x\@nil{#1}%
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\wo@dparsemacro}
% This is called by |\wo@difmacro@begingroup|. If \meta{macro} is not
% a defined macro it prints a warning and closes the group begun by
% |\wo@difmacro@begingroup|. Otherwise it process the \meta{code} which
% \emph{must} close the group.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\begingroup
  \edef\x{\endgroup
    \def\noexpand\wo@dparsemacro##1\wo@dmacro##2\string -}%
\x#3\@nil#4{%
  \ifx\\#3\\%
    \endgroup
    \ClassWarning{memoir}{\string `\string #4\string ' is not a macro}%
    \expandafter\@gobble
  \else
    \expandafter\@firstofone
  \fi
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\addtodef}
% \begin{macro}{\addtodef*}
% \begin{macro}{\wo@daddtodef}
% The command |\addtodef{|\meta{macro}|}{|\meta{start-stuff}|}{|\meta{end-stuff}|}|
% adds stuff at the start and/or end of an argumentless  macro. 
% Initially the code for appending was a reimplementation of the
% kernel |\g@addto@macro| command (from \file{ltclass.dtx}).
% Later, at Michael Downes' suggestion, I combined
% appending and prepending stuff into a single command. 
% Actually, there is no real need to have both
% |\addtodef| and |\addtodef*| as the body of the command
% being amended has no argument,
% but both versions are provided for consistency.
%
%    The kernel |\@star@or@long| and |\l@ngrel@x| commands 
% (in \file{ltdefns.dtx}) are used to handle 
% the potential |*| after the command name.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\addtodef{\@star@or@long\wo@daddtodef}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The |\@star@or@long| command dealt with a possible |*| and now
% |\wo@daddtodef| does the work. It picks up the three arguments
% that the user thinks belong to |\addtodef|, namely \meta{macro},
% \meta{start-stuff} and \meta{end-stuff}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\wo@daddtodef#1#2#3{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Check if \meta{macro} has been defined. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \wo@difmacro@begingroup{#1}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% If \meta{macro} is defined then store the tokens corresponding to the 
% body of \meta{macro} and the extra \meta{-stuff} in token registers.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@temptokena{#2}%
    \toks@\expandafter{#1#3}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Do an expanded definition for |\x|, so that calling |\x|
% will |\def| a new version of \meta{macro}, whose body consists of the
% saved tokens (i.e., the orginal body plus the extra stuff). 
% As Michael Downes noted, single letter control sequences do not take any of
% \TeX's hash table space.
% |\l@ngrel@x|
% has been previously set to either |\long| or |\relax| by |\@star@or@long|,
% and so may make the new definition of \meta{macro} to be |\long|. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \edef\x{\endgroup 
         \l@ngrel@x\def\noexpand#1{\the\@temptokena \the\toks@}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Finally, call |\x| to perform the new definition.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \x
  }%
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\addtoiargdef}
% \begin{macro}{\addtoiargdef*}
% \begin{macro}{\wo@daddtoiargdef}
%  This adds stuff at the start and/or end of a macro that takes one argument.
% It is a modification of Michael Downes' appending 
% code\footnote{Posted to \texttt{ctt} on 15~June 2000,\\
% URL: \url{http://www.dejanews.com/getdoc.xp?AN=635057844}.}
% which was:
% \begin{small}\begin{verbatim}
% \def\appendef#1#2{%
%   \begingroup
%     \toks@\expandafter{#1{##1}#2}%
%     \edef\x{\endgroup \def\noexpand#1####1{\the\toks@}}%
%   \x}
% \end{verbatim}
% \par\end{small}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\addtoiargdef{\@star@or@long\wo@daddtoiargdef}
\long\def\wo@daddtoiargdef#1#2#3{%
  \wo@difmacro@begingroup{#1}{%
    \@temptokena{#2}%
    \toks@\expandafter{#1{##1}#3}%
    \edef\x{\endgroup 
            \l@ngrel@x\def\noexpand#1####1{\the\@temptokena \the\toks@}}%
    \x
  }%
}

%    \end{macrocode}
%    For the record, Heiko Oberdiek produced the following 
% version\footnote{Posted to \texttt{ctt} on 16~June 2000,\\
% URL: \url{http://www.dejanews.com/getdoc.xp?AN=635095381}.}
% which avoids the use of a token register.
% \begin{small}\begin{verbatim}
% \newcommand{\appendiargdef}[2]{%
%   \long\expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter
%   ##\expandafter1\expandafter{#1{##1}#2}}
% \end{verbatim}
% \par\end{small}
%
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \section{Declaration of Options} \label{sec:opt}
%
%
% \subsection{Setting Paper Sizes}
%
%    The variables |\paperheight| and |\paperwidth| should reflect the
%    physical paper size after trimming. 
%
%    Option \Lopt{letterpaper} will be the default.
%
% \begin{macro}{\stockheight}
% \begin{macro}{\stockwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\trimtop}
% \begin{macro}{\trimedge}
% The lengths |\stockheight| and |\stockwidth| should be the height and 
% width of the stock sheet before trimming. For example, this is the 
% physical size
% of a single sheet that might be laser-printed. The lengths |\trimtop|
% and |\trimedge| are the amount that will be trimmed off the top and fore
% edge of the physical sheet.
% For desk printer output the size of the trimmed sheet is often the
% same as the physical sheet. In other words the |\paper...| and |\stock...|
% sizes are the same and the trims are zero. This class assumes that this
% is the normal case.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\stockheight}
\newlength{\stockwidth}
\newlength{\trimtop}
\newlength{\trimedge}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%    Declare the stock size options.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{a3paper}
   {\setlength\stockheight {420mm}%
    \setlength\stockwidth  {297mm}}
\DeclareOption{a4paper}
   {\setlength\stockheight {297mm}%
    \setlength\stockwidth  {210mm}}
\DeclareOption{a5paper}
   {\setlength\stockheight {210mm}%
    \setlength\stockwidth  {148mm}}
\DeclareOption{a6paper}
   {\setlength\stockheight {148mm}%
    \setlength\stockwidth  {105mm}}
\DeclareOption{b3paper}
   {\setlength\stockheight {500mm}%
    \setlength\stockwidth  {353mm}}
\DeclareOption{b4paper}
   {\setlength\stockheight {353mm}%
    \setlength\stockwidth  {250mm}}
\DeclareOption{b5paper}
   {\setlength\stockheight {250mm}%
    \setlength\stockwidth  {176mm}}
\DeclareOption{b6paper}
   {\setlength\stockheight {176mm}%
    \setlength\stockwidth  {125mm}}
\DeclareOption{letterpaper}
   {\setlength\stockheight {11in}%
    \setlength\stockwidth  {8.5in}}
\DeclareOption{legalpaper}
   {\setlength\stockheight {14in}%
    \setlength\stockwidth  {8.5in}}
\DeclareOption{executivepaper}
   {\setlength\stockheight {10.5in}%
    \setlength\stockwidth  {7.25in}}
\DeclareOption{ebook}
   {\setlength\stockheight {9in}%
    \setlength\stockwidth  {6in}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    The \Lopt{landscape} option switches the values of the height and width,
% assuming that the dimensions were originally given for portrait 
% orientation.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{landscape}
  {\setlength\@tempdima  {\stockheight}
   \setlength\stockheight{\stockwidth}
   \setlength\stockwidth {\@tempdima}}

%    \end{macrocode}
%
%
% \subsection{Choosing the type size}
%
%    The type size options are handled by defining |\@ptsize| to contain
%    the last digit of the size in question and branching on |\ifcase|
%    statements. This is done for historical reasons to stay compatible
%    with other packages that use the |\@ptsize| variable to select
%    special actions. It makes the declarations of size options less
%    than 10pt difficult. In this class \texttt{9} is used for the 
%    \Lopt{9pt} option, assuming that the class will never define a 
%    \Lopt{19pt} option.
%
%    Option \Lopt{10pt} will be the default.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/07}{Added 17pt option}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\@ptsize}{0}
\DeclareOption{9pt}{\renewcommand{\@ptsize}{9}}
\DeclareOption{10pt}{\renewcommand{\@ptsize}{0}}
\DeclareOption{11pt}{\renewcommand{\@ptsize}{1}}
\DeclareOption{12pt}{\renewcommand{\@ptsize}{2}}
\DeclareOption{14pt}{\renewcommand{\@ptsize}{4}}
\DeclareOption{17pt}{\renewcommand{\@ptsize}{7}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%
%  \subsection{Two-side or one-side printing}
%
%    For two-sided printing we use the switch |\if@twoside|. In
%    addition we have to set the |\if@mparswitch| to get any margin
%    paragraphs into the outside margin. The default is \Lopt{twoside}.
% \begin{macro}{\if@twoside}
% \begin{macro}{\if@mparswitch}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{twoside}{\@twosidetrue  \@mparswitchtrue}
\DeclareOption{oneside}{\@twosidefalse \@mparswitchfalse}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%  \subsection{Two column printing}
%
%    Two-column and one-column printing is again realized via a switch
%    which is defined in the kernel. The default is single column printing.
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@twocolumn}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{onecolumn}{\@twocolumnfalse}
\DeclareOption{twocolumn}{\@twocolumntrue}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%  \subsection{The \Lopt{draft} option}
%
%    If the user requests \Lopt{draft} we show any overfull boxes,
%    marginal notes are allowed, and any copyright notices are not
%    printed. For symmetry, we also define a \Lopt{final} option
%    which is the default.
%
%    The user can use the |\ifdraftdoc| flag to add additional effects: \\
% |\ifdraftdoc <additional code> \fi|
% \begin{macro}{\ifdraftdoc}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifdraftdoc\draftdocfalse
\setlength{\overfullrule}{\z@}
\DeclareOption{final}{\setlength{\overfullrule}{\z@}
                      \draftdocfalse
                      \msdocfalse}
\DeclareOption{draft}{\setlength\overfullrule{5pt}%
                      \draftdoctrue
                      \msdocfalse}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{The \Lopt{ms} option}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifmsdoc}
%    The \Lopt{ms} option makes the document look as though it was produced
% on a typewriter. We use a flag for remembering this. The user may also
% use the flag for specifying \Lopt{ms} effects.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifmsdoc
  \msdocfalse
\DeclareOption{ms}{%
  \msdoctrue
  \draftdocfalse
  \setlength\overfullrule{\z@}
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{The \Lopt{showtrims} option}
%
%    The \Lopt{showtrims} option will display crosses at the corners
% of the logical pages showing where the stock should be trimmed.
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifshowtrims}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifshowtrims
  \showtrimsfalse
\DeclareOption{showtrims}{\showtrimstrue}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{The \Lopt{article} option}
%
%    The \Lopt{article} option typesets as a simulation of the
% \Lpack{article} class.
% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Added article option}
% \begin{macro}{\ifartopt}
% |\ifartopt| is a flag (TRUE) if the \Lopt{article} option is called.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifartopt
  \artoptfalse
\DeclareOption{article}{\artopttrue}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{The \Lopt{subfigure} option}
%
% The \Lopt{subfigure} option has been made a no-op since version 1.1.
% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Added subfigure option}
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Effectively removed subfigure option}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{subfigure}{%
  \ClassWarningNoLine{memoir}{The subfigure option is not required}}

%    \end{macrocode}
%
%
% \subsection{The openright, openleft and openany options}
%
%    The \Lopt{openright} option specifies that Chapters must begin on 
% recto pages. The \Lopt{openleft} option specifies that Chapters
% must begin on verso pages and the \Lopt{openany} option lets Chapters 
% start on any page.
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/10/24}{Added the openleft option}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{openright}{\@openrighttrue}
\DeclareOption{openany}{\@openrightfalse}
\DeclareOption{openleft}{\@openlefttrue}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\openright}
% \begin{macro}{\openany}
% \begin{macro}{\openleft}
% Commands that can be used to change the option in the middle of the 
% document\footnote{Openleft provided to meet a request by 
% Vladimir G.~Ivanovic (\texttt{vladimir@acm.org}) in September 2001.}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\openright}{\@openrighttrue\@openleftfalse%
  \gdef\clearforchapter{\cleartorecto}}
\newcommand{\openany}{\@openrightfalse\@openleftfalse%
  \gdef\clearforchapter{\clearpage}}
\newcommand{\openleft}{\@openlefttrue
  \gdef\clearforchapter{\cleartoverso}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Equation numbering on the left}
%
% The \Lopt{leqno} option prints equation numbers on the left. This
% is implemented via an external class option file.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{leqno}{\input{leqno.clo}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{Flush left math displays}
%
% The \Lopt{fleqn} option redefines the displayed math environments
% so that they are left adjusted with an indent of |\mathindent|
% from the current left margin. This
% is implemented via an external class option file.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{fleqn}{\input{fleqn.clo}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{Open bibliography}
%
% The \Lopt{openbib} option redefines the |thebibliography| so that each
% block starts on a new line, and succeeding lines in a block are
% indented by |\bibindent|.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2001/11/28}{Replaced \cs{AtEndOfPackage} with \cs{AtEndOfClass}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{openbib}{%
  \AtEndOfClass{%
    \renewcommand\@openbib@code{%
      \advance\leftmargin\bibindent
      \itemindent -\bibindent
      \listparindent \itemindent
      \parsep \z@
     }%
    \renewcommand\newblock{\par}}%
}

%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{Old font commands}
%
% The \Lopt{oldfontcommands} option enables commands like |\bf| and friends.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/29}{Added the oldfontcommands option}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{oldfontcommands}{%
  \@memoldfonttrue}

%    \end{macrocode}
%
%
% \section{Executing Options} \label{sec:xopt}
%
%    Here we execute the default options to initialize certain
%    variables. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ExecuteOptions{final,letterpaper,10pt,onecolumn,openright,twoside}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    The |\ProcessOptions| command causes the execution of the code
%    for every option \Lopt{foo}
%    which is declared and for which the user typed
%    the \Lopt{foo} option in his
%    |\documentclass| command.  For every option \Lopt{bar} he typed,
%    which is not declared, the option is assumed to be a global option.
%    All options will be passed as document options to any
%    |\usepackage| command in the document preamble.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ProcessOptions

%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cleartorecto}
% A repeat of |\cleardoublepage|; clears to a recto (odd-numbered) page.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\cleartorecto{\clearpage\if@twoside \ifodd\c@page\else
  \hbox{}\thispagestyle{cleared}%
  \newpage\if@twocolumn\hbox{}\newpage\fi\fi\fi}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cleartoverso}
% Clears to a verso (even-numbered) page.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\cleartoverso{\clearpage\if@twoside 
  \ifodd\c@page\hbox{}\thispagestyle{cleared}%
  \newpage\if@twocolumn\hbox{}\newpage\fi\fi\fi}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%

%    Set |\clearforchapter| according to the options.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\if@openleft
  \openleft
\else
  \if@openright
    \openright
  \else
    \openany
  \fi
\fi

%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    Now that all the options have been executed we can load the
%    chosen class option file that contains all size dependent code.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifnum\@ptsize = 9\relax
  \input{mem\@ptsize.clo}
\else
  \input{mem1\@ptsize.clo}
\fi
%</class>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%  \section{Loading Packages} \label{sec:lpack}
%
%  This class file does not load additional package files.
%
%
% \section{Document Layout} \label{sec:docl}
% \label{sec:maincode}
%
%  In this section we deal with the more difficult typographical
%  details.
%
% \subsection{Fonts}
%
%    \LaTeX\ offers the user commands to change the size of the font,
%    relative to the `main' size. Each relative size changing command
%    |\size| executes the command
%    |\@setfontsize||\size|\meta{font-size}\meta{baselineskip} where:
%
%    \begin{description}
%    \item[\meta{font-size}] The absolute size of the font to use from
%        now on.
%
%    \item[\meta{baselineskip}] The normal value of |\baselineskip|
%        for the size of the font selected. (The actual value will be
%        |\baselinestretch| * \meta{baselineskip}.)
%    \end{description}
%
%    A number of commands, defined in the \LaTeX\ kernel, shorten the
%    following  definitions and are used throughout. They are listed in 
% Table~\ref{tab:sh}.
%
% \begin{table}
% \centering
% \caption{Shorthand font point size commands}\label{tab:sh}
% \begin{tabular}{ll@{\qquad}ll@{\qquad}ll}
%  \verb=\@vpt= & 5 & \verb=\@vipt= & 6 & \verb=\@viipt= & 7 \\
%  \verb=\@viiipt= & 8 & \verb=\@ixpt= & 9 & \verb=\@xpt= & 10 \\
%  \verb=\@xipt= & 10.95 & \verb=\@xiipt= & 12 & \verb=\@xivpt= & 14.4\\
%  \verb=\@xviipt= & 17.28 & \verb=\@xxpt= & 20.74 & \verb=\@xxvpt= & 24.88\\
%  \end{tabular}
%  \end{table}
%
% \begin{macro}{\normalsize}
% \begin{macro}{\@normalsize}
%
%    The user level command for the main size is |\normalsize|.
%    Internally \LaTeX\ uses |\@normalsize| when it refers to the
%    main size. |\@normalsize| will be defined to work like
%    |\normalsize| if the latter is redefined from its default
%    definition (that just issues an error message). Otherwise
%    |\@normalsize| simply selects a 9pt/11pt size.
%
%    The |\normalsize| macro also sets new values for\\
%    |\abovedisplayskip|, |\abovedisplayshortskip| and
%    |\belowdisplayshortskip|.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*9pt|10pt|11pt|12pt|14pt|17pt>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \changes{v0.11 (mem14.clo)}{2001/10/30}{Changed baseline skip from 17.28pt to 17.5pt}
%    \begin{macrocode}

\renewcommand{\normalsize}{%
%<*9pt>
   \@setfontsize\normalsize\@ixpt\@xpt
   \abovedisplayskip 9\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4.5\p@
   \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus 3\p@
   \belowdisplayshortskip 5.5\p@ \@plus 2.5\p@ \@minus 3\p@
%</9pt>
%<*10pt>
   \@setfontsize\normalsize\@xpt\@xiipt
   \abovedisplayskip 10\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus5\p@
   \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
   \belowdisplayshortskip 6\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus3\p@
%</10pt>
%<*11pt>
   \@setfontsize\normalsize\@xipt{13.6}%
   \abovedisplayskip 11\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus6\p@
   \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
   \belowdisplayshortskip 6.5\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@
%</11pt>
%<*12pt>
   \@setfontsize\normalsize\@xiipt{14.5}%
   \abovedisplayskip 12\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus7\p@
   \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
   \belowdisplayshortskip 6.5\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@
%</12pt>
%<*14pt>
   \@setfontsize\normalsize\@xivpt{17.5}%
   \abovedisplayskip 14\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus8\p@
   \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
   \belowdisplayshortskip 7\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@
%</14pt>
%<*17pt>
   \@setfontsize\normalsize\@xviipt{22}%
   \abovedisplayskip 15\p@ \@plus4\p@ \@minus8\p@
   \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus4\p@
   \belowdisplayshortskip 8\p@ \@plus4\p@ \@minus3\p@
%</17pt>
%    \end{macrocode}
%    The |\belowdisplayskip| is always equal to the
%    |\abovedisplayskip|. The parameters of the first level list are
%    always given by |\@listI|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
   \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
   \let\@listi\@listI}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    We initially choose the normalsize font.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\normalsize
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\small}
%    This code is similar to that for |\normalsize|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\small}{%
%<*9pt>
    \@setfontsize\small\@viiipt{9.5}
    \abovedisplayskip 6\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@
    \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus 2\p@
    \belowdisplayshortskip 4\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@
    \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
                \topsep 2\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@
                \parsep 1\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
                \itemsep \parsep
%%                \itemindent\z@
                }%
%</9pt>
%<*10pt>
   \@setfontsize\small\@ixpt{11}%
   \abovedisplayskip 8.5\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus4\p@
   \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus2\p@
   \belowdisplayshortskip 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
   \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
               \topsep 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
               \parsep 2\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
               \itemsep \parsep
%%               \itemindent\z@
              }%
%</10pt>
%<*11pt>
   \@setfontsize\small\@xpt\@xiipt
   \abovedisplayskip 10\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus5\p@
   \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
   \belowdisplayshortskip 6\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus3\p@
   \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
               \topsep 6\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
               \parsep 3\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@
               \itemsep \parsep
%%               \itemindent\z@
              }%
%</11pt>
%<*12pt>
   \@setfontsize\small\@xipt{13.6}
   \abovedisplayskip 11\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus6\p@
   \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
   \belowdisplayshortskip 6.5\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@
   \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
               \topsep 9\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus5\p@
               \parsep 4.5\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@
               \itemsep \parsep
%%               \itemindent\z@
              }%
%</12pt>
%<*14pt>
   \@setfontsize\small\@xiipt{14.5}
   \abovedisplayskip 12\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus7\p@
   \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
   \belowdisplayshortskip 6.5\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@
   \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
               \topsep 11\p@ \@plus4\p@ \@minus6\p@
               \parsep 6\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus\p@
               \itemsep \parsep
%%               \itemindent\z@
              }%
%</14pt>
%<*17pt>
   \@setfontsize\small\@xivpt{17}
   \abovedisplayskip 12\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus7\p@
   \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
   \belowdisplayshortskip 7\p@ \@plus4\p@ \@minus3\p@
   \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
               \topsep 11\p@ \@plus4\p@ \@minus6\p@
               \parsep 6\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus\p@
               \itemsep \parsep
%%               \itemindent\z@
              }%
%</17pt>
   \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\footnotesize}
%    This code is similar to that for |\normalsize|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\footnotesize}{%
%<*9pt>
    \@setfontsize\footnotesize\@viipt{8}
    \abovedisplayskip 6\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@
    \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus 2\p@
    \belowdisplayshortskip 4\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@
    \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
                \topsep 2\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@
                \parsep 1\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
                \itemsep \parsep
%%                \itemindent\z@
               }%
%</9pt>
%<*10pt>
   \@setfontsize\footnotesize\@viiipt{9.5}%
   \abovedisplayskip 6\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus4\p@
   \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus\p@
   \belowdisplayshortskip 3\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus2\p@
   \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
               \topsep 3\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
               \parsep 2\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
               \itemsep \parsep
%%               \itemindent\z@
              }%
%</10pt>
%<*11pt>
   \@setfontsize\footnotesize\@ixpt{11}%
   \abovedisplayskip 8\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus4\p@
   \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus\p@
   \belowdisplayshortskip 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
   \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
               \topsep 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
               \parsep 2\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
               \itemsep \parsep
%%               \itemindent\z@
              }%
%</11pt>
%<*12pt>
   \@setfontsize\footnotesize\@xpt\@xiipt
   \abovedisplayskip 10\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus5\p@
   \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
   \belowdisplayshortskip 6\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus3\p@
   \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
               \topsep 6\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
               \parsep 3\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@
               \itemsep \parsep
%%               \itemindent\z@
              }%
%</12pt>
%<*14pt>
   \@setfontsize\footnotesize\@xipt{13.6}%
   \abovedisplayskip 11\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus6\p@
   \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
   \belowdisplayshortskip 6.5\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@
   \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
               \topsep 6.5\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@
               \parsep 4\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus\p@
               \itemsep \parsep
%%               \itemindent\z@
              }%
%</14pt>
%<*17pt>
   \@setfontsize\footnotesize\@xiipt{14}%
   \abovedisplayskip 12\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus7\p@
   \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
   \belowdisplayshortskip 6.5\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@
   \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
               \topsep 6.5\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@
               \parsep 4\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus\p@
               \itemsep \parsep
%%               \itemindent\z@
              }%
%</17pt>
   \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\miniscule}
% \begin{macro}{\scriptsize}
% \begin{macro}{\tiny}
% \begin{macro}{\large}
% \begin{macro}{\Large}
% \begin{macro}{\LARGE}
% \begin{macro}{\huge}
% \begin{macro}{\Huge}
% \begin{macro}{\HUGE}
%    These are all much simpler than the previous macros, they just
%    select a new fontsize, but leave the parameters for displays and
%    lists alone.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Added \cs{miniscule} and \cs{HUGE} font sizes}
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Twiddled some font sizes to get regular steps}
% \changes{v1.2a}{2002/08/27}{Fixed 12pt scriptsize bug}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*9pt>
\newcommand{\miniscule}{\@setfontsize\miniscule\@vpt{6}}
\newcommand{\tiny}{\@setfontsize\tiny\@vpt{6}}
\newcommand{\scriptsize}{\@setfontsize\scriptsize\@vipt{7}}
\newcommand{\large}{\@setfontsize\large\@xpt{12}}
\newcommand{\Large}{\@setfontsize\Large\@xipt{13.6}}
\newcommand{\LARGE}{\@setfontsize\LARGE\@xiipt{14.5}}
\newcommand{\huge}{\@setfontsize\huge\@xivpt{18}}
\newcommand{\Huge}{\@setfontsize\Huge\@xviipt{22}}
\newcommand{\HUGE}{\@setfontsize\HUGE\@xxpt{25}}
%</9pt>
%<*10pt>
\newcommand{\miniscule}{\@setfontsize\miniscule\@vpt{6}}
\newcommand{\tiny}{\@setfontsize\tiny\@vipt{7}}
\newcommand{\scriptsize}{\@setfontsize\scriptsize\@viipt{8}}
\newcommand{\large}{\@setfontsize\large\@xipt{13.6}}
\newcommand{\Large}{\@setfontsize\Large\@xiipt{14.5}}
\newcommand{\LARGE}{\@setfontsize\LARGE\@xivpt{18}}
\newcommand{\huge}{\@setfontsize\huge\@xviipt{22}}
\newcommand{\Huge}{\@setfontsize\Huge\@xxpt{25}}
\newcommand{\HUGE}{\@setfontsize\HUGE\@xxvpt{30}}
%</10pt>
%<*11pt>
\newcommand{\miniscule}{\@setfontsize\miniscule\@vipt{7}}
\newcommand{\tiny}{\@setfontsize\tiny\@viipt{8}}
\newcommand{\scriptsize}{\@setfontsize\scriptsize\@viiipt{9.5}}
\newcommand{\large}{\@setfontsize\large\@xiipt{14.5}}
\newcommand{\Large}{\@setfontsize\Large\@xivpt{18}}
\newcommand{\LARGE}{\@setfontsize\LARGE\@xviipt{22}}
\newcommand{\huge}{\@setfontsize\huge\@xxpt{25}}
\newcommand{\Huge}{\@setfontsize\Huge\@xxvpt{30}}
\let\HUGE=\Huge
%</11pt>
%<*12pt>
\newcommand{\miniscule}{\@setfontsize\miniscule\@viipt{8}}
\newcommand{\tiny}{\@setfontsize\tiny\@viiipt{9.5}}
\newcommand{\scriptsize}{\@setfontsize\scriptsize\@ixpt\@xpt}
\newcommand{\large}{\@setfontsize\large\@xivpt{18}}
\newcommand{\Large}{\@setfontsize\Large\@xviipt{22}}
\newcommand{\LARGE}{\@setfontsize\LARGE\@xxpt{25}}
\newcommand{\huge}{\@setfontsize\huge\@xxvpt{30}}
\let\Huge=\huge
\let\HUGE=\huge
%</12pt>
%<*14pt>
\newcommand{\miniscule}{\@setfontsize\miniscule\@viiipt{9.5}}
\newcommand{\tiny}{\@setfontsize\tiny\@ixpt{10}}
\newcommand{\scriptsize}{\@setfontsize\scriptsize\@xpt{12}}
\newcommand{\large}{\@setfontsize\large\@xviipt{22}}
\newcommand{\Large}{\@setfontsize\Large\@xxpt{25}}
\newcommand{\LARGE}{\@setfontsize\LARGE\@xxvpt{30}}
\let\huge=\LARGE
\let\Huge=\LARGE
\let\HUGE=\LARGE
%</14pt>
%<*17pt>
\newcommand{\miniscule}{\@setfontsize\miniscule\@ixpt{10}}
\newcommand{\tiny}{\@setfontsize\tiny\@xpt{12}}
\newcommand{\scriptsize}{\@setfontsize\scriptsize\@xipt{13.6}}
\newcommand{\large}{\@setfontsize\large\@xxpt{25}}
\newcommand{\Large}{\@setfontsize\Large\@xxvpt{30}}
\newcommand{\LARGE}{\@setfontsize\LARGE\@xxvpt{30}}
\let\LARGE=\Large
\let\huge=\Large
\let\Huge=\Large
\let\HUGE=\Large
%</17pt>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</9pt|10pt|11pt|12pt|14pt|17pt>
%<*class>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\captionsize}
%  This internal command holds the font size for captions. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\captionsize}{\normalsize}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Paragraphing}
%
% \begin{macro}{\lineskip}
% \begin{macro}{\normallineskip}
%    These parameters control \TeX's behaviour when two lines tend to
%    come too close together.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\lineskip{1\p@}
\setlength\normallineskip{1\p@}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\baselinestretch}
%    This is used as a multiplier for |\baselineskip|. The default is
%    to \emph{not} stretch the baselines.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\parskip}
% \begin{macro}{\onelineskip}
%
% |\parskip| is additional vertical space between paragraphs;  default
% is zero.
%
%
%    |\onelineskip| is the default space between baselines.
% \changes{v0.11 (mem14.clo)}{2001/10/30}{Changed \cs{onelineskip} from 17.28pt to 17.5pt}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\parskip{0\p@ \@plus \p@}
%</class>
%<*9pt|10pt|11pt|12pt|14pt|17pt>
%<9pt>\setlength{\onelineskip}{\@xpt\p@}
%<10pt>\setlength{\onelineskip}{\@xiipt\p@}
%<11pt>\setlength{\onelineskip}{13.6\p@}
%<12pt>\setlength{\onelineskip}{14.5\p@}
%<14pt>\setlength{\onelineskip}{17.5\p@}
%<17pt>\setlength{\onelineskip}{22\p@}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\parindent}
%    |\parskip| gives extra vertical space between paragraphs and
%    |\parindent| is the width of the paragraph indentation. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\if@twocolumn
  \setlength\parindent{1em}
\else
%<9pt>  \setlength\parindent{12\p@}
%<10pt>  \setlength\parindent{15\p@}
%<11pt>  \setlength\parindent{17\p@}
%<12pt>  \setlength\parindent{1.5em}
%<14pt>  \setlength\parindent{1.5em}
%<17pt>  \setlength\parindent{1.5em}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\smallskipamount}
% \begin{macro}{\medskipamount}
% \begin{macro}{\bigskipamount}
% The values for these three parameters are set in the LaTeX kernel.
% Historically they have been size invariant.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\smallskipamount{3\p@ \@plus 1\p@ \@minus 1\p@}
\setlength\medskipamount{6\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
\setlength\bigskipamount{12\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
%</9pt|10pt|11pt|12pt|14pt|17pt>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@lowpenalty}
% \begin{macro}{\@medpenalty}
% \begin{macro}{\@highpenalty}%
%    The commands |\nopagebreak| and |\nolinebreak| put in penalties
%    to discourage these breaks at the point they are put in.
%    They use |\@lowpenalty|, |\@medpenalty| or |\@highpenalty|,
%    dependent on their argument.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*class>
\@lowpenalty   51
\@medpenalty  151
\@highpenalty 301
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\clubpenalty}
% \begin{macro}{\widowpenalty}
%    These penalties are used to discourage club and widow lines.
%    The default values are 150 each, but we want stronger discouragement.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\clubpenalty  1000
\widowpenalty 1000
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\displaywidowpenalty}
% \begin{macro}{\predisplaypenalty}
% \begin{macro}{\postdisplaypenalty}
%    Discourage, but do not prevent, widows in front of a math display
%    and forbid breaking directly in front of a display. Allow break
%    after a display without a penalty. The default values are
%    used, therefore we only show them here.
%    \begin{macrocode}
% \displaywidowpenalty 50
% \predisplaypenalty   10000
% \postdisplaypenalty  0
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\interlinepenalty}
%    Allow the breaking of a page in the middle of a paragraph.
%    \begin{macrocode}
% \interlinepenalty 0
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\brokenpenalty}
%    We allow the breaking of a page after a hyphenated line.
%    \begin{macrocode}
% \brokenpenalty 100
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\hangpara}
% |\hangpara{|\meta{indent}|}{|\meta{afternum}|}| at the start of a 
% paragraph will make it hung. If \meta{indent} is positive the left
% will be indented, otherwise the right. If \meta{afternum}, say N,
% is positive the N+1 th lines onwards will be indented. For N negative,
% the first N lines will be indented.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\hangpara}[2]{\hangindent#1\hangafter#2\noindent}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{environment}{hangparas}
% |\begin{hangparas}{|\meta{indent}|}{|\meta{afternum}|}| hangs 
% a series of paragraphs.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{hangparas}[2]{\setlength{\parindent}{\z@}
  \everypar={\hangpara{#1}{#2}}}{\par}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
% 
%
%
% \subsection{Page Layout}
%
%    All margin dimensions are measured from a point one inch from the
%    top and lefthand side of the page.
%
% \subsubsection{Vertical spacing}
%
% \begin{macro}{\headheight}
% \begin{macro}{\headsep}
% \begin{macro}{\topskip}
% \begin{macro}{\footskip}
%    The |\headheight| is the height of the box that will contain the
%    running head. In this class it is point size dependent (normally it
% is a constant 12pt). 
%
% The |\headsep| is the distance between the bottom
%    of the running head and the top of the text. 
%
% The |\topskip| is the
%    |\baselineskip| for the first line on a page; 
%    \LaTeX's output routine will not work properly if it has the
%    value 0pt, so do not do that!
%
%    The distance from the baseline of the box which contains the
%    running footer to the baseline of last line of text is controlled
%    by the |\footskip|.
% \changes{v0.11 (mem14.clo)}{2001/10/30}{Changed \cs{headheight} from 16pt to 17.5pt}
% \changes{v0.11 (mem11.clo)}{2002/03/10}{Changed \cs{headheight} from 13pt to 13.6pt}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</class>
%<*9pt|10pt|11pt|12pt|14pt|17pt>
%<*9pt>
\setlength\headheight{11\p@}
\setlength\headsep{.225in}
\setlength\topskip{9\p@}
\setlength\footskip{.33in}
%</9pt>
%<*10pt>
\setlength\headheight{12\p@}
\setlength\headsep{.25in}
\setlength\topskip{10\p@}
\setlength\footskip{.35in}
%</10pt>
%<*11pt>
\setlength\headheight{13.6\p@}
\setlength\headsep{.275in}
\setlength\topskip{11\p@}
\setlength\footskip{.38in}
%</11pt>
%<*12pt>
\setlength\headheight{14\p@}
\setlength\headsep{.275in}
\setlength\topskip{12\p@}
\setlength\footskip{30\p@}
%</12pt>
%<*14pt>
\setlength\headheight{17.5\p@}
\setlength\headsep{.30in}
\setlength\topskip{14.4\p@}
\setlength\footskip{.4in}
%</14pt>
%<*17pt>
\setlength\headheight{22\p@}
\setlength\headsep{.30in}
\setlength\topskip{14.4\p@}
\setlength\footskip{.4in}
%</17pt>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\maxdepth}
% \begin{macro}{\@maxdepth}
%    The \TeX\ primitive register |\maxdepth| has a function that is
%    similar to that of |\topskip|. The register |\@maxdepth| should
%    always contain a copy of |\maxdepth|. In both plain \TeX\ and
%    \LaTeX~2.09 |\maxdepth| had a fixed value of \texttt{4pt}; in
%    native \LaTeX 2e mode we let the value depend on the typesize. We
%    set it so that |\maxdepth| $+$ |\topskip| $=$ typesize $\times
%    1.5$. As it happens, in these classes |\topskip| is equal to the
%    typesize, therefor we set |\maxdepth| to half the value of
%    |\topskip|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\maxdepth{.5\topskip}
\setlength\@maxdepth\maxdepth
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{The dimension of text}
%
% \begin{macro}{\lxvchars}
% The length |\lxvchars| is the approximate length of a normal
% text line containing 65 characters (a typesetters rule of thumb is
% that there should be about 60--70 characters per line).
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<9pt>\setlength\lxvchars{276\p@}  %
%<10pt>\setlength\lxvchars{300\p@} % standard 345pt
%<11pt>\setlength\lxvchars{324\p@} % standard 360pt
%<12pt>\setlength\lxvchars{336\p@} % standard 390pt
%<14pt>\setlength\lxvchars{408\p@} %
%<17pt>\setlength\lxvchars{444\p@} %
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\xlvchars}
% The length |\xlvchars| is the approximate length of a normal
% double column text line containing 45 characters 
% (a typesetters rule of thumb is
% that there should be about 40--50 characters per column line).
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<9pt>\setlength\xlvchars{192\p@}  %
%<10pt>\setlength\xlvchars{204\p@} % 
%<11pt>\setlength\xlvchars{216\p@} % 
%<12pt>\setlength\xlvchars{240\p@} % 
%<14pt>\setlength\xlvchars{288\p@} %
%<17pt>\setlength\xlvchars{312\p@} %
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\marginparsep}
% \begin{macro}{\marginparpush}
% |\marginparsep| is the horizontal space between the text block and 
% marginal notes, while |\marginparpush| is the minimum vertical
% separation between the notes.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\if@twocolumn
  \setlength\marginparsep{10\p@}
\else
  \setlength\marginparsep{7\p@}
\fi
%<9pt|10pt|11pt>\setlength{\marginparpush}{5\p@}
%<12pt|14pt>\setlength{\marginparpush}{7\p@}
%<17pt>\setlength{\marginparpush}{10\p@}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</9pt|10pt|11pt|12pt|14pt|17pt>
%<*class>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setrectanglesize}
%  The macro |\setrectanglesize{|\meta{H}|}{|\meta{W}|}{|\meta{r}|}| 
% calculates the height and width of a rectangle given any two out of
% the three arguments. An unvalued argument is denoted by |*|.
%
% Table~\ref{tab:setrect} shows the argument combinations and the result
% for each combination.
% \begin{table}
% \DeleteShortVerb{\|}
% \centering
% \caption{Arguments and results for \cs{setrectanglesize}}\label{tab:setrect}
% \begin{tabular}{ccc|l} \hline
%  H & W & r & Result  \\ \hline
%  * & W & r & $H = rW$  \\{}
%  * & W & * & $H = W$   \\{}
%  * & * & r & ambiguous   \\{}
%  * & * & * & ambiguous   \\{}
%  H & W & r & $H, W$  \\
%  H & W & * & $H, W$   \\
%  H & * & r & $W = rH$  \\
%  H & * & * & $W = H$   \\
%  \hline
% \end{tabular}
% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
% \end{table}
%
% The
% calculated height and width are stored in |\@tempdima| and |\@tempdimb|
% respectively. Both lengths are set to zero if there is an error.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setrectanglesize}[3]{%
  \nametest{#1}{*}
  \ifsamename                           % H = *
    \nametest{#2}{*}
    \ifsamename                         % W = *
      \ClassError{memoir}{%
        The combination of argument values is ambiguous.\MessageBreak
        The lengths will be set to zero}{\@ehd}
      \@tempdima = \z@
      \@tempdimb = \z@
    \else                               % W
      \nametest{#3}{*}
      \ifsamename                       % r = *
        \@tempdimb = #2\relax
        \@tempdima = \@tempdimb
      \else                             % r
        \@tempdimb = #2\relax
        \@tempdima = #3\@tempdimb
      \fi
    \fi
  \else                                 % H
    \nametest{#2}{*}
    \ifsamename                         % W = *
      \nametest{#3}{*}
      \ifsamename                       % r = *
        \@tempdima = #1\relax
        \@tempdimb = \@tempdima
      \else                             % r
        \@tempdima = #1\relax
        \@tempdimb = #3\@tempdima
      \fi
    \else                               % W
      \@tempdima = #1\relax
      \@tempdimb = #2\relax
    \fi
  \fi
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setfillsize}
% Consider a set of 4 lengths, $T$, $L$, $C$, and $R$, such that
% $T = L + C + R$, where $T$ is a fixed size and normally $C$ is also fixed.
% Also $L$ and $R$ may be specified independently of each other or as a
% ratio (i.e., $L = rR$ or $R = rL$).
%  The macro 
% |\setfillsize{|\meta{T}|}{|\meta{C}|}{|\meta{L}|}{|\meta{R}|}{|\meta{r}|}|
% maintains these constraints among the variables, where an unvalued 
% argument is denoted by |*|. 
%
% Table~\ref{tab:setfill} shows the argument combinations and the result
% for each combination.
% \begin{table}
% \DeleteShortVerb{\|}
% \centering
% \caption{Arguments and results for \cs{setfillsize}}\label{tab:setfill}
% \begin{tabular}{cccc|ll} \hline
%  C & L & R & r & Result                     &   \\ \hline
%  * & * & R & r & $L = rR$,                  & $C = T - L - R$ \\{}
%  * & * & R & * & $L = R$,                   & $C = T - L - R$ \\{}
%  * & * & * & r & ambigous                   & \\{}
%  * & * & * & * & ambiguous                  & \\{}
%  * & L & R & r & $L$, $R$,                  & $C = T - L - R$ \\{}
%  * & L & R & * & $L$, $R$,                  & $C = T - L - R$ \\{}
%  * & L & * & r & $R = rL$,                  & $C = T - L - R$ \\{}
%  * & L & * & * & $R = L$,                   & $C = T - L - R$ \\{}
%  C & * & R & r & $L = T - C - R$            & $C$ \\
%  C & * & R & * & $L = T - C - R$,           & $C$ \\
%  C & * & * & r & $L + R = T - C$, $R = rL$, & $C$ \\
%  C & * & * & * & $L + R = T - C$, $R = L$,  & $C$ \\
%  C & L & R & r & ambiguous                  & $C$ \\
%  C & L & R & * & ambiguous                  & $C$ \\ 
%  C & L & * & r & $R = T - C - L$,           & $C$ \\
%  C & L & * & * & $R = T - C - L$,           & $C$ \\
%  \hline
% \end{tabular}
% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
% \end{table}
%
%
% The
% calculated values of |C|, |L| and |R| are stored |\@tempdimc|, 
% |\@tempdima| and |\@tempdimb| respectively. If there is an error
% the lengths are set to zero.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setfillsize}[5]{%
  \nametest{#2}{*}
  \ifsamename                                % C = *
    \nametest{#3}{*}
    \ifsamename                              % L = *
      \nametest{#4}{*}
      \ifsamename                            % R = *
        \ClassError{memoir}{%
          The combination of argument values is ambiguous.\MessageBreak
          The lengths will be set to zero}{\@ehd}
        \@tempdima = \z@
        \@tempdimb = \z@
        \@tempdimc = \z@
      \else                                  % R 
        \nametest{#5}{*}
        \ifsamename                          % r = *
          \@tempdimb = #4\relax
          \@tempdima = \@tempdimb
          \@tempdimc = #1\relax
          \advance\@tempdimc -\@tempdima
          \advance\@tempdimc -\@tempdimb
        \else                                % r 
          \@tempdimb = #4\relax
          \@tempdima = #5\@tempdimb
          \@tempdimc = #1\relax
          \advance\@tempdimc -\@tempdima
          \advance\@tempdimc -\@tempdimb
        \fi
      \fi
    \else                                    % L 
      \nametest{#4}{*}
      \ifsamename                            % R = *
        \nametest{#5}{*}
        \ifsamename                          % r = *
          \@tempdima = #3\relax
          \@tempdimb = \@tempdima
          \@tempdimc = #1\relax
          \advance\@tempdimc -\@tempdima
          \advance\@tempdimc -\@tempdimb
        \else                                % r 
          \@tempdima = #3\relax
          \@tempdimb = #5\@tempdima
          \@tempdimc = #1\relax
          \advance\@tempdimc -\@tempdima
          \advance\@tempdimc -\@tempdimb
        \fi
      \else                                  % R
        \@tempdima = #3\relax
        \@tempdimb = #4\relax
        \@tempdimc = #1\relax
        \advance\@tempdimc -\@tempdima
        \advance\@tempdimc -\@tempdimb
      \fi
    \fi
  \else                                      % C is valued
    \nametest{#3}{*}
    \ifsamename                              % L = *
      \nametest{#4}{*}
      \ifsamename                            % R = *
        \nametest{#5}{*}
        \ifsamename                          % r = *
          \@tempdimc = #2\relax
          \@tempdima = #1\relax
          \advance\@tempdima -\@tempdimc
          \@tempdima = 0.5\@tempdima
          \@tempdimb = \@tempdima
        \else                                % r (CODE PERHAPS FIXED)
          \@tempdimc = #2\relax         % C
          \@tempdimb = #1\relax         % T
          \advance\@tempdimb -\@tempdimc % T - C
          \@tempdima = 1000sp
          \@tempdima = #5\@tempdima        % 1000r sp
          \advance\@tempdima by 1000sp   % 1000(1+r)sp
          \@tempcnta = \@tempdima        % 1000(1+r)
          \@tempdima = \@tempdimb        % T - C
          \divide\@tempdima by \@tempcnta  % (T-C)/1000(1+r) pts
          \@tempdima = 1000\@tempdima      % (T-C)/(1+r)  pts = L
          \advance\@tempdimb by -\@tempdima % = R
        \fi
      \else                                  % R 
        \@tempdimc = #2\relax
        \@tempdimb = #4\relax
        \@tempdima = #1\relax
        \advance\@tempdima -\@tempdimc
        \advance\@tempdima -\@tempdimb
      \fi
    \else                                    % L 
      \nametest{#4}{*}
      \ifsamename                            % R = *
        \@tempdimc = #2\relax
        \@tempdima = #3\relax
        \@tempdimb = #1\relax
        \advance\@tempdimb -\@tempdimc
        \advance\@tempdimb -\@tempdima
      \else                                  % R
        \ClassError{memoir}{%
          The combination of argument values is ambiguous.\MessageBreak
          The lengths will be set to zero}{\@ehd}
        \@tempdima = \z@
        \@tempdimb = \z@
        \@tempdimc = #2\relax
      \fi
    \fi
  \fi
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setstocksize}
% \begin{macro}{\settrims}
% \begin{macro}{\settrimmedsize}
% |\setstocksize{|\meta{height}|}{|\meta{width}|}| sets the height
% and width of the stock material and 
% |\settrims{|\meta{top}|}{|\meta{edge}|}| sets the trim lengths
% for the top and side (fore edge) of the stock.
% The macro |\settrimmedsize{|\meta{height}|}{|\meta{width}|}{|\meta{ratio}|}|
% sets the size for the trimmed page, based on |\setrectanglesize|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setstocksize}[2]{%
  \setlength{\stockheight}{#1} \setlength{\stockwidth}{#2}
}
\newcommand{\settrims}[2]{%
  \setlength{\trimtop}{#1} \setlength{\trimedge}{#2}
}
\newcommand{\settrimmedsize}[3]{%
  \setrectanglesize{#1}{#2}{#3}
  \setlength{\paperheight}{\@tempdima}
  \setlength{\paperwidth}{\@tempdimb}
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\settypeblocksize}
% |\settypeblocksize{|\meta{height}|}{|\meta{width}|}{|\meta{ratio}|}|
% calulates the |\textheight| and |\textwidth| from two out of the
% three arguments. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\settypeblocksize}[3]{%
  \setrectanglesize{#1}{#2}{#3}
  \setlength{\textheight}{\@tempdima}
  \setlength{\textwidth}{\@tempdimb}
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\spinemargin}
% \begin{macro}{\foremargin}
% \begin{macro}{\setlrmargins}
% |\setlrmargins{|\meta{L}|}{|\meta{R}|}{|\meta{r}|}| sets the Left (spine)
% and Right (fore edge) margins with constant typeblock.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\spinemargin}
\newlength{\foremargin}
\newcommand{\setlrmargins}[3]{%
  \setfillsize{\paperwidth}{\textwidth}{#1}{#2}{#3}
  \setlength{\textwidth}{\@tempdimc}
  \setlength{\spinemargin}{\@tempdima}
  \setlength{\foremargin}{\@tempdimb}
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setlrmarginsandblock}
% |\setlrmarginsandblock{|\meta{L}|}{|\meta{R}|}{|\meta{r}|}| sets the Left (spine)
% and Right (fore edge) margins with variable typeblock.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setlrmarginsandblock}[3]{%
  \setfillsize{\paperwidth}{*}{#1}{#2}{#3}
  \setlength{\textwidth}{\@tempdimc}
  \setlength{\spinemargin}{\@tempdima}
  \setlength{\foremargin}{\@tempdimb}
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\uppermargin}
% \begin{macro}{\lowermargin}
% \begin{macro}{\setulmargins}
% |\setulmargins{|\meta{L}|}{|\meta{R}|}{|\meta{r}|}| sets the Left (upper)
% and Right (lower) margins with constant typeblock.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\uppermargin}
\newlength{\lowermargin}
\newcommand{\setulmargins}[3]{%
  \setfillsize{\paperheight}{\textheight}{#1}{#2}{#3}
  \setlength{\textheight}{\@tempdimc}
  \setlength{\uppermargin}{\@tempdima}
  \setlength{\lowermargin}{\@tempdimb}
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setulmarginsandblock}
% |\setulmarginsandblock{|\meta{L}|}{|\meta{R}|}{|\meta{r}|}| sets the Left (upper)
% and Right (lower) margins with variable typeblock.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setulmarginsandblock}[3]{%
  \setfillsize{\paperheight}{*}{#1}{#2}{#3}
  \setlength{\textheight}{\@tempdimc}
  \setlength{\uppermargin}{\@tempdima}
  \setlength{\lowermargin}{\@tempdimb}
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\headdrop}
% \begin{macro}{\setheaderspaces}
% |\setheaderspaces{|\meta{L}|}{|\meta{R}|}{|\meta{r}|}| sets the Left (head margin)
% and Right (headsep) spacing with constant headheight.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\headdrop}
\newcommand{\setheaderspaces}[3]{%
  \setfillsize{\uppermargin}{\headheight}{#1}{#2}{#3}
  \setlength{\headheight}{\@tempdimc}
  \setlength{\headdrop}{\@tempdima}
  \setlength{\headsep}{\@tempdimb}
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setheadfoot}
% |\setheadfoot{|\meta{headheight}|}{|\meta{footskip}|}|
% sets the headheight and the footskip.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setheadfoot}[2]{%
  \setlength{\headheight}{#1}
  \setlength{\footskip}{#2}
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setcolsepandrule}
% |\setcolsepandrule{|\meta{colsep}|}{|\meta{thickness}|}|
% sets the column separation and the rule thickness.
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/09/20}{Changed \cs{setcolseprule} to 
% \cs{setcolsepandrule} to match the documentation.}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setcolsepandrule}[2]{%
  \setlength{\columnsep}{#1}
  \setlength{\columnseprule}{#2}
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setmarginnotes}
% |\setmarginnotes{|\meta{sep}|}{|\meta{width}|}{|\meta{push}|}|
% sets the marginpar parameters.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setmarginnotes}[3]{%
  \setlength{\marginparsep}{#1}
  \setlength{\marginparwidth}{#2}
  \setlength{\marginparpush}{#3}
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
%    Initialise the paper size and trimming to their default values.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\settrimmedsize{\stockheight}{\stockwidth}{*}
\settrims{\z@}{\z@}

%    \end{macrocode}
%
%
%
%    What now follows is the standard class's method for setting up
% the dimensions.
%
%    Set |\@tempdimb| to size-dependent initial line length and
% set |\@tempdima| to the maximum textwidth for the paper width, 
% an inch margin on either side. In the standard classes the initial
% line length is about 14\% greater than |\lxvchars|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\setlength{\@tempdimb}{1.14\lxvchars}
\setlength\@tempdima{\paperwidth}
  \addtolength\@tempdima{-2in}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\textwidth}
% Now set the |\textwidth| depending on the number of columns. In twocolumn
% mode each column should be no wider than |\@tempdimb|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\if@twocolumn
  \ifdim\@tempdima>2\@tempdimb\relax
    \setlength\textwidth{2\@tempdimb}
  \else
    \setlength\textwidth{\@tempdima}
  \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% In onecolumn
% the text should not be wider than the minumum of the paperwidth (less
% 2in for the margins) and the maximum length of the character line.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\else
  \ifdim\@tempdima>\@tempdimb\relax
    \setlength\textwidth{\@tempdimb}
  \else
    \setlength\textwidth{\@tempdima}
  \fi
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Adjust the width to be a whole number of points.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@settopoint\textwidth

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%  
% \begin{macro}{\textheight}
%    The |\textheight| is the height of the text block, excluding
% headers and footers. This is set according to the |\paperheight|,
% to an integral number of lines, and allowing a 1in margin at the
% top and bottom and a further 1.5in for headers and footers.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\@tempdima{\paperheight}
  \addtolength\@tempdima{-3.5in}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Divide this height by the |\baselineskip| to get the number of lines.
% Then (re)calculate the |\textheight| and finally add the |\topskip|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \divide\@tempdima\baselineskip
\@tempcnta=\@tempdima
\setlength\textheight{\@tempcnta\baselineskip}
  \addtolength\textheight{\topskip}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%    The margins are calculated. 
%
% \begin{macro}{\oddsidemargin}
% \begin{macro}{\marginparwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\evensidemargin}
%    The margins depend on the paper size, also for two sided
% printing the inner margin is made smaller than the outer.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\if@twoside
  \setlength\@tempdima       {\paperwidth}
  \addtolength\@tempdima     {-\textwidth}
  \setlength\oddsidemargin   {.4\@tempdima}
  \addtolength\oddsidemargin {-1in}
  \setlength\marginparwidth  {.6\@tempdima}
  \addtolength\marginparwidth{-\marginparsep}
  \addtolength\marginparwidth{-0.4in}
\else
  \setlength\@tempdima       {\paperwidth}
  \addtolength\@tempdima     {-\textwidth}
  \setlength\oddsidemargin   {.5\@tempdima}
  \addtolength\oddsidemargin {-1in}
  \setlength\marginparwidth  {.5\@tempdima}
  \addtolength\marginparwidth{-\marginparsep}
  \addtolength\marginparwidth{-0.8in}  % don't know why this is .8 and not .4
\fi
\ifdim\marginparwidth>2in
  \setlength\marginparwidth{2in}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set these values to integer numbers of points, and calculate the
% |\evensidemargin|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@settopoint\oddsidemargin
\@settopoint\marginparwidth

\setlength\evensidemargin  {\paperwidth}
\addtolength\evensidemargin{-2in}
\addtolength\evensidemargin{-\textwidth}
\addtolength\evensidemargin{-\oddsidemargin}
\@settopoint\evensidemargin
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\topmargin}
%    The |\topmargin| is the distance below the top of the printable
% area (1in below the top of the paper) and the top of the box
% containing the running head.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\topmargin  {\paperheight}
\addtolength\topmargin{-2in}
\addtolength\topmargin{-\headheight}
\addtolength\topmargin{-\headsep}
\addtolength\topmargin{-\textheight}
\addtolength\topmargin{-\footskip}
\addtolength\topmargin{-.5\topmargin}
\@settopoint\topmargin

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% That is the end of the classical algorithm. Now calculate the 
% user-friendly dimensions. The calculations are simpler than in
% the general case as the |\paperwidth| and |\paperheight| is the 
% same as the |\stockwidth| and |\stockheight|. 
%
%    We can get the spine 
% and edge margins from the |\oddsidemargin|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\setlength{\spinemargin}{\oddsidemargin}
\addtolength{\spinemargin}{1in}
\setlrmargins{\spinemargin}{*}{*}

%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    Similarly we can get the upper and lower margins from the
% |\topmargin|, |\headheight| and |\headskip|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\setlength{\uppermargin}{\topmargin}
\addtolength{\uppermargin}{1in}
\addtolength{\uppermargin}{\headheight}
\addtolength{\uppermargin}{\headsep}
\setulmargins{\uppermargin}{*}{*}

%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\checkthelayout}
% This macro checks that the current layout dimensions are sensible and
% checks the arithmetic.
%
%    First check the dimensions are not negative.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/18}{Added \cs{checkthelayout}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\checkthelayout}{%
  \ifdim\stockwidth>\z@\else
    \ClassError{memoir}{\protect\stockwidth\space is zero or negative}%
                       {\@ehd}
  \fi
  \ifdim\trimedge<\z@
    \ClassError{memoir}{\protect\trimedge\space is negative}%
                       {\@ehd}
  \fi
  \ifdim\paperwidth>\z@\else
    \ClassError{memoir}{\protect\paperwidth\space is zero or negative}%
                       {\@ehd}
  \fi
  \ifdim\textwidth>\z@\else
    \ClassError{memoir}{\protect\textwidth\space is zero or negative}%
                       {\@ehd}
  \fi
  \ifdim\spinemargin>\z@\else
    \ClassError{memoir}{\protect\spinemargin\space is zero or negative}%
                       {\@ehd}
  \fi
  \ifdim\foremargin>\z@\else
    \ClassError{memoir}{\protect\foremargin\space is zero or negative}%
                       {\@ehd}
  \fi
  \ifdim\marginparsep>\z@\else
    \ClassError{memoir}{\protect\marginparsep\space is zero or negative}%
                       {\@ehd}
  \fi
  \ifdim\marginparwidth>\z@\else
    \ClassError{memoir}{\protect\marginparwidth\space is zero or negative}%
                       {\@ehd}
  \fi
  \ifdim\stockheight>\z@\else
    \ClassError{memoir}{\protect\stockheight\space is zero or negative}%
                       {\@ehd}
  \fi
  \ifdim\trimtop<\z@
    \ClassError{memoir}{\protect\trimtop\space is negative}%
                       {\@ehd}
  \fi
  \ifdim\paperheight>\z@\else
    \ClassError{memoir}{\protect\paperheight\space is zero or negative}%
                       {\@ehd}
  \fi
  \ifdim\textheight>\z@\else
    \ClassError{memoir}{\protect\textheight\space is zero or negative}%
                       {\@ehd}
  \fi
  \ifdim\uppermargin>\z@\else
    \ClassError{memoir}{\protect\uppermargin\space is zero or negative}%
                       {\@ehd}
  \fi
  \ifdim\lowermargin>\z@\else
    \ClassError{memoir}{\protect\lowermargin\space is zero or negative}%
                       {\@ehd}
  \fi
  \ifdim\headheight>\z@\else
    \ClassError{memoir}{\protect\headheight\space is zero or negative}%
                       {\@ehd}
  \fi
  \ifdim\headsep>\z@\else
    \ClassError{memoir}{\protect\headsep\space is zero or negative}%
                       {\@ehd}
  \fi
  \ifdim\footskip>\z@\else
    \ClassError{memoir}{\protect\footskip\space is zero or negative}%
                       {\@ehd}
  \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    Carry on regardless. We need to adjust the |\textheight| and the
% |\lowermargin| to get an integral number of lines.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@tempdima = \textheight
    \divide\@tempdima \baselineskip
  \@tempcnta=\@tempdima
  \setlength{\textheight}{\@tempcnta\baselineskip}
    \addtolength{\textheight}{\topskip}
  \setulmargins{\uppermargin}{*}{*}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Check that all the sums add up correctly, or
% at least to within a small (|\@tempdimb|) error.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@tempdimb = -1pt  
  \@tempdima=\stockwidth
  \advance\@tempdima -\trimedge
  \advance\@tempdima -\paperwidth
  \ifdim\@tempdima<\@tempdimb
    \@tempdima = -\@tempdima
    \ClassError{memoir}{\protect\paperwidth\space and/or 
                        \protect\trimedge\space 
                        are too large for \protect\stockwidth\space
                        by \the\@tempdima}%
                       {\@ehd}
  \fi
  \@tempdima = \paperwidth
  \advance\@tempdima -\foremargin
  \advance\@tempdima -\textwidth
  \advance\@tempdima -\spinemargin
  \ifdim\@tempdima<\@tempdimb
    \@tempdima = -\@tempdima
    \ClassError{memoir}{\protect\spinemargin\space and/or 
                        \protect\textwidth\space and/or
                        \protect\foremargin\space 
                        are too large for \protect\paperwidth\space
                        by \the\@tempdima}%
                       {\@ehd}
  \fi
  \@tempdima = \stockheight
  \advance\@tempdima -\trimtop
  \advance\@tempdima -\paperheight
  \ifdim\@tempdima<\@tempdimb
    \@tempdima = -\@tempdima
    \ClassError{memoir}{\protect\paperheight\space and/or 
                        \protect\trimtop\space 
                        are too large for \protect\stockheight\space
                        by \the\@tempdima}%
                       {\@ehd}
  \fi
  \@tempdima = \paperheight
  \advance\@tempdima -\uppermargin
  \advance\@tempdima -\textheight
  \advance\@tempdima -\lowermargin
  \ifdim\@tempdima<\@tempdimb
    \@tempdima = -\@tempdima
    \ClassError{memoir}{\protect\uppermargin\space and/or 
                        \protect\textheight\space and/or 
                        \protect\lowermargin\space 
                        are too large for \protect\paperheight\space
                        by \the\@tempdima}%
                       {\@ehd}
  \fi
  \@tempdima = \uppermargin
  \advance\@tempdima -\headheight
  \advance\@tempdima -\headsep
  \ifdim\@tempdima<\@tempdimb
    \@tempdima = -\@tempdima
    \ClassError{memoir}{\protect\headheight\space and/or 
                        \protect\headsep\space 
                        are too large for \protect\uppermargin\space
                        by \the\@tempdima}%
                       {\@ehd}
  \fi
  \@tempdima = \lowermargin
  \advance\@tempdima -\footskip
  \ifdim\@tempdima<\z@
    \@tempdima = -\@tempdima
    \ClassError{memoir}{\protect\footskip
                        is too large for \protect\lowermargin\space
                        by \the\@tempdima}%
                       {\@ehd}
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\fixthelayout}
%   Calculate the normal
% LaTeX page layout parameter values. We'll do the heights first
% as they are independent of the number of columns and the side printing.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/18}{Added \cs{fixthelayout}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\fixthelayout}{%
  \topmargin = \trimtop
    \advance\topmargin \uppermargin
    \advance\topmargin -\headsep
    \advance\topmargin -\headheight
    \advance\topmargin -1in
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    Now the |\oddsidemargin|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \oddsidemargin = \stockwidth
    \advance\oddsidemargin -\trimedge
    \advance\oddsidemargin -\paperwidth
    \advance\oddsidemargin \spinemargin
    \advance\oddsidemargin -1in
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    And the |\evensidemargin|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \evensidemargin = \trimedge
    \advance\evensidemargin \foremargin
    \advance\evensidemargin -1in
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%
%    Set the values to the nearest whole point.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@settopoint\textwidth
  \@settopoint\oddsidemargin
  \@settopoint\evensidemargin
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\typeoutlayout}
% Why not type out the calculated versions of the designed values?
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/18}{Added \cs{typeoutlayout}}
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/25}{Added column info to \cs{typeoutlayout}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\typeoutlayout}{%
  \typeout{}
  \typeout{******************************************************}
  \typeout{Stock height and width: \the\stockheight\space by \the\stockwidth}
  \typeout{Top and edge trims: \the\trimtop\space and \the\trimedge}
  \typeout{Page height and width: \the\paperheight\space by \the\paperwidth}
  \typeout{Text height and width: \the\textheight\space by \the\textwidth}
  \typeout{Spine and edge margins: \the\spinemargin\space and \the\foremargin}
  \typeout{Upper and lower margins: \the\uppermargin\space and \the\lowermargin}
  \typeout{Headheight and headsep: \the\headheight\space and \the\headsep}
  \typeout{Footskip: \the\footskip}
  \typeout{Columnsep and columnseprule: \the\columnsep\space and \the\columnseprule}
  \typeout{Marginparsep and marginparwidth: \the\marginparsep\space and \the\marginparwidth}
  \typeout{******************************************************}
  \typeout{}
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\checkandfixthelayout}
% This macro checks and fixes the layout, and reports the result.
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Replaced \cs{fixpagelayout} by \cs{checkandfixthelayout}}
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/18}{Partitioned \cs{checkandfixthelayout}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\checkandfixthelayout}{%
  \checkthelayout
  \fixthelayout
  \typeoutlayout
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% 
% \begin{macro}{\typeoutstandardlayout}
% Types out the current values of the standard page layout parameters.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/25}{Added \cs{typeoutstandardlayout}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\typeoutstandardlayout}{%
  \typeout{}
  \typeout{******************************************************}
  \typeout{Page height and width: \the\paperheight\space by \the\paperwidth}
  \typeout{Text height and width: \the\textheight\space by \the\textwidth}
  \typeout{Oddside and evenside margins: \the\oddsidemargin\space and \the\evensidemargin}
  \typeout{Topmargin and footskip: \the\topmargin\space and \the\footskip}
  \typeout{Headheight and headsep: \the\headheight\space and \the\headsep}
  \typeout{Columnsep and columnseprule: \the\columnsep\space and \the\columnseprule}
  \typeout{Marginparsep and marginparwidth: \the\marginparsep\space and \the\marginparwidth}
  \typeout{******************************************************}
  \typeout{}
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
%
%
% \subsubsection{Footnotes}
%
% \begin{macro}{\footnotesep}
%    |\footnotesep| is the height of the strut placed at the beginning
%    of every footnote. It equals the height of a normal |\footnotesize|
% strut, so no extra space appears between footnotes
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</class>
%<*9pt|10pt|11pt|12pt|14pt|17pt>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<9pt>\setlength\footnotesep{6.0\p@}  %% ????????
%<10pt>\setlength\footnotesep{6.65\p@}
%<11pt>\setlength\footnotesep{7.7\p@}
%<12pt>\setlength\footnotesep{8.4\p@}
%<14pt>\setlength\footnotesep{10.0\p@} %% ????????
%<17pt>\setlength\footnotesep{12\p@} %% ????????
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\footins}
%    |\skip\footins| is the space between the last line of the main
%    text and the top of the first footnote.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<9pt>\setlength{\skip\footins}{8\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
%<10pt>\setlength{\skip\footins}{9\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
%<11pt>\setlength{\skip\footins}{10\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
%<12pt>\setlength{\skip\footins}{10.8\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
%<14pt>\setlength{\skip\footins}{13\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
%<17pt>\setlength{\skip\footins}{14\p@ \@plus 5\p@ \@minus 3\p@}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{Float placement parameters}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</9pt|10pt|11pt|12pt|14pt|17pt>
%<*class>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% All float parameters are given default values in the LaTeX
% kernel. For this reason counters only need to be set with
% |\setcounter| and other parameters are set using |\renewcommand|.
%
% \paragraph{Limits for the placement of floating objects}
%
% The settings here make it easier to place floats than with the
% standard classes.
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@topnumber}
%    The \Lcount{topnumber} counter holds the maximum number of
%    floats that can appear on the top of a text page (classically 2)
%    \begin{macrocode}
\setcounter{topnumber}{3}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\topfraction}
%    This indicates the maximum part of a text page that can be
%    occupied by floats at the top (classically 0.7).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\topfraction}{.85}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@bottomnumber}
%    The \Lcount{bottomnumber} counter holds the maximum number of
%    floats that can appear on the bottom of a text page (classically 1).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\setcounter{bottomnumber}{2}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bottomfraction}
%    This indicates the maximum part of a text page that can be
%    occupied by floats at the bottom (classically 0.3).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\bottomfraction}{.5}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@totalnumber}
%    This indicates the maximum number of floats that can appear on
%    any text page (classically 3).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\setcounter{totalnumber}{4}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\textfraction}
%    This indicates the minimum part of a text page that has to be
%    occupied by text (classically 0.2).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\textfraction}{.1}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\floatpagefraction}
%    This indicates the minimum part of a page that has to be
%    occupied by floating objects before a `float page' is 
%    produced (classically 0.5).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\floatpagefraction}{.7}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@dbltopnumber}
%    The \Lcount{dbltopnumber} counter holds the maximum number of
%    two column floats that can appear on the top of a two column text
%    page (classically 2).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\setcounter{dbltopnumber}{3}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\dbltopfraction}
%    This indicates the maximum part of a two column text page that
%    can be occupied by two column floats at the top (classically 0.7).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\dbltopfraction}{.85}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\dblfloatpagefraction}
%    This indicates the minimum part of a page that has to be
%    occupied by two column wide floating objects before a `float
%    page' is produced (classically 0.5).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\dblfloatpagefraction}{.7}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \paragraph{Floats on a text page}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</class>
%<*9pt|10pt|11pt|12pt|14pt|17pt>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\floatsep}
% \begin{macro}{\textfloatsep}
% \begin{macro}{\intextsep}
%    When a floating object is placed on a page with text, these
%    parameters control the separation between the float and the other
%    objects on the page. These parameters are used for both
%    one-column mode and single-column floats in two-column mode.
%
%    |\floatsep| is the space between adjacent floats that are moved
%    to the top or bottom of the text page.
%
%    |\textfloatsep| is the space between the main text and floats
%    at the top or bottom of the page.
%
%    |\intextsep| is the space between in-text floats and the text.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*9pt>
\setlength\floatsep    {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
\setlength\textfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
\setlength\intextsep   {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
%</9pt>
%<*10pt>
\setlength\floatsep    {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
\setlength\textfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
\setlength\intextsep   {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
%</10pt>
%<*11pt>
\setlength\floatsep    {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
\setlength\textfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
\setlength\intextsep   {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
%</11pt>
%<*12pt>
\setlength\floatsep    {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
\setlength\textfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
\setlength\intextsep   {14\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
%</12pt>
%<*14pt>
\setlength\floatsep    {14\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
\setlength\textfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
\setlength\intextsep   {14\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
%</14pt>
%<*17pt>
\setlength\floatsep    {15\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
\setlength\textfloatsep{25\p@ \@plus 5\p@ \@minus 5\p@}
\setlength\intextsep   {16\p@ \@plus 5\p@ \@minus 5\p@}
%</17pt>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\dblfloatsep}
% \begin{macro}{\dbltextfloatsep}
%    When floating objects that span the whole |\textwidth| are placed
%    on a text page and \LaTeX{} is in twocolumn mode the separation
%    between the float and the text is controlled by |\dblfloatsep|
%    and |\dbltextfloatsep|.
%
%    |\dblfloatsep| is the space between adjacent floats that are moved
%    to the top or bottom of the text page.
%
%    |\dbltextfloatsep| is the space between the main text and floats
%    at the top or bottom of the page.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*9pt>
\setlength\dblfloatsep    {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
\setlength\dbltextfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
%</9pt>
%<*10pt>
\setlength\dblfloatsep    {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
\setlength\dbltextfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
%</10pt>
%<*11pt>
\setlength\dblfloatsep    {12\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
\setlength\dbltextfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
%</11pt>
%<*12pt>
\setlength\dblfloatsep    {14\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
\setlength\dbltextfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
%</12pt>
%<*14pt>
\setlength\dblfloatsep    {14\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
\setlength\dbltextfloatsep{20\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
%</14pt>
%<*17pt>
\setlength\dblfloatsep    {15\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
\setlength\dbltextfloatsep{25\p@ \@plus 5\p@ \@minus 5\p@}
%</17pt>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \paragraph{Floats on their own page or column}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@fptop}
% \begin{macro}{\@fpsep}
% \begin{macro}{\@fpbot}
%    When floating objects are placed on separate pages the layout of
%    such pages is controlled by these parameters. At the top of the
%    page |\@fptop| amount of stretchable whitespace is inserted, at
%    the bottom of the page we get an |\@fpbot| amount of stretchable
%    whitespace. Between adjacent floats the |\@fpsep| is inserted.
%
%    These parameters are used for the placement of floating objects
%    in one column mode, or in single column floats in two column
%    mode.
%
%    Note that at least one of the two parameters |\@fptop| and
%    |\@fpbot| should contain a |plus ...fil| to allow filling the
%    remaining empty space.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*9pt>
\setlength\@fptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
\setlength\@fpsep{9\p@ \@plus 2fil}
\setlength\@fpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
%</9pt>
%<*10pt>
\setlength\@fptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
\setlength\@fpsep{8\p@ \@plus 2fil}
\setlength\@fpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
%</10pt>
%<*11pt>
\setlength\@fptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
\setlength\@fpsep{8\p@ \@plus 2fil}
\setlength\@fpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
%</11pt>
%<*12pt>
\setlength\@fptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
\setlength\@fpsep{10\p@ \@plus 2fil}
\setlength\@fpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
%</12pt>
%<*14pt>
\setlength\@fptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
\setlength\@fpsep{10\p@ \@plus 2fil}
\setlength\@fpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
%</14pt>
%<*17pt>
\setlength\@fptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
\setlength\@fpsep{12\p@ \@plus 2fil}
\setlength\@fpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
%</17pt>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@dblfptop}
% \begin{macro}{\@dblfpsep}
% \begin{macro}{\@dblfpbot}
%    Double column floats in two column mode are handled with similar
%    parameters.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*9pt>
\setlength\@dblfptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
\setlength\@dblfpsep{7\p@ \@plus 2fil}
\setlength\@dblfpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
%</9pt>
%<*10pt>
\setlength\@dblfptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
\setlength\@dblfpsep{8\p@ \@plus 2fil}
\setlength\@dblfpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
%</10pt>
%<*11pt>
\setlength\@dblfptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
\setlength\@dblfpsep{8\p@ \@plus 2fil}
\setlength\@dblfpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
%</11pt>
%<*12pt>
\setlength\@dblfptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
\setlength\@dblfpsep{10\p@ \@plus 2fil}
\setlength\@dblfpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
%</12pt>
%<*14pt>
\setlength\@dblfptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
\setlength\@dblfpsep{12\p@ \@plus 2fil}
\setlength\@dblfpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
%</14pt>
%<*17pt>
\setlength\@dblfptop{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
\setlength\@dblfpsep{12\p@ \@plus 2fil}
\setlength\@dblfpbot{0\p@ \@plus 1fil}
%</17pt>
%</9pt|10pt|11pt|12pt|14pt|17pt>
%<*class>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Page Styles}
%
%    The page style \pstyle{foo} is defined by defining the command
%    |\ps@foo|.   This command should make only local definitions.
%    There should be no stray spaces in the definition, since they
%    could lead to mysterious extra spaces in the output.
%
% \begin{macro}{\@evenhead}
% \begin{macro}{\@oddhead}
% \begin{macro}{\@evenfoot}
% \begin{macro}{\@oddfoot}
%    The |\ps@...| command defines the macros |\@oddhead|,
%    |\@oddfoot|, |\@evenhead|, and |\@evenfoot| to define the running
%    heads and feet---e.g., |\@oddhead| is the macro to produce the
%    contents of the heading box for odd-numbered pages.  It is called
%    inside an |\hbox| of width |\textwidth|.
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{Marking conventions}
%
%    To make headings determined by the sectioning commands, the page
%    style defines the commands |\chaptermark|, |\sectionmark|,
%    \ldots,\\
%     where |\chaptermark{|\meta{TEXT}|}| is called by
%    |\chapter| to set a mark, and so on.
%
%    The |\...mark| commands and the |\...head| macros are defined
%    with the help of the following macros.  (All the |\...mark|
%    commands should be initialized to no-ops.)
%
%    \LaTeX{} extends \TeX's |\mark| facility by producing two kinds
%    of marks, a `left' and a `right' mark, using the following
%    commands:
%    \begin{flushleft}
%     |\markboth{|\meta{LEFT}|}{|\meta{RIGHT}|}|: Adds both marks.
%
%     |\markright{|\meta{RIGHT}|}|: Adds a `right' mark.
%
%     |\leftmark|: Used in the |\@oddhead|, |\@oddfoot|, |\@evenhead|
%                  or |\@evenfoot| macros, it gets the current `left'
%                  mark.  |\leftmark| works like \TeX's |\botmark|
%                  command.
%
%     |\rightmark|: Used in the |\@oddhead|, |\@oddfoot|, |\@evenhead|
%                   or  |\@evenfoot| macros, it gets the current
%                   `right' mark. |\rightmark| works like \TeX's
%                   |\firstmark| command.
%    \end{flushleft}
%
%    The marking commands work reasonably well for right marks
%    `numbered within' left marks--e.g., the left mark is changed by a
%    |\chapter| command and the right mark is changed by a |\section|
%    command.  However, it does produce somewhat anomalous results if
%    two |\markboth|'s occur on the same page.
%
%
%    Commands like |\tableofcontents| that should set the marks in some
%    page styles use a |\@mkboth| command, which is |\let| by the
%    pagestyle command (|\ps@...|)  to |\markboth| for setting the
%    heading or to |\@gobbletwo| to do nothing.
%
%
%
% \subsubsection{Defining the page styles}
%
%    This class provides a set of commands for the user to define new
% pagestyles. Essentially defining a pagestyle consists of defining the
% macros |\@evenhead{}|, |\@oddhead{}|, |\@evenfoot{}|, and |\@oddfoot{}|.
% For this class, each header and footer is treated as three parts: a left,
% center, and right part. In this case, defining a pagestyle consists of
% specifying these 12 portions of the running headers and footers. The
% width of the headers/footers may also be specified, rules may be drawn
% below the headers and/or above the footers, and the complete header and/or
% footer may be offset with respect to the textblock when the width is not
% the same as the textwidth.
%
%    In the following \meta{style} is the name of a pagestyle being defined
% (e.g., |ruled|).
%
% \begin{macro}{\makeevenhead}
% The command 
% |\makeevenhead{|\meta{style}|}{|\meta{left}|}{|\meta{center}|}{|\meta{right}|}|
% specifies that the left, center and right portions of the even header for
% pagestyle \meta{style} are defined as the other thre arguments, respectiveley.
% Internally it defines the commands |\styleeheadl|, |\styleeheadc| and
% |\styleeheadr| to be \meta{left}, \meta{center} and \meta{right} respectively.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\makeevenhead}[4]{%
  \@namedef{#1eheadl}{#2}
  \@namedef{#1eheadc}{#3}
  \@namedef{#1eheadr}{#4}
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\makeoddhead}
% \begin{macro}{\makeevenfoot}
% \begin{macro}{\makeoddfoot}
%  These three macros are similar to |\makeevenhead| except that they are
% for the oddhead, evenfoot and oddfoot.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\makeoddhead}[4]{%
  \@namedef{#1oheadl}{#2}
  \@namedef{#1oheadc}{#3}
  \@namedef{#1oheadr}{#4}
}
\newcommand{\makeevenfoot}[4]{%
  \@namedef{#1efootl}{#2}
  \@namedef{#1efootc}{#3}
  \@namedef{#1efootr}{#4}
}
\newcommand{\makeoddfoot}[4]{%
  \@namedef{#1ofootl}{#2}
  \@namedef{#1ofootc}{#3}
  \@namedef{#1ofootr}{#4}
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\makerunningwidth}
%  The macro |\makerunningwidth{|\meta{style}|}{|\meta{length}|}| sets the
% width of the headers and footers of pagestyle \meta{style} to be \meta{length}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\makerunningwidth}[2]{%
  \@namedef{#1runwidth}{#2}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\normalrulethickness}
% \begin{macro}{\footruleheight}
% \begin{macro}{\footruleskip}
% \begin{macro}{\makeheadrule}
% \begin{macro}{\makefootrule}
% |\normalrulethickness| is the thickness of a normal horizontal 
% or vertical rule. 
% |\footruleheight| is the height of a normal rule above a footer (actually zero).
% |\footruleskip| is a distance sufficient to ensure that a foot rule 
% will appear between the bottom of the textblock and above any actual footer.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\normalrulethickness}{0.4pt}
\newcommand{\footruleheight}{\z@skip}
\newcommand{\footruleskip}{0.3\normalbaselineskip}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The macro |\makeheadrule{|\meta{style}|}{|\meta{width}|}{|\meta{height}|}|
% specifies the width and height of the header rule for \meta{style}. 
%
% Similarly
% |\makefootrule{|\meta{style}|}{|\meta{width}|}{|\meta{height}|}{|\meta{skip}|}|
% specifies the width, height and skip for the footrule.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\makeheadrule}[3]{%
  \@namedef{#1headrule}{%
    \hrule\@width #2\@height #3 \vskip-#3}
}
\newcommand{\makefootrule}[4]{%
  \@namedef{#1footrule}{%
    \vskip-#4\vskip-#3
    \hrule\@width #2\@height #3 \vskip #4}
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%  
% \begin{macro}{\makeheadposition}
% |\makeheadposition{|\meta{style}|}{|\meta{eheadpos}|}{|\meta{oheadpos}|}{|\meta{efootpos}|}{|\meta{ofootpos}|}|
% specifies the horizontal positioning of the even and odd headers and footers,
% respectively, 
% for the pagestyle \meta{style}. Each of the \meta{...pos} arguments may be
% either |flushleft|, |center| or |flushright|, with the obvious meanings.
% An empty argument (or an unrecognised one) is equivalent to |center|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\makeheadposition}[5]{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Do the even head position first.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \nametest{flushleft}{#2}
  \ifsamename
    \@namedef{#1evenhpl}{\relax} \@namedef{#1evenhpr}{\hss}
  \else
    \nametest{flushright}{#2}
    \ifsamename
      \@namedef{#1evenhpl}{\hss} \@namedef{#1evenhpr}{\relax}
    \else
      \@namedef{#1evenhpl}{\hss} \@namedef{#1evenhpr}{\hss}
    \fi
  \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% And similarly for the odd head and even \& odd footers.
%    \begin{macrocode}   
  \nametest{flushleft}{#3}
  \ifsamename
    \@namedef{#1oddhpl}{\relax} \@namedef{#1oddhpr}{\hss}
  \else
    \nametest{flushright}{#3}
    \ifsamename
      \@namedef{#1oddhpl}{\hss} \@namedef{#1oddhpr}{\relax}
    \else
      \@namedef{#1oddhpl}{\hss} \@namedef{#1oddhpr}{\hss}
    \fi
  \fi
  \nametest{flushleft}{#4}
  \ifsamename
    \@namedef{#1evenfpl}{\relax} \@namedef{#1evenfpr}{\hss}
  \else
    \nametest{flushright}{#4}
    \ifsamename
      \@namedef{#1evenfpl}{\hss} \@namedef{#1evenfpr}{\relax}
    \else
      \@namedef{#1evenfpl}{\hss} \@namedef{#1evenfpr}{\hss}
    \fi
  \fi
  \nametest{flushleft}{#5}
  \ifsamename
    \@namedef{#1oddfpl}{\relax} \@namedef{#1oddfpr}{\hss}
  \else
    \nametest{flushright}{#5}
    \ifsamename
      \@namedef{#1oddfpl}{\hss} \@namedef{#1oddfpr}{\relax}
    \else
      \@namedef{#1oddfpl}{\hss} \@namedef{#1oddfpr}{\hss}
    \fi
  \fi
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\makepsmarks}
% \begin{macro}{\makepshook}
% The macro |\makepsmarks{|\meta{style}|}{|\meta{code}|}| specifies that
% \meta{code} is the definition of the hook for pagestyle \meta{style}.
% |\makepshook| is a deprecated version of |\makepsmarks|.
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/11/15}{Added \cs{makepsmarks} and deprecated 
%                                  \cs{makepshook}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\makepsmarks}[2]{\@namedef{#1pshook}{#2}}
\newcommand{\makepshook}[2]{%
  \ClassWarning{memoir}{\protect\makepshook\space is deprecated.\MessageBreak
                        Use \protect\makepsmarks\space instead}
  \@namedef{#1pshook}{#2}
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\makepagestyle}
%  At last we can put everything together for defining a new pagestyle,
% via the macro |\makepagestyle{|\meta{style}|}| which initially sets up 
% a new pagestyle \meta{style} corresponding the the LaTeX |empty|
% pagestyle. The prior macros can then be used to make modifications
% to the style.
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/11/15}{Now 2 stage process for defining \cs{@evenhead}
%                            and friends}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\makepagestyle}[1]{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% First define the macro |\ps@style|, which in turn defines the macros
% |\@evenhead|, |\@oddhead|, |\@evenfoot| and |\@oddfoot|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@namedef{ps@#1}{%
    \@namedef{#1@evenhead}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% The code for the definition of |\@evenhead| and friends is based on code
% from Piet van Oostrum's \Lpack{fancyhdr} package~\cite{FANCYHDR}. The three
% parts of the header are put into parboxes, with fills between them, and
% the whole lot is put into a box the width of the header. Fillers are put
% before and after the main box which control the header position.
%
% First the left filler which is either |\relax| or |\hss|, and then
% start the main box.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \@nameuse{#1evenhpl}\hb@xt@\@nameuse{#1runwidth}{\vbox{\hbox{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% The left part of the header.
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \rlap{\parbox[b]{\@nameuse{#1runwidth}}{%
          \raggedright\@nameuse{#1eheadl}\strut}}\hfill
%    \end{macrocode}
% The center part of the header.
%    \begin{macrocode}
              \parbox[b]{\@nameuse{#1runwidth}}{%
          \centering\@nameuse{#1eheadc}\strut}\hfill
%    \end{macrocode}
% The right part of the header.
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \llap{\parbox[b]{\@nameuse{#1runwidth}}{%
          \raggedleft\@nameuse{#1eheadr}\strut}}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Finally, the header rule and finish with the right filler, which
% is either |\relax| or |\hss|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \@nameuse{#1headrule}}}\@nameuse{#1evenhpr}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The code for the |\@oddhead|, |\@evenfoot| and |\@oddfoot| follows
% a similar pattern. Here is |\@oddhead|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@namedef{#1@oddhead}{%
      \@nameuse{#1oddhpl}\hb@xt@\@nameuse{#1runwidth}{\vbox{\hbox{%
        \rlap{\parbox[b]{\@nameuse{#1runwidth}}{%
          \raggedright\@nameuse{#1oheadl}\strut}}\hfill
              \parbox[b]{\@nameuse{#1runwidth}}{%
          \centering\@nameuse{#1oheadc}\strut}\hfill
        \llap{\parbox[b]{\@nameuse{#1runwidth}}{%
          \raggedleft\@nameuse{#1oheadr}\strut}}}%
        \@nameuse{#1headrule}}}\@nameuse{#1oddhpr}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% And |\@evenfoot|. For the footers the rules come \emph{before} any foot
% entries.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@namedef{#1@evenfoot}{%
      \@nameuse{#1evenfpl}\hb@xt@\@nameuse{#1runwidth}{%
        \vbox{\@nameuse{#1footrule}\hbox{%
        \rlap{\parbox[b]{\@nameuse{#1runwidth}}{%
          \raggedright\@nameuse{#1efootl}\strut}}\hfill
              \parbox[b]{\@nameuse{#1runwidth}}{%
          \centering\@nameuse{#1efootc}\strut}\hfill
        \llap{\parbox[b]{\@nameuse{#1runwidth}}{%
          \raggedleft\@nameuse{#1efootr}\strut}}}%
        }}\@nameuse{#1evenfpr}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Lastly the |\@oddfoot|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@namedef{#1@oddfoot}{%
      \@nameuse{#1oddfpl}\hb@xt@\@nameuse{#1runwidth}{%
        \vbox{\@nameuse{#1footrule}\hbox{%
        \rlap{\parbox[b]{\@nameuse{#1runwidth}}{%
          \raggedright\@nameuse{#1ofootl}\strut}}\hfill
              \parbox[b]{\@nameuse{#1runwidth}}{%
          \centering\@nameuse{#1ofootc}\strut}\hfill
        \llap{\parbox[b]{\@nameuse{#1runwidth}}{%
          \raggedleft\@nameuse{#1ofootr}\strut}}}%
        }}\@nameuse{#1oddfpr}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Now we define |\@evenhead| etc., in terms of |#1@evenhead|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \def\@evenhead{\@nameuse{#1@evenhead}}
    \def\@oddhead{\@nameuse{#1@oddhead}}
    \def\@evenfoot{\@nameuse{#1@evenfoot}}
    \def\@oddfoot{\@nameuse{#1@oddfoot}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% To finish off the definition of |\ps@style|, add in a hook which can be
% defined so that it adds additional code, if required.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@nameuse{#1pshook}
  }
%    \end{macrocode}
% The final part of setting up the new pagestyle is defining all the macros
% called by |\ps@style|, and giving them default values. Make the headers
% and footers empty.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \makeevenhead{#1}{}{}{}
  \makeoddhead{#1}{}{}{}
  \makeevenfoot{#1}{}{}{}
  \makeoddfoot{#1}{}{}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Make the headers/footers the same width as the |\textwidth|, center
% them, and ensure
% that the rules have zero height so that they will be invisible.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \makerunningwidth{#1}{\textwidth}
  \makeheadposition{#1}{}{}{}{}
  \makeheadrule{#1}{\textwidth}{0pt}
  \makefootrule{#1}{\textwidth}{\footruleheight}{\footruleskip}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Finally, there is no addtional code needed, so make the hook empty, and
% we are done.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \makepsmarks{#1}{}
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\aliaspagestyle}
% The command |\aliaspagestyle{|\meta{aliasl}|}{|\meta{original}|}|
% defines the \meta{alias} pagestyle to be an alias for the
% \meta{original} pagestyle.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\aliaspagestyle}[2]{%
  \@namedef{ps@#1}{\@nameuse{ps@#2}}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\copypagestyle}
% The command |\copypagestyle{|\meta{new}|}{|\meta{original}|}|
% defines the \meta{new} pagestyle to be a copy of the
% \meta{original} pagestyle.
%
% It first makes the \meta{new} (empty) pagestyle then defines the internals
% in terms of the \meta{original} internals.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/10}{Added \cs{copypagestyle}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\copypagestyle}[2]{%
  \makepagestyle{#1}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Do the headers and footers.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \makeevenhead{#1}{\@nameuse{#2eheadl}}{\@nameuse{#2eheadc}}{\@nameuse{#2eheadr}}%
  \makeoddhead{#1}{\@nameuse{#2oheadl}}{\@nameuse{#2oheadc}}{\@nameuse{#2oheadr}}%
  \makeevenfoot{#1}{\@nameuse{#2efootl}}{\@nameuse{#2efootc}}{\@nameuse{#2efootr}}%
  \makeoddfoot{#1}{\@nameuse{#2ofootl}}{\@nameuse{#2ofootc}}{\@nameuse{#2ofootr}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set the width.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \makerunningwidth{#1}{\@nameuse{#2runwidth}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Specify the |\headposition|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@namedef{#1evenhpl}{\@nameuse{#2evenhpl}}%
  \@namedef{#1oddhpl}{\@nameuse{#2oddhpl}}%
  \@namedef{#1evenfpl}{\@nameuse{#2evenfpl}}%
  \@namedef{#1oddfpl}{\@nameuse{#2oddfpl}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Specify the head and foot rules.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@namedef{#1headrule}{\@nameuse{#2headrule}}%
  \@namedef{#1footrule}{\@nameuse{#2footrule}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% And pick up the hook.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \makepsmarks{#1}{\@nameuse{#2pshook}}%
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifonlyfloats}
% |\ifonlyfloats|\marg{yes}\marg{no} processes \meta{yes} if the macro is
% called on a page consisting only of floats, otherwise \meta{no} is 
% processed. |\if@fcolmade| is specified in \file{ltoutput.dtx}.
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/11/14}{Added \cs{ifonlyfloats}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\ifonlyfloats}[2]{\if@fcolmade #1\else #2\fi}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\mergepagefloatstyle}
% |\mergepagefloatstyle|\marg{style}\marg{textstyle}\marg{floatstyle}
% makes a new page style \meta{style} that is \meta{textstyle} on normal
% pages but uses \meta{floatstyle} on float-only pages. Both \meta{textstyle}
% and \meta{floatstyle} must have been previously defined.
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/11/15}{Added \cs{mergepagefloatstyle}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\mergepagefloatstyle}[3]{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Make sure that the two styles have been called, otherwise we get some
% undefined errors.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@nameuse{ps@#3} \@nameuse{ps@#2}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Specify the pagestyle's headers and footers.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@namedef{ps@#1}{
  \def\@evenhead{\ifonlyfloats{\@nameuse{#3@evenhead}}{\@nameuse{#2@evenhead}}}
  \def\@oddhead{\ifonlyfloats{\@nameuse{#3@oddhead}}{\@nameuse{#2@oddhead}}}
  \def\@evenfoot{\ifonlyfloats{\@nameuse{#3@evenfoot}}{\@nameuse{#2@evenfoot}}}
  \def\@oddfoot{\ifonlyfloats{\@nameuse{#3@oddfoot}}{\@nameuse{#2@oddfoot}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set the hook to the \meta{textstyle} on the assumption that that is
% more complex that required for a float page.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@namedef{#1pshook}{\@nameuse{#2pshook}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% That's it.
%    \begin{macrocode}
}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%    The pagestyles \pstyle{empty} and \pstyle{plain} are defined 
%    in \file{latex.dtx}. However, I will redefine them here, just in
% case someone takes a fancy to modifying them.
%
% \begin{macro}{\ps@empty}
% The \pstyle{empty} pagestyle is simple, it's just what we get when
% we call |\makepagestyle|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\makepagestyle{empty}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ps@plain}
% The \pstyle{plain} pagestyle is also simple, it just puts the
% page number at the bottom middle of the page.
% We call |\makepagestyle{plain}| and then adjust as required.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\makepagestyle{plain}
  \makeevenfoot{plain}{}{\thepage}{}
  \makeoddfoot{plain}{}{\thepage}{}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ps@headings}
%    The \pstyle{headings} pagestyle behaves differently for
% twosided and onesided printing. This is a rewrite of the
% standard style.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Added \cs{tocmark} etc., to \cs{ps@headings}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\if@twoside
%    \end{macrocode}
% The footer is empty and the header contains the page number and
% one of the marks.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \makepagestyle{headings}
    \makepsmarks{headings}{%
      \let\@mkboth\markboth
      \def\chaptermark##1{%
        \markboth{\MakeUppercase{%
          \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
            \if@mainmatter
              \@chapapp\ \thechapter. \ %
            \fi
          \fi
          ##1}}{}}%
      \def\tocmark{\markboth{\MakeUppercase{\contentsname}}{}}%
      \def\lofmark{\markboth{\MakeUppercase{\listfigurename}}{}}%
      \def\lotmark{\markboth{\MakeUppercase{\listtablename}}{}}%
      \def\bibmark{\markboth{\MakeUppercase{\bibname}}{}}%
      \def\indexmark{\markboth{\MakeUppercase{\indexname}}{}}%
      \def\sectionmark##1{%
        \markright{\MakeUppercase{%
          \ifnum \c@secnumdepth > \z@
            \thesection. \ %
          \fi
          ##1}}}%
    }
    \makeevenhead{headings}{\thepage}{}{\slshape\leftmark}
    \makeoddhead{headings}{\slshape\rightmark}{}{\thepage}
\else
%    \end{macrocode}
% For one sided printing even and odd pages are treated the same,
% so no need to bother with the evenhead, and
% just the |\rightmark| is used.     
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \makepagestyle{headings}
    \makepsmarks{headings}{%
      \let\@mkboth\markboth
      \def\chaptermark##1{%
        \markright{\MakeUppercase{%
          \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
            \if@mainmatter
              \@chapapp\ \thechapter. \ %
            \fi
          \fi
          ##1}}}%
      \def\tocmark{\markright{\MakeUppercase{\contentsname}}}%
      \def\lofmark{\markright{\MakeUppercase{\listfigurename}}}%
      \def\lotmark{\markright{\MakeUppercase{\listtablename}}}%
      \def\bibmark{\markright{\MakeUppercase{\bibname}}}%
      \def\indexmark{\markright{\MakeUppercase{\indexname}}}%
    }
    \makeoddhead{headings}{\slshape\rightmark}{}{\thepage}
\fi

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ps@myheadings}
%    The \pstyle{myheadings} page style is simpler because the user
% has to specify the contents using |\markboth| and |\markright|
% commands. This is the definition used in the standard classes.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Added \cs{tocmark} etc., to \cs{ps@myheadings}}
%    \begin{verbatim}}
% \newcommand{\ps@myheadings}{%
%   \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty
%   \def\@evenhead{\thepage\hfil{\slshape\leftmark}}%
%   \def\@oddhead{{\slshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}%
%   \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
%   \let\chaptermark\@gobble
%   \let\sectionmark\@gobble
% }
% \end{verbatim}
% Translating that into our terms we get:
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/11/15}{Changed the code for creating the myheadings pagestyle}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\makepagestyle{myheadings}
  \makepsmarks{myheadings}{%
    \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
    \let\chaptermark\@gobble
    \let\sectionmark\@gobble
    \let\tocmark\@gobble
    \let\lofmark\@gobble
    \let\lotmark\@gobble
    \let\bibmark\@gobble
    \let\indexmark\@gobble
  }
  \makeevenhead{myheadings}{\thepage}{}{\slshape\leftmark}
  \makeoddhead{myheadings}{\slshape\rightmark}{}{\thepage}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ps@chapter}
% \begin{macro}{\ps@part}
% \begin{macro}{\ps@cleared}
%  The standard classes use the \pstyle{plain} pagestyle for the first page
% of a chapter. This class uses the \pstyle{chapter} instead, which is
% aliased to \pstyle{plain}. Similarly for parts. 
% Further, |\cleardoublepage| uses whatever
% pagestyle is in effect for the empty verso page. I find that this
% looks odd if the header contains a chapter name. This class uses
% the \pstyle{cleared} pagestyle in this case. I have aliased this
% to \pstyle{empty}; the \pstyle{plain} would be another reasonable choice.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\aliaspagestyle{chapter}{plain}
\aliaspagestyle{part}{plain}
\aliaspagestyle{cleared}{empty}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cleardoublepage}
% A slight adjustment to the kernel definition to set a pagestyle.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\cleardoublepage{\clearpage\if@twoside \ifodd\c@page\else
  \hbox{}\thispagestyle{cleared}%
  \newpage\if@twocolumn\hbox{}\newpage\fi\fi\fi}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\ps@ruled}
%    Partly to show how it is done, the class provides a \pstyle{ruled} pagestyle.
% In this style the headers and footers are the same width as the textblock,
% there is a rule under the header, page numbers are set in the footers
% at the outside of the page. Even page headers have the chapter number
% and title at the left, and odd page headers have the section title
% at the right.
%
%    Start by making the (empty) \pstyle{ruled} pagestyle.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\makepagestyle{ruled}
%    \end{macrocode}
% There is no need to change the default width (which is the |\textwidth|),
% nor the default positions (centered),
% nor to make the footrule visible. We do, though, have to put the page
% numbers into the footers.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\makeevenfoot{ruled}{\thepage}{}{}
\makeoddfoot{ruled}{}{}{\thepage}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Make the header rule visible and equal to the |\textwidth|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\makeheadrule{ruled}{\textwidth}{\normalrulethickness}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@ruledmarks}
% We have to make sure that the |\chapter| and |\section| commands make
% the appropriate marks for use in the headers. We use the hook for this.
% Note that contrary to normal LaTeX practice, the titles are not
% automatically upper-cased. The marks for the tocbibinds also need adjusting.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Changed \cs{@ruledmarks} to cater for tocbibind}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@ruledmarks}{%
  \let\@mkboth\markboth
  \def\chaptermark##1{%
    \markboth{%
      \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
        \if@mainmatter
          \thechapter. \ %
        \fi
      \fi
      ##1}{}}
  \def\sectionmark##1{\markright{##1}}
  \def\tocmark{\markboth{\contentsname}{}}
  \def\lofmark{\markboth{\listfigurename}{}}
  \def\lotmark{\markboth{\listtablename}{}}
  \def\bibmark{\markboth{\bibname}{}}
  \def\indexmark{\markboth{\indexname}{}}
}
\makepsmarks{ruled}{\@ruledmarks}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% We can now define the even page header which is to have the chapter title
% at the left. As the chapter mark did no upper-casing we will print it
% using small caps, but just use the normal font for section title on
% the odd page header.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\makeevenhead{ruled}{\scshape\leftmark}{}{}
\makeoddhead{ruled}{}{}{\rightmark}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% This is all that we need to do for the \pstyle{ruled} pagestyle.
%
% \begin{macro}{\ps@Ruled}
%    Also define a \pstyle{Ruled} pagestyle similar to \pstyle{ruled} except that the
% headers and footers are 10\% wider than the textblock, sticking out
% into the fore edge.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\makepagestyle{Ruled}
\makerunningwidth{Ruled}{1.1\textwidth}
\makeheadposition{Ruled}{flushright}{flushleft}{flushright}{flushleft}
\makeevenfoot{Ruled}{\thepage}{}{}
\makeoddfoot{Ruled}{}{}{\thepage}
\makeheadrule{Ruled}{1.1\textwidth}{\normalrulethickness}
\makepsmarks{Ruled}{\@ruledmarks}
\makeevenhead{Ruled}{\scshape\leftmark}{}{}
\makeoddhead{Ruled}{}{}{\rightmark}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\headwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\ps@companion}
% A \pstyle{companion} pagestyle like the one in the LaTeX Companion series.
% We need the |\headwidth| length for this.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Added \cs{tocmark} etc., to \cs{ps@companion}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\headwidth}

\makepagestyle{companion}
\setlength{\headwidth}{\textwidth}
  \addtolength{\headwidth}{\marginparsep}
  \addtolength{\headwidth}{\marginparwidth}
\makerunningwidth{companion}{\headwidth}
\makeheadrule{companion}{\headwidth}{\normalrulethickness}
\makeheadposition{companion}{flushright}{flushleft}{}{}
\makepsmarks{companion}{%
  \let\@mkboth\markboth
  \def\chaptermark##1{\markboth{##1}{##1}}    % left mark & right marks
  \def\sectionmark##1{\markright{%
    \ifnum \c@secnumdepth>\z@
      \thesection. \ %
    \fi
    ##1}}
  \def\tocmark{\markboth{\contentsname}{\contentsname}}
  \def\lofmark{\markboth{\listfigurename}{\listfigurename}}
  \def\lotmark{\markboth{\listtablename}{\listtablename}}
  \def\bibmark{\markboth{\bibname}{\bibname}}
  \def\indexmark{\markboth{\indexname}{\indexname}}
}
\makeevenhead{companion}{\normalfont\bfseries\thepage}{}%
                        {\normalfont\bfseries\leftmark}
\makeoddhead{companion}{\normalfont\bfseries\rightmark}{}%
                       {\normalfont\bfseries\thepage}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Page numbering}
%
%    The kernel includes the |\pagenumbering| command for setting the
% style (arabic, roman, etc.) of the page numbers, and at the same
% time it resets the page counter. I want a version that resets the style
% but not the number\footnote{Added to meet a request by Daniel Richard G.
% (\texttt{skunk@mit.edu}) September 2001.}.
%
% \begin{macro}{\pagenumbering}
% \begin{macro}{\pagenumbering*}
% |\pagenumbering{|\meta{style}|}| is the normal version whereas
% the starred version does not reset the counter.
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/09/21}{Added \cs{pagenumbering} and \cs{pagenumbering*} }
%    \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\pagenumbering}{%
  \@ifstar{\@smempnum}{\@mempnum}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\@smempnum}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@smempnum}[1]{%
  \gdef\thepage{\csname @#1\endcsname \c@page}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\@mempnum}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@mempnum}[1]{%
  \@smempnum{#1}\global\c@page \@ne}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@storedpagenumber}
% A counter to store the page number.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{storedpagenumber}
  \setcounter{storedpagenumber}{1}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\savepagenumber}
% \begin{macro}{\restoregenumber}
% |\savepagenumber| saves the current page number and |\restorepagenumber|
% sets the page number to the stored value.
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/09/24}{Added \cs{savepagenumber} and \cs{restorepagenumber}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\savepagenumber}{\global\c@storedpagenumber \c@page}
\newcommand{\restorepagenumber}{\global\c@page \c@storedpagenumber}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
%
% \section{Document Markup} \label{sec:docm}
%
% \subsection{The title}
%
%    For books the title is usually designed specifically for the particular
% work, so this class does not provide a |\maketitle| command or any of the
% |\title| and other commands that normally go along with this. If you want
% |\maketitle| and friends I suggest that you use the \Lpack{titling}
% package~\cite{TITLING} which provides for configurable, and multiple,
% titles.
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@titlepage}
% The \Lpack{titling} package expects that the document class provides
% a \Lopt{titlepage} option that is implemented by setting |\@titlepagetrue|.
% This class does not have that option, but we need to make sure that
% the \Lopt{titling} package is usable.
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Added \cs{if@titlepage} to support the titling package}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@titlepage
  \@titlepagefalse

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% 
% \subsection{Parts, chapters and sections}
%
% \subsubsection{Building blocks} The definitions in this part of a
%    class file usually make use of two internal macros, |\@startsection| and
%    |\secdef|. To understand
%    what is going on here, we describe their syntax.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\@startsection}
%    The macro |\@startsection| has 6 required arguments, optionally
%    followed by  a $*$, an optional argument and a required argument:
%
%    |\@startsection|\meta{name}\meta{level}\meta{indent}^^A
%                    \meta{beforeskip}\meta{afterskip}\meta{style}
%            optional *\\
%    \null\hphantom{\bslash @startsection}^^A
%            |[|\meta{altheading}|]|\meta{heading}
%
%    It is a generic command to start a section, the arguments have
%    the following meaning:
%
%    \begin{description}
%    \item[\meta{name}] The name of the user level command, e.g.,
%          `section'.
%    \item[\meta{level}] A number, denoting the depth of the section
%          --- e.g., chapter = 0, section = 1, etc.  A section number
%          will be printed if and only if \meta{level} $<=$  the value
%          of the \Lcount{secnumdepth} counter.
%    \item[\meta{indent}] The indentation of the heading from the left
%          margin
%    \item[\meta{beforeskip}] The absolute value of this argument
%          gives the skip to leave above the heading. If it is
%          negative, then the paragraph indent of the text following
%          the heading is suppressed.
%    \item[\meta{afterskip}] If positive, this gives the skip to leave
%          below the heading, else it gives the skip to leave to the
%          right of a run-in heading.
%    \item[\meta{style}] Commands to set the style of the heading.
%    \item[$*$] When this is missing the heading is numbered and the
%          corresponding counter is incremented.
%    \item[\meta{altheading}] Gives an alternative heading to use in
%          the table of contents and in the running heads. This should
%          be present when the $*$ form is used.
%    \item[\meta{heading}] The heading of the new section.
%    \end{description}
%  A sectioning command is normally defined to |\@startsection| and
%  its first six arguments.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\secdef}
%    The macro |\secdef| can be used when a sectioning command is
%    defined without using |\@startsection|. It has two arguments:
%
%    |\secdef|\meta{unstarcmds}\meta{starcmds}
%
%    \begin{description}
%    \item[\meta{unstarcmds}] Used for the normal form of a
%          sectioning command.
%    \item[\meta{starcmds}] Used for the $*$-form of a
%          sectioning command.
%    \end{description}
%
%    You can use |\secdef| as follows:
% \begin{verbatim}
%       \def\chapter { ... \secdef \CMDA \CMDB }
%       \def\CMDA    [#1]#2{ ... }  % Command to define
%                                   % \chapter[...]{...}
%       \def\CMDB    #1{ ... }      % Command to define
%                                   % \chapter*{...}
% \end{verbatim}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\@hangfrom}
% Internally the |\@startsection| macro uses |\@hangfrom{NUM}|, where
% |NUM| is the sectional number, to produce a hanging paragraph. That is,
% the second and later lines of a multiline title are indented from the
% left margin by the width of the number.
% The definition of |\@hangfrom|, from \file{ltsect.dtx}, is:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \def\@hangfrom#1{\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{{#1}}%
%   \hangindent \wd\@tempboxa\noindent\box\@tempboxa}
% \end{verbatim}
%
% To get a normal paragraphed title you can do: \\
% |\renewcommand{\@hangfrom}[1]{#1}| \\
% or as a block paragraph: \\
% |\renewcommand{\@hangfrom}[1]{\noindent #1}| \\
%
% \DescribeMacro{\@seccntformat}
% The |\@startsection| macro also uses |\@seccntformat{NUM}| to format
% the section number, including the space after it. Its definition,
% from \file{ltsect.dtx}, is
% \begin{verbatim}
% \def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1\endcsname\quad}
% \end{verbatim}
% This is the command to change if you need different number formatting. For
% example the combination
% \begin{verbatim}
% \renewcommand{\@seccntformat}[1]{\llap{\csname the#1\endcsname\quad}}
% \renewcommand{\@hangfrom}[1]{\noindent #1}
% \end{verbatim}
% will hang the section numbers in the margin.
%
% \begin{table}
% \centering
% \caption{Document division levels}\label{tab:levels}
% \begin{tabular}{lr} \hline
% Division & Level \\ \hline
% part          & -1 \\
% chapter       &  0 \\
% section       &  1 \\
% subsection    &  2 \\
% subsubsection &  3 \\
% paragraph     &  4 \\
% subparagraph  &  5 \\ 
% \hline
% \end{tabular}
% \end{table}
%
%     The values used for the document division levels are the same
% as defined by the standard LaTeX classes and are given in 
% Table~\ref{tab:levels}.
%
% \subsection{Mark commands}
%
% \begin{macro}{\partmark}
% \begin{macro}{\chaptermark}
% \begin{macro}{\sectionmark}
% \begin{macro}{\subsectionmark}
% \begin{macro}{\subsubsectionmark}
% \begin{macro}{\paragraphmark}
% \begin{macro}{\subparagraphmark}
%  The default initialisations of the |\...mark| commands for use in
% the pagestyles. Most are already defined in the kernel but they are
% all noted here.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\partmark}[1]{}
\newcommand*{\chaptermark}[1]{}
% \newcommand*{\sectionmark}[1]{}
% \newcommand*{\subsectionmark}[1]{}
% \newcommand*{\subsubsectionmark}[1]{}
% \newcommand*{\paragraphmark}[1]{}
% \newcommand*{\subparagraphmark}[1]{}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bibmark}
%  Marks for the bibliography, which may be filled with |\bibname|.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Added \cs{bibmark}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\bibmark}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\indexmark}
% Marks for the index, which may be filled with |\indexname|.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Added \cs{indexmark}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\indexmark}{}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsubsection{Define Counters}
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@secnumdepth}
%    The value of the counter \Lcount{secnumdepth} gives the depth of
%    the highest-level sectioning command that is to produce section
%    numbers.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\setcounter{secnumdepth}{2}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@part}
% \begin{macro}{\c@chapter}
% \begin{macro}{\c@section}
% \begin{macro}{\c@subsection}
% \begin{macro}{\c@subsubsection}
% \begin{macro}{\c@paragraph}
% \begin{macro}{\c@subparagraph}
%    These counters are used for the sectioning numbers. The macro\\
%    |\newcounter{|\meta{newctr}|}[|\meta{oldctr}|]|\\
%     defines\meta{newctr} to be a counter, which is reset to zero when
%    counter \meta{oldctr} is stepped. Counter \meta{oldctr} must
%    already be defined.
%
%    Part and chapter are the top level document divisions.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{part}
\newcounter{chapter}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    The lower level divisions get reset by higher level divisions.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{section}[chapter]
\newcounter{subsection}[section]
\newcounter{subsubsection}[subsection]
\newcounter{paragraph}[subsubsection]
\newcounter{subparagraph}[paragraph]
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\thepart}
% \begin{macro}{\thechapter}
% \begin{macro}{\thesection}
% \begin{macro}{\thesubsection}
% \begin{macro}{\thesubsubsection}
% \begin{macro}{\theparagraph}
% \begin{macro}{\thesubparagraph}
%    For any counter \Lcount{CTR}, |\theCTR| is a macro that defines
%    the printed version of counter \Lcount{CTR}.  It is defined in
%    terms of the following macros:
%
%    |\arabic{|\Lcount{COUNTER}|}| prints the value of
%    \Lcount{COUNTER} as an arabic numeral.
%
%    |\roman{|\Lcount{COUNTER}|}| prints the value of
%    \Lcount{COUNTER} as a lowercase roman numeral.
%
%    |\Roman{|\Lcount{COUNTER}|}| prints the value of
%    \Lcount{COUNTER} as an uppercase roman numeral.
%
%    |\alph{|\Lcount{COUNTER}|}| prints the value of \Lcount{COUNTER}
%    as a lowercase letter: $1 =$~a, $2 =$~ b, etc.
%
%    |\Alph{|\Lcount{COUNTER}|}| prints the value of \Lcount{COUNTER}
%    as an uppercase letter: $1 =$~A, $2 =$~B, etc.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\thepart}{\@Roman\c@part}
\renewcommand{\thechapter}{\@arabic\c@chapter}
\renewcommand{\thesection}{\thechapter.\@arabic\c@section}
\renewcommand{\thesubsection}{\thesection.\@arabic\c@subsection}
\renewcommand{\thesubsubsection}{\thesubsection.\@arabic\c@subsubsection}
\renewcommand{\theparagraph}{\thesubsubsection.\@arabic\c@paragraph}
\renewcommand{\thesubparagraph}{\theparagraph.\@arabic\c@subparagraph}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@chapapp}
% |\@chapapp| is initially defined as |\chaptername|. The |\appendix|
% command redfines it as |\appendixname|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@chapapp}{\chaptername}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{Front, main and back matter}
%
% These are the three main logical divisions in a book. As noted earlier,
% the boolean |\if@mainmatter| is TRUE iff the main matter is being
% processed. Chapters will be unnumbered when |\if@mainmatter| is FALSE.
%
% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter}
% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter*}
% The |\frontmatter| command starts roman numbering and turns off 
% chapter numbering.
% It ensures that lower level divisions will not have chapter numbers,
% nor will figures or tables. It
% also ensures that the next page will be recto.
% The starred version makes no changes to the page numbering\footnote{The
% starred versions were added to meet a request by Daniel Richard G.
% (\texttt{skunk@mit.edu}) in September 2001.}.
% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{\cs{frontmatter} switches off numbering via
%                the secnumdepth counter}
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/09/21}{Added \cs{frontmatter*} command}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\frontmatter}{%
  \@ifstar{\@smemfront}{\@memfront}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\@smemfront}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@smemfront}{%
  \cleardoublepage
  \@mainmatterfalse
  \setcounter{secnumdepth}{-10}
  \counterwithout{figure}{chapter}
  \counterwithout{table}{chapter}
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\@memfront}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@memfront}{%
  \@smemfront\pagenumbering{roman}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\mainmatter}
% \begin{macro}{\mainmatter*}
% The |\mainmatter| command starts arabic numbering and turns on chapter numbering.
% It sets numbering to the normal state. It
% also ensures that the next page will be recto. The starred version does 
% not change the page numbering.
% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{\cs{mainmatter} switches on section numbering
%                via the secnumdepth counter}
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/09/21}{Added \cs{mainmatter*} command}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\mainmatter}{%
  \@ifstar{\@smemmain}{\@memmain}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\@smemmain}
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Modified \cs{@smemmain} to reset the secnumdepth
%                counter to maxsecnumdepth}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@smemmain}{
  \cleardoublepage
  \@mainmattertrue
  \setcounter{secnumdepth}{\value{maxsecnumdepth}}
  \counterwithin{figure}{chapter}
  \counterwithin{table}{chapter}
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\@memmain}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@memmain}{%
  \@smemmain\pagenumbering{arabic}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\backmatter}
% This command turns off chapter numbering but leaves the page numbering alone. 
% It twiddles the numbering caption numbering.
% The back matter may start on any new page.
% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{\cs{backmatter} uses the secnumdepth counter}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\backmatter}{%
  \if@openright
    \cleardoublepage
  \else
    \clearpage
  \fi
  \@mainmatterfalse
  \setcounter{secnumdepth}{-10}
%%  \renewcommand{\thesection}{\@arabic\c@section}
  \counterwithout{figure}{chapter}
  \counterwithout{table}{chapter}
  \setcounter{figure}{0}
  \setcounter{table}{0}
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%  
%
% \subsubsection{Divisions}
%
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\part}
% |\part{|\meta{title}|}| starts a new Part called \meta{title}.
% The actual typesetting of the title is done by |\@part| or |\@spart|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\part}{%
  \@setuppart
  \secdef\@part\@spart}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\beforepartskip}
% \begin{macro}{\midpartskip}
% \begin{macro}{\afterpartskip}
% These three macros are the skips before, in the middle, and after the
% Part heading.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\beforepartskip}{\null\vfil}
\newcommand{\midpartskip}{\par\vskip 20pt}
\newcommand{\afterpartskip}{\vfil\newpage}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@setuppart}
% This macro does the work of setting up for the |\part| command.
% A single column page, normally recto, with a \pstyle{part} pagestyle is started.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@setuppart}{%
  \if@openright
    \cleardoublepage
  \else
    \clearpage
  \fi
  \thispagestyle{part}%
  \if@twocolumn
    \onecolumn
    \@tempswatrue
  \else
    \@tempswafalse
  \fi
  \beforepartskip}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\partnamefont}
% \begin{macro}{\partnumfont}
% \begin{macro}{\parttitlefont}
% These three macros specify the fonts for the part name and number, and
% for the part title, respectively.
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Rewrote the typesetting for Part titles}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\partnamefont}{\normalfont\huge\bfseries}
\newcommand{\partnumfont}{\normalfont\huge\bfseries}
\newcommand{\parttitlefont}{\normalfont\Huge\bfseries}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\printpartname}
% \begin{macro}{\partnamenum}
% \begin{macro}{\printpartnum}
% \begin{macro}{\printparttitle}
% Macros to print the various parts of a Part heading.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\printpartname}{\partnamefont \partname}
\newcommand{\partnamenum}{\space}
\newcommand{\printpartnum}{\partnumfont \thepart}
\newcommand{\printparttitle}[1]{\parttitlefont #1}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@part}
% |\@part{|\meta{short}|]{|\meta{long}|}| typesets the title of a |\part|
% part. There is a number if |\secnumdepth| is greater than -2.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Used \cs{partnumberline} in \cs{@part}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@part[#1]#2{%
  \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax
    \refstepcounter{part}%
%%    \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{\thepart\hspace{1em}#1}%
    \addcontentsline{toc}{part}%
      {\protect\partnumberline{\thepart}#1}%
  \else
    \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}%
  \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Empty the marks, center the title on the page, and set the normal font.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \markboth{}{}%
  {\centering
   \interlinepenalty \@M
   \normalfont
%    \end{macrocode}
% Print the number, if there is one, then the title below. Macro |\@endpart|
% tidies everything up at the end.
%    \begin{macrocode}
   \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax
     \printpartname \partnamenum \printpartnum
     \midpartskip
   \fi
   \printparttitle{#2}\par}%
  \@endpart}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@spart}
% |\@spart{|\meta{long}|}| formats the title of a |\part*| part. It is 
% simpler than |\@part| because there is no  number to print.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@spart#1{%
  {\centering
   \interlinepenalty \@M
   \normalfont
   \printparttitle{#1}\par}%
  \@endpart}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@endpart}
% This finishes off both |\@part| and |\@spart|. The current page is flushed.
% In the standard \Lpack{book} class if 
% two-sided mode is on a blank page is then produced. I think that this looks
% odd when the \Lopt{openany} option is in force, so here it only produces
% an extra blank page if both \Lopt{twoside} and \Lopt{openright} are
% in effect. If necessary, two
% column mode is switched back on.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@endpart{\afterpartskip
  \if@twoside
    \if@openright
      \null
      \thispagestyle{empty}%
      \newpage
    \fi
  \fi
  \if@tempswa
    \twocolumn
  \fi}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
%    The command to start a new chapter. Chapters always start on a new page
% with a \pstyle{chapter} pagestyle. Floats are not allowed at the top of the page.
% The typesetting is done by either |\@chapter| or |\@schapter|.
% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Changed \cs{chapter} for article option}
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/10/24}{Changed chapter page clearing to \cs{clearforchapter}}
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{New optarg in \cs{chapter} for short heading}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\chapter{%
  \ifartopt\else
    \clearforchapter
    \thispagestyle{chapter}
    \global\@topnum\z@
  \fi
  \@afterindentfalse
  \@ifstar{\@m@mschapter}{\@m@mchapter}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@m@mchapter}
% \begin{macro}{\ch@pt@c}
% \begin{macro}{\m@m@empty}
% Intermediate and support macros for the extra optional argument
% to |\chapter|. Have to do this long windedly otherwise dear old
% \Lpack{hyperref} barfs.
%
% The code for two optional arguments is based on a posting
% to |ctt| by Robin Fairbairns (1997/04/12 Re: Several optional arguments
% for macro?). 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@m@mchapter}[1][\@empty]{%
  \def\ch@pt@c{#1}% capture first optional arg
  \@dblarg{\@chapter}}
\def\m@m@empty{\@empty}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@chapter}
% \begin{macro}{\f@rtoc}
% \begin{macro}{\f@rhdr}
% |\@chapter[|\meta{tocmark}|]{|\meta{title}|}| 
% typesets the title of a 
% |\chapter|. 
% There is a number if |\secnumdepth| is greater than -1 and |\@mainmatter|
% is TRUE. 
%
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Complete rewrite of \cs{@chapter}}
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Changed \cs{numberline} to \cs{chapternumberline}
%                            in \cs{@chapter}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@chapter[#1]#2{%
  \ifx\ch@pt@c\m@m@empty % no optional args
    \def\f@rtoc{#1}%
    \def\f@rhdr{#1}%
  \else                  % at least one opt arg
    \def\f@rtoc{\ch@pt@c}%
    \nametest{#1}{#2}%
    \ifsamename          % one opt arg
      \def\f@rhdr{\ch@pt@c}%
    \else                % two opt args
      \def\f@rhdr{#1}%
    \fi
  \fi
  \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
    \if@mainmatter
      \refstepcounter{chapter}%
      \typeout{\@chapapp\space\thechapter.}%
      \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}%
        {\protect\chapternumberline{\thechapter}\f@rtoc}%
    \else
      \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\f@rtoc}%
    \fi
  \else
    \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\f@rtoc}%
  \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Store the (short) title via |\chaptermark|, and add some whitespace to
% the LoF and LoT. Then fiddle when we are using two columns, calling
% |\@makechapterhead| to do the typesetting.
% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Changed \cs{@chapter} for article option}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \chaptermark{\f@rhdr}
  \ifartopt
    \@makechapterhead{#2}%
    \@afterheading
  \else
    \insertchapterspace
    \if@twocolumn
      \@topnewpage[\@makechapterhead{#2}]%
    \else
      \@makechapterhead{#2}%
      \@afterheading
    \fi
  \fi}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@makechapterhead}
% This \emph{really} typesets a |\chapter|. Leave some whitespace and prepare to
% set |\raggedright|.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Added \cs{printchapternonum} to 
%                            \cs{@makechapterhead}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@makechapterhead#1{%
  \chapterheadstart%  \vspace*{50\p@}%
  {\parindent \z@ \raggedright \normalfont
%    \end{macrocode}
% If there is a number, typeset it, otherwise call |\printchapternonum|..
%    \begin{macrocode}
   \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
     \if@mainmatter
       \printchaptername \chapternamenum \printchapternum 
       \afterchapternum % \par\nobreak \vskip 20\p@
     \else
       \printchapternonum
     \fi
   \else
     \printchapternonum
   \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Typeset the title.
%    \begin{macrocode}
   \interlinepenalty\@M
   \printchaptertitle{#1} % \Huge \bfseries #1
   \afterchaptertitle % \par\nobreak \vskip 40\p@
  }}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\insertchapterspace}
% By default, a |\chapter| inserts some vertical space into the LoF and LoT.
% The macro |\insertchapterspace| performs the insertion.
% \changes{v0.33}{2001/08/31}{Added \cs{insertchapterspace}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\insertchapterspace}{%
  \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\addvspace{10pt}}%
  \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\addvspace{10pt}}%
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@chs@def@ult}
% This sets up all the definitions used in |\@makechapterhead|
% and |\@makeschapterhead|.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Added \cs{printchapternonum} to \cs{@chs@def@ult}}
% \begin{macro}{\chapterheadstart}
% \begin{macro}{\printchaptername}
% \begin{macro}{\chapternamenum}
% \begin{macro}{\printchapternum}
% \begin{macro}{\afterchapternum}
% \begin{macro}{\printchapternum}
% \begin{macro}{\printchapternonum}
% \begin{macro}{\printchaptertitle}
% \begin{macro}{\afterchaptertitle}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@chs@def@ult}{%
  \def\chapterheadstart{\vspace*{\beforechapskip}}
  \def\printchaptername{\chapnamefont \@chapapp}
  \def\chapternamenum{\space}
  \def\printchapternum{\chapnumfont \thechapter}
  \def\afterchapternum{\par\nobreak\vskip \midchapskip}
  \def\printchapternonum{}
  \def\printchaptertitle##1{\chaptitlefont ##1}
  \def\afterchaptertitle{\par\nobreak\vskip \afterchapskip}
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% 
% \begin{macro}{\chapnamefont}
% \begin{macro}{\chapnumfont}
% \begin{macro}{\chaptitlefont}
% Fonts for setting the chapter number, name (e.g., Chapter) and title.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\chapnamefont}{\normalfont\huge\bfseries}
\newcommand{\chapnumfont}{\normalfont\huge\bfseries}
\newcommand{\chaptitlefont}{\normalfont\Huge\bfseries}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\beforechapskip}
% \begin{macro}{\midchapskip}
% \begin{macro}{\afterchapskip}
% Lengths separating the various parts of a chapter heading.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\beforechapskip}\setlength{\beforechapskip}{50pt}
\newlength{\midchapskip}\setlength{\midchapskip}{20pt}
\newlength{\afterchapskip}\setlength{\afterchapskip}{40pt}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\makechapterstyle}
% \begin{macro}{\chapterstyle}
% |\chapterstyle{|\meta{style}|}| is like |\pagestyle|, except it's for 
% chapters. 
%
% |\makechapterstyle{|\meta{style}|}{|\meta{text}|}| creates
% or overrides the \meta{style} chapter style defining it as \meta{text}
% So, |\makechapterstyle{fred}{code}| specifies that the chapter style |fred|
% is defined as the macro |\chs@fred{code}|, 
% and |\chapterstyle{fred}| calls the macro |\chs@fred|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\makechapterstyle}[2]{\@namedef{chs@#1}{\@chs@def@ult #2}}
\newcommand{\chapterstyle}[1]{\@nameuse{chs@#1}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% Set the \pstyle{default} chapter style.
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Added code when making the default chapterstyle}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\makechapterstyle{default}{%
  \renewcommand{\chapnamefont}{\normalfont\huge\bfseries}
  \renewcommand{\chapnumfont}{\normalfont\huge\bfseries}
  \renewcommand{\chaptitlefont}{\normalfont\Huge\bfseries}
  \setlength{\beforechapskip}{50pt}
  \setlength{\midchapskip}{20pt}
  \setlength{\afterchapskip}{40pt}
}
\chapterstyle{default}

%    \end{macrocode}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@m@mschapter}
% This deals with the new optional argument for starred chapters.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@m@mschapter}[2][\@empty]{%
  \@schapter{#2}%
  \ifx \@empty #1\else   % opt arg
    \setcounter{secnumdepth}{-10}%
    \chaptermark{#1}%
    \setcounter{secnumdepth}{\value{maxsecnumdepth}}%
  \fi}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@schapter}
% |\@schapter{|\meta{long}|}| typesets the title of a 
% |\chapter*|. It is easier than the |\@chapter| as there is no number
% to worry about.
% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Changed \cs{@schapter} for article option}
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Major rewrite of \cs{@schapter}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@schapter}[1]{%
  \ifartopt
    \@makeschapterhead{#1}%
    \@afterheading
  \else
    \if@twocolumn
      \@topnewpage[\@makeschapterhead{#1}]%
    \else
      \@makeschapterhead{#1}%
      \@afterheading
    \fi
  \fi}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@makeschapterhead}
% This \emph{really} typesets a |\chapter*|, and is similar to |\@makechapterhead|.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Added \cs{printchapternonum} to 
%                            \cs{@makeschapterhead}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@makeschapterhead#1{%
  \chapterheadstart
  {\parindent \z@ \raggedright \normalfont
   \printchapternonum
   \interlinepenalty\@M
   \printchaptertitle{#1}
   \afterchaptertitle
  }
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\chs@section}
% The \pstyle{section} chapter style. It prints the heading as though it
% were a section.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/18}{Made \cs{chapnumfont} change in section chapterstyle explicit}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\makechapterstyle{section}{%
  \renewcommand{\printchaptername}{}
  \renewcommand{\chapternamenum}{}
  \renewcommand{\chapnumfont}{\normalfont\Huge\bfseries}
  \renewcommand{\printchapternum}{\chapnumfont \thechapter\space}
  \renewcommand{\afterchapternum}{}
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\chs@article}
% The \pstyle{article} chapter style. It prints the heading as though it
% were a section in an \Lpack{article} class document.
% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Added article chapterstyle}
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/18}{Made \cs{chapnumfont} change in article chapterstyle explicit}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\makechapterstyle{article}{%
  \renewcommand{\chapterheadstart}{\vspace{\beforechapskip}}
  \setlength{\beforechapskip}{3.5ex \@plus 1ex \@minus .2ex}
  \setlength{\afterchapskip}{2.3ex \@plus .2ex}
  \renewcommand{\printchaptername}{}
  \renewcommand{\chapternamenum}{}
  \renewcommand{\chaptitlefont}{\normalfont\Large\bfseries}
  \renewcommand{\chapnumfont}{\normalfont\Large\bfseries}
  \renewcommand{\printchapternum}{\chapnumfont \thechapter\space}
  \renewcommand{\afterchapternum}{}
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\chs@hangnum}
% The \pstyle{hangnum} style puts the chapter number in the margin.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\makechapterstyle{hangnum}{%
  \renewcommand{\chapnumfont}{\chaptitlefont}
  \settowidth{\chapindent}{\chapnumfont 999}
  \renewcommand{\printchaptername}{}
  \renewcommand{\chapternamenum}{}
  \renewcommand{\printchapternum}{%
    \noindent\llap{\makebox[\chapindent][l]{\chapnumfont \thechapter}}}
  \renewcommand{\afterchapternum}{}
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\chapindent}
% \begin{macro}{\chs@companion}
% The \pstyle{companion} style is like that in the LaTeX Companion
% series. It requires the |\chapindent| length. The user needs
% to be careful to have a wide enough spine margin on verso pages
% if the title may appear on a verso page.
% \changes{v0.31}{2001/07/24}{Changed adjustwidth* to adjustwidth in companion chapterstyle}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\chapindent}

\makechapterstyle{companion}{%
  \renewcommand{\chapnamefont}{\normalfont\LARGE\scshape}
  \renewcommand{\printchaptername}{\raggedleft\chapnamefont \@chapapp}
  \renewcommand{\chapnumfont}{\normalfont\Huge}
  \setlength{\chapindent}{\marginparsep}
  \addtolength{\chapindent}{\marginparwidth}
  \renewcommand{\printchaptertitle}[1]{%
    \begin{adjustwidth}{}{-\chapindent}
      \raggedleft \chaptitlefont ##1\par\nobreak
    \end{adjustwidth}}
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\chs@demo}
% An exotic chapter style for demonstration purposes.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\makechapterstyle{demo}{
  \renewcommand{\printchaptername}{\centering}
  \renewcommand{\printchapternum}{\chapnumfont \numtoName{\c@chapter}}
  \renewcommand{\chaptitlefont}{\normalfont\Huge\sffamily}
  \renewcommand{\printchaptertitle}[1]{%
    \hrule\vskip\onelineskip \raggedleft \chaptitlefont ##1}
  \renewcommand{\afterchaptertitle}{\vskip\onelineskip \hrule\vskip \afterchapskip}
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \subsubsection{Lower level headings}
%
%    These commands all make use of |\@startsection|. 
%
%    We will tweak |\@startsection| so that a short page (where a section
% heading is moved from the bottom of the page to the top of the next)
% can be set |\raggedbottom|. 
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifraggedbottomsection}
% |\raggedbottomsectiontrue| for ragged short pages.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{ifraggedbottomsection}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifraggedbottomsection
  \raggedbottomsectionfalse
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bottomsectionskip}
% Decreasing this length increases short page bottom flushness.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{bottomsectionskip}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\bottomsectionskip}
  \setlength{\bottomsectionskip}{10mm}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@startsection}
% This is a modified version of the kernel |\@startsection| to make short
% pages raggedbottom. It is based on the thread {\itshape Can |\flushbottom|
% and |\section| be made to live together?} on CTT in September 2002.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Modified \cs{@startsection}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\m@m@startsection\@startsection
\renewcommand{\@startsection}{%
  \ifraggedbottomsection\if@nobreak\else
    \vskip\z@\@plus\bottomsectionskip
    \penalty\z@
    \vskip\z@\@plus -\bottomsectionskip
  \fi\fi
  \m@m@startsection}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% 
% \begin{macro}{\section}
% A normal heading with white space above and below and no indentation
% of the first paragraph. 
% By default the heading is set in a |\Large\bfseries| font.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\section}{%
  \sechook%
  \@startsection{section}{1}%  level 1
      {\secindent}%            heading indent
      {\beforesecskip}%        skip before the heading
      {\aftersecskip}%         skip after the heading
      {\normalfont\secheadstyle}} % font
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sechook}
% \begin{macro}{\setsechook}
% |\sechook| is called at the start of a |\section| and 
% |\setsechook{|\meta{code}|}| redefines it.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\sechook}{}
\newcommand{\setsechook}[1]{\renewcommand{\sechook}{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\secindent}
% \begin{macro}{\beforesecskip}
% \begin{macro}{\aftersecskip}
% \begin{macro}{\secheadstyle}
% \begin{macro}{\setsecindent}
% \begin{macro}{\setbeforesecskip}
% \begin{macro}{\setaftersecskip}
% \begin{macro}{\setsecheadstyle}
% |\secindent| is the indentation of the section heading from the left margin,
% |\beforesecskip| and |\aftersecskip| specify the white space before
% and after the heading, and |\secheadstyle| specifies the heading style.
% These are set to the default values for the \Lpack{book} class,
% except that the heading will be |\raggedright|, thus preventing
% hyphenation. The
% |\set...| commands are for the user to change the values.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\secindent}
\newcommand{\setsecindent}[1]{\setlength{\secindent}{#1}}
  \setsecindent{\z@}
\newskip\beforesecskip
\newcommand{\setbeforesecskip}[1]{\setlength{\beforesecskip}{#1}}
  \setbeforesecskip{-3.5ex \@plus -1ex \@minus -.2ex}
\newskip\aftersecskip
\newcommand{\setaftersecskip}[1]{\setlength{\aftersecskip}{#1}}
  \setaftersecskip{2.3ex \@plus .2ex}
\newcommand{\secheadstyle}{}
\newcommand{\setsecheadstyle}[1]{\renewcommand{\secheadstyle}{#1}}
  \setsecheadstyle{\Large\bfseries\raggedright}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\subsection}
% A normal heading with white space above and below and no indentation
% of the first paragraph.
% By default the heading is set in a |\large\bfseries| font.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\subsection}{%
  \subsechook%
  \@startsection{subsection}{2}%  level 2
      {\subsecindent}%            heading indent
      {\beforesubsecskip}%        skip before the heading
      {\aftersubsecskip}%         skip after the heading
      {\normalfont\subsecheadstyle}} % font
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\subsechook}
% \begin{macro}{\setsubsechook}
% |\subsechook| is called at the start of a |\subsection| and 
% |\setsubsechook{|\meta{code}|}| redefines it.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\subsechook}{}
\newcommand{\setsubsechook}[1]{\renewcommand{\subsechook}{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\subsecindent}
% \begin{macro}{\beforesubsecskip}
% \begin{macro}{\aftersubsecskip}
% \begin{macro}{\subsecheadstyle}
% \begin{macro}{\setsubsecindent}
% \begin{macro}{\setbeforesubsecskip}
% \begin{macro}{\setaftersubsecskip}
% \begin{macro}{\setsubsecheadstyle}
% The macros for controlling |\subsection| headings.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\subsecindent}
\newcommand{\setsubsecindent}[1]{\setlength{\subsecindent}{#1}}
  \setsubsecindent{\z@}
\newskip\beforesubsecskip
\newcommand{\setbeforesubsecskip}[1]{\setlength{\beforesubsecskip}{#1}}
  \setbeforesubsecskip{-3.25ex \@plus -1ex \@minus -.2ex}
\newskip\aftersubsecskip
\newcommand{\setaftersubsecskip}[1]{\setlength{\aftersubsecskip}{#1}}
  \setaftersubsecskip{1.5ex \@plus .2ex}
\newcommand{\subsecheadstyle}{}
\newcommand{\setsubsecheadstyle}[1]{\renewcommand{\subsecheadstyle}{#1}}
  \setsubsecheadstyle{\large\bfseries\raggedright}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection}
% A normal heading with white space above and below and no indentation
% of the first paragraph.
% By default the heading is set in a |\normalsize\bfseries| font.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\subsubsection}{%
  \subsubsechook%
  \@startsection{subsubsection}{3}%  level 3
      {\subsubsecindent}%            heading indent
      {\beforesubsubsecskip}%        skip before the heading
      {\aftersubsubsecskip}%         skip after the heading
      {\normalfont\subsubsecheadstyle}} % font
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\subsubsechook}
% \begin{macro}{\setsubsubsechook}
% |\subsubsechook| is called at the start of a |\subsubsection| and 
% |\setsubsubsechook{|\meta{code}|}| redefines it.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\subsubsechook}{}
\newcommand{\setsubsubsechook}[1]{\renewcommand{\subsubsechook}{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\subsubsecindent}
% \begin{macro}{\beforesubsubsecskip}
% \begin{macro}{\aftersubsubsecskip}
% \begin{macro}{\subsubsecheadstyle}
% \begin{macro}{\setsubsubsecindent}
% \begin{macro}{\setbeforesubsubsecskip}
% \begin{macro}{\setaftersubsubsecskip}
% \begin{macro}{\setsubsubsecheadstyle}
% The macros for controlling |\subsubsection| headings.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\subsubsecindent}
\newcommand{\setsubsubsecindent}[1]{\setlength{\subsubsecindent}{#1}}
  \setsubsubsecindent{\z@}
\newskip\beforesubsubsecskip
\newcommand{\setbeforesubsubsecskip}[1]{\setlength{\beforesubsubsecskip}{#1}}
  \setbeforesubsubsecskip{-3.25ex \@plus -1ex \@minus -.2ex}
\newskip\aftersubsubsecskip
\newcommand{\setaftersubsubsecskip}[1]{\setlength{\aftersubsubsecskip}{#1}}
  \setaftersubsubsecskip{1.5ex \@plus .2ex}
\newcommand{\subsubsecheadstyle}{}
\newcommand{\setsubsubsecheadstyle}[1]{\renewcommand{\subsubsecheadstyle}{#1}}
  \setsubsubsecheadstyle{\normalsize\bfseries\raggedright}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% 
%
% \begin{macro}{\paragraph}
% A runin heading with white space above and to the right of the heading.
% By default the heading is set in a |\normalsize\bfseries| font.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\paragraph}{%
  \parahook%
  \@startsection{paragraph}{4}%  level 4
      {\paraindent}%            heading indent
      {\beforeparaskip}%        skip before the heading
      {\afterparaskip}%         skip after the heading
      {\normalfont\paraheadstyle}} % font
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\parahook}
% \begin{macro}{\setparahook}
% |\parahook| is called at the start of a |\paragraph| and 
% |\setparahook{|\meta{code}|}| redefines it.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\parahook}{}
\newcommand{\setparahook}[1]{\renewcommand{\parahook}{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\paraindent}
% \begin{macro}{\beforeparaskip}
% \begin{macro}{\afterparaskip}
% \begin{macro}{\paraheadstyle}
% \begin{macro}{\setparaindent}
% \begin{macro}{\setbeforeparaskip}
% \begin{macro}{\setafterparaskip}
% \begin{macro}{\setparaheadstyle}
% The macros for controlling |\paragraph| headings.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\paraindent}
\newcommand{\setparaindent}[1]{\setlength{\paraindent}{#1}}
  \setparaindent{\z@}
\newskip\beforeparaskip
\newcommand{\setbeforeparaskip}[1]{\setlength{\beforeparaskip}{#1}}
  \setbeforeparaskip{3.25ex \@plus 1ex \@minus .2ex}
\newskip\afterparaskip
\newcommand{\setafterparaskip}[1]{\setlength{\afterparaskip}{#1}}
  \setafterparaskip{-1em}
\newcommand{\paraheadstyle}{}
\newcommand{\setparaheadstyle}[1]{\renewcommand{\paraheadstyle}{#1}}
  \setparaheadstyle{\normalsize\bfseries}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% 
%
% \begin{macro}{\subparagraph}
% A runin heading with white space above and to the right of the heading.
% By default the heading is set in a |\normalsize\bfseries| font.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\subparagraph}{%
  \subparahook%
  \@startsection{subparagraph}{5}%  level 5
      {\subparaindent}%            heading indent
      {\beforesubparaskip}%        skip before the heading
      {\aftersubparaskip}%         skip after the heading
      {\normalfont\subparaheadstyle}} % font
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\subparahook}
% \begin{macro}{\setsubparahook}
% |\subparahook| is called at the start of a |\subparagraph| and 
% |\setsubparahook{|\meta{code}|}| redefines it.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\subparahook}{}
\newcommand{\setsubparahook}[1]{\renewcommand{\subparahook}{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\subparaindent}
% \begin{macro}{\beforesubparaskip}
% \begin{macro}{\aftersubparaskip}
% \begin{macro}{\subparaheadstyle}
% \begin{macro}{\setsubparaindent}
% \begin{macro}{\setbeforesubparaskip}
% \begin{macro}{\setaftersubparaskip}
% \begin{macro}{\setsubparaheadstyle}
% The macros for controlling |\subparagraph| headings.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\subparaindent}
\newcommand{\setsubparaindent}[1]{\setlength{\subparaindent}{#1}}
  \setsubparaindent{\parindent}
\newskip\beforesubparaskip
\newcommand{\setbeforesubparaskip}[1]{\setlength{\beforesubparaskip}{#1}}
  \setbeforesubparaskip{3.25ex \@plus 1ex \@minus .2ex}
\newskip\aftersubparaskip
\newcommand{\setaftersubparaskip}[1]{\setlength{\aftersubparaskip}{#1}}
  \setaftersubparaskip{-1em}
\newcommand{\subparaheadstyle}{}
\newcommand{\setsubparaheadstyle}[1]{\renewcommand{\subparaheadstyle}{#1}}
  \setsubparaheadstyle{\normalsize\bfseries}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sethangfrom}
% The macro |\sethangfrom{|\meta{code}|}| is a user-level command
% for changing the definition of |\@hangfrom|. Use |#1| in \meta{code}
% for the argument to |\@hangfrom| (or |##1| if used inside another macro).
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Added \cs{sethangfrom}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\sethangfrom}[1]{\renewcommand{\@hangfrom}[1]{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setsecnumformat}
% The macro |\setsecnumformat{|\meta{code}|}| is a user-level command
% for changing the definition of |\@seccntformat|. Use |#1| in \meta{code}
% for the argument to |\@seccntformat| (or |##1| if used inside another macro).
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Added \cs{setsecnumformat}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setsecnumformat}[1]{\renewcommand{\@seccntformat}[1]{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\hangsecnum}
% \begin{macro}{\defaultsecnum}
% These are declarations for putting sectional numbers in the margin,
% or the default sectional number formatting.
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Added \cs{hangsecnum} and \cs{defaultsecnum}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\hangsecnum}{%
  \def\@seccntformat##1{\llap{\csname the##1\endcsname\quad}}}
\newcommand{\defaultsecnum}{%
  \def\@seccntformat##1{\csname the##1\endcsname\quad}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\plainbreak}
% |\plainbreak{|\meta{num}|}| generates \meta{num} blanks lines and
% suppresses the indentation of a following paragraph. The starred
% version, |\plainbreak*|, does not suppress paragraph indentation.
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Added starred version of \cs{plainbreak}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\plainbreak}{\@ifstar{\@spbreak}{\@pbreak}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@pbreak}
% \begin{macro}{\@spbreak}
% These are the internal forms for the two versions of |\plainbreak|.
% The code for |\@pbreak| is almost a straight copy of code posted to
% CTT by Donald Arseneau on 2001/03/26.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@pbreak}[1]{\par
  \penalty -100
  \vskip #1\onelineskip \@plus 2\onelineskip
  \penalty -20
  \vskip \z@ \@plus -2\onelineskip
  \@afterindentfalse
  \@afterheading}
\newcommand*{\@spbreak}[1]{\par
  \penalty -100
  \vskip #1\onelineskip \@plus 2\onelineskip
  \penalty -20
  \vskip \z@ \@plus -2\onelineskip
  \@afterindenttrue
  \@afterheading}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\fancybreak}
% |\fancybreak{|\meta{text}|}| typesets \meta{text} centered. For example,
% |\fancybreak{{*}\\{* * *}\\{*}}|. It suppresses indentation of the 
% following paragraph. The starred version leaves indentation as is.
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Added starred version of \cs{fancybreak}}
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Tweaked \cs{fancybreak} to remove underfull hbox}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\fancybreak}{\@ifstar{\@sfbreak}{\@fbreak}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@fbreak}
% \begin{macro}{\@sfbreak}
% These are the internal forms for the two versions of |\fancybreak|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@fbreak}[1]{\par
  \penalty -100
  \noindent\parbox{\linewidth}{\centering #1}\null
  \penalty -20
%%  \vskip -\onelineskip
  \@afterindentfalse
  \@afterheading}
\newcommand{\@sfbreak}[1]{\par
  \penalty -100
  \noindent\parbox{\linewidth}{\centering #1}\null
  \penalty -20
%%  \vskip -\onelineskip
  \@afterindenttrue
  \@afterheading}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\plainfancybreak}
% The |\plainfancybreak{|\meta{space}|}{|\meta{num}|}{|\meta{text}|}| acts
% like |\plainbreak{|\meta{num}|}| in the middle of a page and like
% |\fancybreak{|\meta{text}|}| at the bottom of a page. The \meta{space}
% argument is the vertical space required for the \meta{num} blank lines
% and some additional lines of text. From experiments, it seems that
% \meta{space} should be at least (3+\meta{num}) lines (|\onelineskip|).
% There is also a starred version, |\plainfancybreak*|, to match the other
% starred break commands.
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Added \cs{plainfancybreak} and supporting macros}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\plainfancybreak}{\@ifstar{\@spfbreak}{\@pfbreak}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@pfbreak}
% \begin{macro}{\@spfbreak}
% These are the internal macros for the unstarred and starred versions
% of |\plainfancybreak|. They essentially do the same thing, except they call, 
% respectively, the unstarred and starred internal versions of |\plainbreak|
% and |\fancybreak|. The code for checking the amount of space left on the
% page is from an early, and abandoned, version of the code for |\needspace|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@pfbreak}[3]{\par
  \@tempdimc\pagegoal \advance\@tempdimc-\pagetotal
  \ifdim #1>\@tempdimc \@fbreak{#3}\else \@pbreak{#2}\fi}
\newcommand{\@spfbreak}[3]{\par
  \@tempdimc\pagegoal \advance\@tempdimc-\pagetotal
  \ifdim #1>\@tempdimc \@sfbreak{#3}\else \@spbreak{#2}\fi}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% From the thread \textit{Customizing section hooks in memoir.cls} on CTT
% in October 2002 it appeared that |\plainfancybreak| may be fragile.
% Donald Arseneau said that |\plainfancybreak| guessed at the amount
% of space available and gave code based on a modified output routine
% to make it more robust. The following code is based on that thread.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added lots of code for new \cs{fpbreak}}
%
% \begin{macro}{\pen@ltyabovefpbreak}
% \begin{macro}{\pen@ltybelowfpbreak}
% Penalities for communication with the output routine.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\pen@ltyabovepfbreak}{2}
\newcommand*{\pen@ltybelowpfbreak}{-4}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\pfbreakskip}
% The vertical space taken by the plain and fancy breaks.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\pfbreakskip}
  \setlength{\pfbreakskip}{2\baselineskip}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\pfbreakdisplay}
% This is the fancybreak display, which must fit into |\pfbreakskip|
% vertical space.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\pfbreakdisplay}{*\quad*\quad*}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\pfbre@kdispl@y}
% Typesets |\pfbreakdisplay| vertically and horizontally centered.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pfbre@kdispl@y{\vbox to 1\pfbreakskip{\vss
  \hb@xt@ \columnwidth{\hss \pfbreakdisplay \hss}%
  \vss}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\nopfbreakOutput}
% Save the cureent output routine.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\edef\nopfbreakOutput{\the\output}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\pfbreakOutput}
% Special output to handle the |\pfbreak|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\pfbreakOutput{%
  \ifnum\outputpenalty=\pen@ltyabovepfbreak
    \nopfbreakOutput
    \pfbre@kdispl@y
    \nobreak
    \vskip-\pfbreakskip
  \else\ifnum\outputpenalty=\pen@ltybelowpfbreak
    \unvbox 255\relax
    \nobreak
    \vskip-\pfbreakskip
    \pfbre@kdispl@y
    \break
  \else
    \nopfbreakOutput
  \fi
  \fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\output}
% Use the new |\pfbreak| output routine.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\output={\pfbreakOutput}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\pfbreak}
% Typesets a plain break in the middle of the page, otherwise
% a fancybreak at either the bottom or top of the page.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\pfbreak}{\@ifstar{\@spfbreakgap}{\@pfbreakgap}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@pfbreakgap}
% Unstarred version of |\pfbreak|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@pfbreakgap}{%
  \par {%
  \skip@\lastskip
  \nobreak
  \vskip -\ifdim\prevdepth>\maxdepth \maxdepth
          \else\ifdim\prevdepth>-1000pt\prevdepth
            \else\ifinner 0pt
              \else \pagedepth
          \fi \fi \fi
  \vskip -\skip@
  \ifdim\skip@<\pfbreakskip
    \advance\skip@ -1\skip@ \advance\skip@ 1\pfbreakskip
  \fi
  \penalty\pen@ltyabovepfbreak
  \vskip\skip@
  \penalty\pen@ltybelowpfbreak
  }
  \@afterindentfalse
  \@afterheading
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@spfbreakgap}
% Starred version of |\pfbreak|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@spfbreakgap}{%
  \par {%
  \skip@\lastskip
  \nobreak
  \vskip -\ifdim\prevdepth>\maxdepth \maxdepth
          \else\ifdim\prevdepth>-1000pt\prevdepth
            \else\ifinner 0pt
              \else \pagedepth
          \fi \fi \fi
  \vskip -\skip@
  \ifdim\skip@<\pfbreakskip
    \advance\skip@ -1\skip@ \advance\skip@ 1\pfbreakskip
  \fi
  \penalty\pen@ltyabovepfbreak
  \vskip\skip@
  \penalty\pen@ltybelowpfbreak
  }
  \@afterindenttrue
  \@afterheading
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%    While on the subject of breaks\ldots
%
% \begin{macro}{\noprelistbreak}
% Putting this immediately before a list (e.g., |itemize|) should
% prevent a page break at that point.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Added \cs{noprelistbreak}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\noprelistbreak}{\@nobreaktrue\nopagebreak}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Appendices}
%
% \begin{macro}{\appendix}
% In the standard \Lpack{book} class the |\appendix| command does the 
% following:
%    \begin{itemize}
%    \item Resets the chapter and section counters to zero
%    \item Sets |\@chapapp| to |\appendixname|.
%    \item Redefines |\thechapter| to produce alphabetic appendix numbers.
%    \end{itemize}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\appendix{\par
  \setcounter{chapter}{0}%
  \setcounter{section}{0}%
  \gdef\@chapapp{\appendixname}%
  \gdef\thechapter{\@Alph\c@chapter}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}  
%
%
% This class provides additional appendixing capabilities.
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\appendixpage}
% \begin{macro}{\appendixpage*}
% The command to typeset a page announcing the start of the appendices.
% It is based on the |\part| definition. The normal version
% makes an entry in the ToC but the starred version does not.
% \changes{v0.33}{2001/08/31}{Changed implementation of \cs{appendixpage}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\appendixpage}{%
  \@ifstar{\@sapppage}{\@apppage}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@apppage}
% |\@apppage| typesets an appendix page and makes an entry in the ToC.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@apppage{%
  \@setuppart
  \addappheadtotoc
  \markboth{}{}%
  {\centering
   \interlinepenalty \@M
   \normalfont
   \printparttitle{\appendixpagename}\par}%
  \@endpart}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@sapppage}
% |\@sapppage| typesets an appendix page and does not make an entry in the ToC.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@sapppage{%
  \@setuppart
  \markboth{}{}%
  {\centering
   \interlinepenalty \@M
   \normalfont
   \printparttitle{\appendixpagename}\par}%
  \@endpart}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\addappheadtotoc}
% This command adds an `appendices' line to the ToC. The style is the same
% as used in \Lpack{tocbibind} for the `List of figures' line. That is,
% as a Chapter heading.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\addappheadtotoc{\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\appendixtocname}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@ppsavesec}
% \begin{macro}{\@pprestoresec}
% \begin{macro}{\@ppsaveapp}
% \begin{macro}{\restoreapp}
%  For the |appendices| environment we need to save and restore the
% main document division number and the appendix number. The |\restoreapp|
% command is the one for the user.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{@ppsavesec}
\newcounter{@ppsaveapp}
\setcounter{@ppsaveapp}{0}
\newcommand{\@ppsavesec}{%
  \setcounter{@ppsavesec}{\value{chapter}}}
\newcommand{\@pprestoresec}{%
  \setcounter{chapter}{\value{@ppsavesec}}}
\newcommand{\@ppsaveapp}{%
  \setcounter{@ppsaveapp}{\value{chapter}}}
\newcommand{\restoreapp}{%
  \setcounter{chapter}{\value{@ppsaveapp}}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@resets@pp}
% Resets the appropriate sectioning counters and names. This does almost
% exactly
% what the default |\appendix| command does, except that it saves and 
% restores sectional numbering. It saves the sectional number at the start
% and restores the appendix number at the end.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@resets@pp}{
  \par
  \@ppsavesec
  \setcounter{section}{0}
  \setcounter{chapter}{0}
  \renewcommand\@chapapp{\appendixname}
  \renewcommand\thechapter{\@Alph\c@chapter}
  \restoreapp
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{environment}{appendices}
%  This is the heart of the package. Start it off by doing the resetting
% done by the |\appendix| command but also save the main counters. At the
% end of the environment save the appendix number and restore the main counters.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{appendices}{\@resets@pp}%
                           {\@ppsaveapp\@pprestoresec}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setthesection}
% The user commands for specifying the numbering style for subappendices.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setthesection}{\thechapter.\Alph{section}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@resets@ppsub}
% Similar to |\@resets@pp| except that it is for use within the 
% |subappendices| envirionment; as such, it is a bit simpler.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@resets@ppsub}{
  \par
  \setcounter{section}{0}
  \renewcommand{\thesection}{\setthesection}
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifnamesubappendix}
% Switch for adding an `appendix' name before subappendix numbers.
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/11/13}{Added \cs{ifnamesubappendix}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifnamesubappendix
  \namesubappendixfalse

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{environment}{subappendices}
%  The environment for subappendices. Start it off by doing the resetting
% of the |\section| command. 
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/11/13}{Modified subappendices environment}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{subappendices}{%
  \@resets@ppsub
%    \end{macrocode}
% Change the definition of |\addappheadtotoc| to give a |section| entry.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \def\addappheadtotoc{\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixtocname}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% To implement the naming we do cunning things with the
% |\@seccntformat| command.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifnamesubappendix
    \def\sectionname{\appendixname}
    \def\@seccntformat##1{\@ifundefined{##1name}{}{\csname ##1name\endcsname\ }%
        \csname the##1\endcsname\quad}
  \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% That's it.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  }{}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@formatsecmark@pp}
% Formats the page header for a redefined |\sectionmark|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@formatsecmark@pp}[1]{%
  \MakeUppercase{\appendixname\space
    \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\z@
      \thesection\quad
    \fi
    #1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
%
%
% \subsection{Lists}
%
% \subsubsection{General List Parameters}
%
% The following commands are used to set the default values for the list
% environment's parameters. See the \LaTeX{} manual for an explanation
% of the meanings of the parameters.  Defaults for the list
% environment are set as follows.  First, |\rightmargin|,
% |\listparindent| and |\itemindent| are set to 0pt.  Then, for a Kth
% level list, the command |\@listK| is called, where `K' denotes `i',
% '`i', ... , `vi'.  (I.e., |\@listiii| is called for a third-level
% list.)  By convention, |\@listK| should set |\leftmargin| to
% |\leftmarginK|.
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\leftmargin}
% \begin{macro}{\leftmargini}
% \begin{macro}{\leftmarginii}
% \begin{macro}{\leftmarginiii}
% \begin{macro}{\leftmarginiv}
% \begin{macro}{\leftmarginv}
% \begin{macro}{\leftmarginvi}
% For efficiency, level-one list's values are defined at top level, and
% |\@listi| is defined to set only |\leftmargin|.
%
% In two column mode the margins should be smaller than in one column typesetting.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\if@twocolumn
  \setlength{\leftmargini}{2em}
\else
  \setlength{\leftmargini}{2.5em}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%    The value of |\leftmargin| has to be set at this outer level.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\leftmargin \leftmargini
%    \end{macrocode}
%    Lower level list margins are calculated so that they are indented
% more than the label in an outer list.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\setlength{\leftmarginii}{2.2em}
\setlength{\leftmarginiii}{1.87em}
\setlength{\leftmarginiv}{1.7em}
\if@twocolumn
  \setlength{\leftmarginv}{.5em}
  \setlength{\leftmarginvi}{.5em}
\else
  \setlength{\leftmarginv}{1em}
  \setlength{\leftmarginvi}{1em}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\itemindent}
%    Here we set the |\itemindent| which is the extra indentation before
%    a label.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\setlength{\itemindent}{\z@}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\labelsep}
% \begin{macro}{\labelwidth}
%    |\labelsep| is the distance between the label and the text of an
%    item; |\labelwidth| is the width of the label.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\setlength{\labelsep}{0.5em}
\setlength{\labelwidth}{\leftmargini}
  \addtolength{\labelwidth}{-\labelsep}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@beginparpenalty}
% \begin{macro}{\@endparpenalty}
%    These penalties are inserted before and after a list or paragraph
%    environment. They are set to a bonus value to encourage page
%    breaking at these points.
% \begin{macro}{\@itempenalty}
%    This penalty is inserted between list items.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@beginparpenalty -\@lowpenalty
\@endparpenalty   -\@lowpenalty
\@itempenalty     -\@lowpenalty

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\parsepi}
% \begin{macro}{\topsepi}
% \begin{macro}{\itemsepi}
% \begin{macro}{\parsepii}
% \begin{macro}{\topsepii}
% \begin{macro}{\topsepiii}
% Lists may be nested and the exact layout depends on the level
% of nesting. These lengths are used to control the nesting-level
% aspects.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\parsepi}
\newlength{\topsepi}
\newlength{\itemsepi}
\newlength{\parsepii}
\newlength{\topsepii}
\newlength{\topsepiii}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\defaultlists}
% The standard LaTeX classes have list parameters that give some separation
% between lists and |\item|s in a list. This macro sets these values,
% which also depend on the font size.
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Introduced \cs{defaultlist} and \cs{tightlist}}
% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Changed \cs{defaultlist} and \cs{tightlist} to
%                \cs{defaultlists} and \cs{tightlists} respectively,
%  and their supports}
%    \begin{macrocode} 
\newcommand{\defaultlists}{%   %% initialise for 10pt
  \setlength\partopsep{2\p@ \@plus 1\p@ \@minus 1\p@}
  \parsepi=   4\p@   \@plus2\p@   \@minus\p@
  \topsepi=   8\p@   \@plus2\p@   \@minus4\p@
  \itemsepi=  4\p@   \@plus2\p@   \@minus\p@
  \parsepii=  2\p@   \@plus\p@    \@minus\p@
  \topsepii=  4\p@   \@plus2\p@   \@minus\p@
  \topsepiii= 2\p@   \@plus\p@    \@minus\p@
\ifcase\@ptsize  % 0 = 10pt
\or              % 1 = 11pt
  \setlength\partopsep{3\p@ \@plus 1\p@ \@minus 1\p@}
  \parsepi=   4.5\p@ \@plus2\p@   \@minus\p@
  \topsepi=   9\p@   \@plus3\p@   \@minus5\p@
  \itemsepi=  4.5\p@ \@plus2\p@   \@minus\p@
  \parsepii=  2\p@   \@plus\p@    \@minus\p@
  \topsepii=  4.5\p@ \@plus2\p@   \@minus\p@
  \topsepiii= 2\p@   \@plus\p@    \@minus\p@
\or              % 2 = 12pt
  \setlength\partopsep{3\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
  \parsepi=   5\p@   \@plus2.5\p@ \@minus\p@
  \topsepi=  10\p@   \@plus4\p@   \@minus6\p@
  \itemsepi=  5\p@   \@plus2.5\p@ \@minus\p@
  \parsepii=  2.5\p@ \@plus\p@    \@minus\p@
  \topsepii=  5\p@   \@plus2.5\p@ \@minus\p@
  \topsepiii= 2.5\p@ \@plus\p@    \@minus\p@
\or              % 3 = 13pt  %% not available
\or              % 4 = 14pt
  \setlength\partopsep{4\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
  \parsepi=   6\p@   \@plus2.5\p@ \@minus\p@
  \topsepi=  12\p@   \@plus4\p@   \@minus6\p@
  \itemsepi=  6\p@   \@plus2.5\p@ \@minus\p@
  \parsepii=  3\p@   \@plus\p@    \@minus\p@
  \topsepii=  6\p@   \@plus2.5\p@ \@minus\p@
  \topsepiii= 3\p@   \@plus\p@    \@minus\p@
\or              % 5 = 15pt  %% not available
\or              % 6 = 16pt  %% not available
\or              % 7 = 17pt
  \setlength\partopsep{5\p@ \@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
  \parsepi=   7\p@   \@plus3\p@   \@minus\p@
  \topsepi=  14\p@   \@plus6\p@   \@minus8\p@
  \itemsepi=  7\p@   \@plus3\p@   \@minus\p@
  \parsepii=  3\p@   \@plus\p@    \@minus\p@
  \topsepii=  7\p@   \@plus3\p@   \@minus\p@
  \topsepiii= 3.5\p@ \@plus\p@    \@minus\p@
\or              % 8 = 18pt  %% not available
\or              % 9 = 9pt
  \setlength\partopsep{2\p@ \@plus 1\p@ \@minus 1\p@}
  \parsepi=   3.5\p@ \@plus2\p@   \@minus\p@
  \topsepi=   7\p@   \@plus3\p@   \@minus5\p@
  \itemsepi=  3.5\p@ \@plus2\p@   \@minus\p@
  \parsepii=  2\p@   \@plus\p@    \@minus\p@
  \topsepii=  4\p@   \@plus2\p@   \@minus\p@
  \topsepiii= 2\p@   \@plus\p@    \@minus\p@
\fi
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\tightlists}
% This macro sets the parameters for lists that have less open vertical
% space in them. I think that these look neater than the defaults.
% Effectively, no additional vertical space is added. If there is a
% blank line before a list, then an extra 1/2 blank line is added before
% \emph{and} after the list (making one blank line in total).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\tightlists}{%
  \setlength\partopsep{0.5\onelineskip \@plus 0\p@ \@minus 0\p@}
  \parsepi=       \parskip
  \itemsepi =     \p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
  \topsepi =   0.5\parskip
  \parsepii =     \parskip
  \topsepii =  0.5\parskip
  \topsepiii = 0.5\parskip
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@listI}
% \begin{macro}{\@listi}
% |\@listI| defines top level and |\@listi| values of
% |\leftmargin|, |\parsep|, |\topsep|, and |\itemsep|
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
  \parsep\parsepi
  \topsep\topsepi
  \itemsep\itemsepi}
\let\@listI\@listi
%    \end{macrocode}
%    We should initialise these parameters to the standard defaults
%    \begin{macrocode}
\defaultlists
\@listi

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@listii}
% \begin{macro}{\@listiii}
% \begin{macro}{\@listiv}
% \begin{macro}{\@listv}
% \begin{macro}{\@listvi}
%    Here are the same macros for the lower level lists.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@listii{\leftmargin\leftmarginii
             \labelwidth\leftmarginii
             \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
             \topsep\topsepii
             \parsep\parsepii
             \itemsep\parsep}

\def\@listiii{\leftmargin\leftmarginiii
              \labelwidth\leftmarginiii
              \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
              \topsep\topsepiii
              \parsep\z@
              \partopsep \p@ \@plus\z@ \@minus\p@
              \itemsep\topsep}

\def\@listiv{\leftmargin\leftmarginiv
             \labelwidth\leftmarginiv
             \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep}

\def\@listv{\leftmargin\leftmarginv
            \labelwidth\leftmarginv
            \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep}

\def\@listvi{\leftmargin\leftmarginvi
             \labelwidth\leftmarginvi
             \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\firmlist}
% \begin{macro}{\tightlist}
% These two macros can be used at the start of a list environment to
% reduce the vertical gaps. |\tightlist| removes all interior spaces
% while |\firmlist| only removes some.
% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Added \cs{firmlist} and reimplemented the
% original \cs{tightlist}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\firmlist}{%
  \setlength{\itemsep}{0.5\itemsep}\setlength{\parskip}{0.5\parskip}}
\newcommand{\tightlist}{%
  \setlength{\itemsep}{0pt}\setlength{\parskip}{0pt}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{Enumerate}
%
%
%    The enumerate environment uses four counters: \Lcount{enumi},
%    \Lcount{enumii}, \Lcount{enumiii} and \Lcount{enumiv}, where
%    \Lcount{enumN} controls the numbering of the Nth level
%    enumeration.
%
% \begin{macro}{\theenumi}
% \begin{macro}{\theenumii}
% \begin{macro}{\theenumiii}
% \begin{macro}{\theenumiv}
%    The counters are already defined in \file{latex.dtx}, but their
%    representation is changed here.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\theenumi}{\@arabic\c@enumi}
\renewcommand{\theenumii}{\@alph\c@enumii}
\renewcommand{\theenumiii}{\@roman\c@enumiii}
\renewcommand{\theenumiv}{\@Alph\c@enumiv}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\labelenumi}
% \begin{macro}{\labelenumii}
% \begin{macro}{\labelenumiii}
% \begin{macro}{\labelenumiv}
%    The label for each item is generated by the commands\\
%    |\labelenumi| \ldots\ |\labelenumiv|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\labelenumi}{\theenumi.}
\newcommand{\labelenumii}{\theenumii)}
\newcommand{\labelenumiii}{\theenumiii.}
\newcommand{\labelenumiv}{\theenumiv.}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\p@enumii}
% \begin{macro}{\p@enumiii}
% \begin{macro}{\p@enumiv}
%    The expansion of |\p@enumN||\theenumN| defines the output of a
%    |\ref| command when referencing an item of the Nth level of an
%    enumerated list.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\p@enumii}{\theenumi}
\renewcommand{\p@enumiii}{\theenumi(\theenumii)}
\renewcommand{\p@enumiv}{\p@enumiii\theenumiii}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%    The following is taken directly from David Carlisle's 
% \Lpack{enumerate} package.
%
% START OF DAVID CARLISLE'S CODE AND COMMENTARY
%
% This package gives the enumerate environment an optional argument
% which determines the style in which the counter is printed.
%
% An occurence of one of the tokens |A a I i| or |1| produces the value
% of the counter printed with (respectively) |\Alph \alph \Roman \roman|
% or |\arabic|.
%
% These letters may be surrounded by any strings involving any other
% \TeX\ expressions, however the tokens |A a I i 1| must be inside a
% |{ }| group if they are not to be taken as special.
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@enlab}
% Internal token register used to build up the label command from the
% optional argument.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newtoks\@enLab
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@enQmark}
% This just expands to a `?'. |\ref| will produce this, if no counter
% is printed.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@enQmark{?}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% The next four macros build up the command that will print the item
% label. They each gobble one token or group from the optional argument,
% and add corresponding tokens to the register |\@enLab|. They each end
% with a call to |\@enloop|, which starts the processing of the next
% token.
% \begin{macro}{\@enLabel}
% Add the counter to the label. |#2| will be one of the `special'
% tokens |A a I i 1|, and is thrown away. |#1| will be a command
% like |\Roman|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@enLabel#1#2{%
  \edef\@enThe{\noexpand#1{\@enumctr}}%
  \@enLab\expandafter{\the\@enLab\csname the\@enumctr\endcsname}%
  \@enloop}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@enSpace}
% \begin{macro}{\@enSp@ce}
% Add a space to the label. The tricky bit is to gobble the space token,
% as you can not do this with a macro argument.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@enSpace{\afterassignment\@enSp@ce\let\@memtempa= }
\def\@enSp@ce{\@enLab\expandafter{\the\@enLab\space}\@enloop}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@enGroup}
% Add a |{ }| group to the label.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@enGroup#1{\@enLab\expandafter{\the\@enLab{#1}}\@enloop}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@enOther}
% Add anything else to the label
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@enOther#1{\@enLab\expandafter{\the\@enLab#1}\@enloop}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@enloop}
% \begin{macro}{\@enloop@}
% The body of the main loop.
% Eating tokens this way instead of using |\@tfor| lets you see
% spaces and {\bf all} braces. |\@tfor| would treat {\tt a} and
% |{a}| as  special, but not |{{a}}|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@enloop{\futurelet\@entemp\@enloop@}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@enloop@{%
  \ifx A\@entemp         \def\@memtempa{\@enLabel\Alph  }\else
  \ifx a\@entemp         \def\@memtempa{\@enLabel\alph  }\else
  \ifx i\@entemp         \def\@memtempa{\@enLabel\roman }\else
  \ifx I\@entemp         \def\@memtempa{\@enLabel\Roman }\else
  \ifx 1\@entemp         \def\@memtempa{\@enLabel\arabic}\else
  \ifx \@sptoken\@entemp \let\@memtempa\@enSpace         \else
  \ifx \bgroup\@entemp   \let\@memtempa\@enGroup         \else
  \ifx \@enum@\@entemp   \let\@memtempa\@gobble          \else
                         \let\@memtempa\@enOther
%    \end{macrocode}
%    Hook for possible extensions
%    \begin{macrocode}
                         \@enhook
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
             \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% Process the current token, then look at the next.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@memtempa}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@enhook}
% Hook for possible extensions.
% Some packages may want to extend the number of special characters
% that are associated with counter representations. This feature
% was requested to enable Russian alphabetic counting, but here
% I give an example of a footnote symbol counter, triggered by |*|.
%
% To enable a new counter type based on a letter, you just need
% to add a new |\ifx| clause by analogy with the code above.
% So for example to make |*| trigger footnote symbol counting.
% a package should do the following.
%
% Initialise the hook, in case the package is loaded before
% \textsf{enumerate}.
%\begin{verbatim}
% \providecommand\@enhook{}
%\end{verbatim}
%
% Add to the hook a new |\ifx| clause that associates |*| with the
% |\fnsymbol| counter command.
%\begin{verbatim}
% \g@addto@macro\@enhook{%
%   \ifx *\@entemp
%     \def\@memtempa{\@enLabel\fnsymbol}%
%   \fi}
%\end{verbatim}
% This code sequence should work whether it is loaded before or after
% this enumerate package. Any number of new counter types may be added
% in this way.
%
% At this point we just need initialise the hook, taking care not
% to over write any definitions another package may already have added.
% (PRW: as this is now in a class, it can be defined instead of
% |\provide|d).
%    \begin{macrocode}
%% \providecommand\@enhook{}
  \newcommand\@enhook{}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\enumerate}
% The new {\tt enumerate} environment. This is the first half of the
% original enumerate environment. If there is an optional argument, call
% |\@@enum@| to define the label commands, otherwise call
% |\@enum@| which is the second half of the original definition.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\enumerate{%
  \ifnum \@enumdepth >3 \@toodeep\else
      \advance\@enumdepth \@ne
      \edef\@enumctr{enum\romannumeral\the\@enumdepth}\fi
  \@ifnextchar[{\@@enum@}{\@enum@}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@@enum@}
% Handle the optional argument..
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@@enum@[#1]{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Initialise the loop which will break apart the optional argument.
% The command to print the label is built up in |\@enlab|.
% |\@enThe| will be used to define |\theenum|\,$n$.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@enLab{}\let\@enThe\@enQmark
%    \end{macrocode}
% The |\@enum@| below is never expanded, it is used to detect the end
% of the token list.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@enloop#1\@enum@
%    \end{macrocode}
% Issue a warning if we did not find one of the `special' tokens.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifx\@enThe\@enQmark\@warning{The counter will not be printed.%
   ^^J\space\@spaces\@spaces\@spaces The label is: \the\@enLab}\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Define |\labelenum|$\,n$ and |\theenum|$\,n$.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \expandafter\edef\csname label\@enumctr\endcsname{\the\@enLab}%
  \expandafter\let\csname the\@enumctr\endcsname\@enThe
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set the counter to 7 so that we get the width of `vii' if roman
% numbering is in force then set |\leftmargin|$\,n$. to the width of the
% label plus |\labelsep|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \csname c@\@enumctr\endcsname7
  \expandafter\settowidth
            \csname leftmargin\romannumeral\@enumdepth\endcsname
            {\the\@enLab\hspace{\labelsep}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Finally call |\@enum@| which is the second half of the original
% definition.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@enum@}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@enum@}
% All the list parameters have now been defined, so call |\list|. This
% is taken straight from the original definition of |\enumerate|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@enum@{\list{\csname label\@enumctr\endcsname}%
           {\usecounter{\@enumctr}\def\makelabel##1{\hss\llap{##1}}}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% END OF DAVID CARLISLE'S CODE AND COMMENTARY
%
%
%
% \subsubsection{Itemize}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\labelitemi}
% \begin{macro}{\labelitemii}
% \begin{macro}{\labelitemiii}
% \begin{macro}{\labelitemiii}
%    Itemization is controlled by the commands: |\labelitemi|,
%    |\labelitemii|, etc., which define
%    the labels of the various itemization levels: the symbols used are:
%    bullet (\textbullet), bold en-dash (\textbf{\textendash}),
% centered asterisk (\textasteriskcentered), and centered dot
% (\textperiodcentered).
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\labelitemi}{\textbullet}
\newcommand{\labelitemii}{\normalfont\bfseries \textendash}
\newcommand{\labelitemiii}{\textasteriskcentered}
\newcommand{\labelitemiv}{\textperiodcentered}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% It seems like a reasonable idea to give the |itemize| environment
% an optional argument to match |enumerate|. Fortunately this seems
% to be much simpler and I might even be able to work it out for myself.
%
% \begin{environment}{itemize}
% This is a hack at the kernel code for |itemize|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\itemize}[1][\@empty]{%
  \ifnum \@itemdepth >\thr@@\@toodeep\else
    \advance\@itemdepth\@ne
    \ifx \@empty #1\else % optional argument
      \@namedef{labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth}{#1}%
    \fi
    \edef\@itemitem{labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth}%
    \expandafter
    \list
      \csname\@itemitem\endcsname
       {\def\makelabel##1{\hss\llap{##1}}}%
  \fi}
\let\enditemize =\endlist

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \subsubsection{Description}
%
% The class defines two description environment, the standard one and a `block'
% one.
%
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Now two `description' environments.}
%
% \begin{environment}{description}
%    The description environment is defined here -- while the default itemize
%    and enumerate environments are defined in \file{latex.dtx}.
%
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{The \texttt{description} environment now matches
%                            the standard layout.}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{description}%
               {\list{}{\labelwidth\z@ \itemindent-\leftmargin
                        \let\makelabel\descriptionlabel}}%
               {\endlist}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\descriptionlabel}
%    To change the formatting of the label, you must redefine
%    |\descriptionlabel|. 
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\descriptionlabel}[1]{\hspace\labelsep
                                   \normalfont\bfseries #1}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{environment}{blockdescription}
%    The `block' description environment.
%
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Renamed original \texttt{description} environment
%                            to \texttt{blockdescription}.}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{blockdescription}%
               {\list{}{\labelwidth\z@ \itemindent 0.5em \labelsep 0.5em
                        \let\makelabel\blockdescriptionlabel}}%
               {\endlist}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\blockdescriptionlabel}
%    To change the formatting of the label, you must redefine
%    |\blockdescriptionlabel|. 
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\blockdescriptionlabel}[1]{%%% \hspace\labelsep
                                   \normalfont\bfseries #1}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Verse}
%
% The class provides a more flexible |verse| environment than the 
% standard classes. This is based on the \Lpack{verse} 
% package~\cite{VERSE}.
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/10/30}{Complete rewrite of verse typesetting}
%
% \subsubsection{Verse code}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{vslineno}
% We need counters for stanza and poem lines.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Added poemline and modulo@vs counters}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{vslineno}
\newcounter{poemline}
\newcounter{modulo@vs}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\poemlines}
% |\poemlines{|\meta{nth}|}| specifies that every \meta{nth} line of
% a poem is to be numbered. 
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Added \cs{poemlines}}
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{\cs{poemlines} now just calls \cs{linenumberfrequency}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\poemlines}[1]{\linenumberfrequency{#1}%
  \ClassWarning{memoir}{Use \string\linenumberfrequency\space
                        instead of \string\poemlines}%
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/24}{Added \cs{getmodulo@vs}}
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Using \cs{getthelinenumber} instead of \cs{getmodulo@vs}}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifaltindent}
% This should be set TRUE for indenting alternate lines.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifaltindent
  \altindentfalse
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifpattern}
% This should be set TRUE for indenting lines according to a pattern.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifpattern
  \patternfalse
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifstarpattern}
% This should be set TRUE for indenting lines according in a |patverse*|
% environment.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/8}{Added \cs{ifstarpattern}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifstarpattern
  \starpatternfalse

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\vleftskip}
% \begin{macro}{\vrightskip}
% Skips to the left and right of a line of verse.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/24}{Added \cs{vleftskip} and \cs{vrightskip}}
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Changed defaults for \cs{vleftskip} and \cs{vrightskip}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\vleftskip}
  \setlength{\vleftskip}{3em}
\newlength{\vrightskip}
  \setlength{\vrightskip}{1em}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\stanzaskip}
% Skip between stanzas.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/07}{Added \cs{stanzaskip}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\stanzaskip}
  \setlength{\stanzaskip}{\onelineskip}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\flagverse}
% |\flagverse{|\meta{flag}|}| inserts \meta{flag} at the left (of a line).
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/24}{Added \cs{flagverse}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\flagverse}[1]{\hskip-\vleftskip\llap{#1}\hskip\vleftskip\ignorespaces}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\versewidth}
% The length |\versewidth| is a convenience length for the user.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\versewidth}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\vgap}
% \begin{macro}{\vin}
% \begin{macro}{\vindent}
% The length |\vgap| is used as the basis for spacing. |\vin| makes
% a horizontal space of |\vgap| and |\vindent| is the indentation
% of wrapped lines.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\vgap} \setlength{\vgap}{1.5em}
\newcommand{\vin}{\hspace*{\vgap}}
\newlength{\vindent} \setlength{\vindent}{2\vgap}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\verselinebreak}
% Break a verse line by inserting |\newline|. 
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/28}{Modified \cs{verselinebreak}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\verselinebreak}[1][\z@]{\newline\hspace*{#1}% extra verseindent
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\incr@vsline}
% Increment the line counters.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/24}{Added poemline counter to \cs{incr@vsline}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\incr@vsline}{%
  \refstepcounter{poemline}%
  \stepcounter{vslineno}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@vsifbang}
% Like the kernel |\@ifstar| except it looks for an exclamation mark!
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/24}{Added \cs{@vsifbang}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@vsifbang}[1]{\@ifnextchar !{\@firstoftwo{#1}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@vsifgt}
% Like the kernel |\@ifstar| except it looks for a |>| character.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/28}{Added \cs{@vsifgt}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@vsifgt}[1]{\@ifnextchar >{\@firstoftwo{#1}}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@vscentercr}
% This puts the poem line number in the margin, increments
% the line numbers, and then deals with the options. It is based
% on the kernel |\@centercr|.
% This has to handle various forms of the |\\| command: |\\|,
% |\\*|, |\\!|, and |\\>|, together with an optional length argument.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/28}{Major rewrite of \cs{@vscentercr} and friends}
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Changed \cs{@vscentercr} to use general
%                linenumbering}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@vscentercr}{%
  \ifhmode \unskip\else \@nolnerr\fi
  \hfill\rlap{\kern\vrightskip\kern\rightmargin%
              \vlvnumfont\getthelinenumber{poemline}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% For |>| call |\verselinebreak| to process it.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@vsifgt{\verselinebreak}{%
  \incr@vsline
%    \end{macrocode}
% If the call is |\\*...| call |\@vsxcentercr| to handle the |*...|.
% If the call is |\\!|, do nothing.
% If the call is |\\![...]|, call |\@vsicentercr| to handle the |[...]|.
% Otherwise, call |\@vsxcentercr|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \par\@ifstar{\nobreak\@vsxcentercr}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@vsifbang{\@ifnextchar[ {\@vsicentercr}{}}{\@vsxcentercr}}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@vsxcentercr}
% Processes |\\*|, and either calls |\@vsicentercr| to handle a |[length]|,
% or |\start@vsline|.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/24}{Added \cs{@vsxcentercr}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@vsxcentercr}{\addvspace{-\parskip}%
  \@ifnextchar[ {\@vsicentercr}{\start@vsline}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@vsicentercr}
% Processes |(\\...)[length]| and then calls |\start@vsline|.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/24}{Added \cs{@vsicentercr}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@vsicentercr[#1]{\vskip #1\ignorespaces \start@vsline}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\start@vsline}
% This is called at the start of every verse line except the first.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/28}{Added \cs{ifstarpattern} to \cs{start@vsline}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\start@vsline}{%
  \ifaltindent\ifodd\thevslineno\else\vin\fi\fi%
  \ifpattern\get@vsindent\fi%
  \ifstarpattern\getstar@vsindent\fi}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\theHpoemline}
% For the \Lpack{hyperref} package need a wat of distinguishing
% lines of a poem. See ther thread \textit{PDFTEX/Hyperef hates memoir verse
% environment?} on CTT October 2002.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added verse counter and \cs{theHpoemline}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{verse}
\setcounter{verse}{0}
\newcommand{\theHpoemline}{\theverse.\thepoemline}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% 
% \begin{environment}{verse}
% The extended |verse| environment. It sets the verse line counter,
% then defines the particular list environment adjusting the margins
% to center according to the length parameter. If the length parameter
% is at least the |\linewidth| then the `centering' defaults to
% the original |verse| layout.
% \changes{v1.1}{2001/08/03}{Initialise the line counter to 1, not 0, in
%                all cases}
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/28}{Changes to verse environment for line numbering}
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Changes to verse environment for hyperref}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{verse}[1][\linewidth]{
  \refstepcounter{verse}%
  \setcounter{poemline}{0}\refstepcounter{poemline}%
  \setcounter{vslineno}{1}%
  \let\\=\@vscentercr
  \list{}{\itemsep \z@
          \itemindent  -\vindent%
          \listparindent\itemindent
          \parsep       \stanzaskip
          \ifdim #1 < \linewidth
            \rightmargin        \z@
            \setlength{\leftmargin}{\linewidth}%
            \addtolength{\leftmargin}{-#1}%
            \addtolength{\leftmargin}{-0.5\leftmargin}%
          \else
            \rightmargin        \leftmargin
          \fi
          \addtolength{\leftmargin}{\vindent}}
  \item[]}{\endlist}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{environment}{altverse}
% This sets |\altindenttrue| (afterwards false) and initialises the line counter.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/28}{Added \cs{starpatternfalse} to altverse}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{altverse}%
  {\starpatternfalse\patternfalse\altindenttrue\setcounter{vslineno}{1}}%
  {\altindentfalse}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
%
% \subsubsection{Pattern code}
%
%    The pattern code is based on the idea of converting a string of
% digits to an array of digits, and then being able to access the
% digit at a particular position in the array.
%
% \begin{macro}{\@nameedef}
% A shorthand for using |\protected@edef|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@nameedef}[1]{
  \expandafter\protected@edef\csname #1\endcsname}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifbounderror}
% A flag set TRUE if an attempt is made to access an array element outside
% the array limits.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifbounderror
  \bounderrorfalse
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifinteger}
%  A flag to indicate if a `number' is an integer (TRUE) or not (FALSE).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifinteger

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@chrsinstr}
% A counter for the number of characters.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{chrsinstr}  % CHARactersINSTRing

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\newarray}
% |\newarray{|\meta{arrayname}|}{|\meta{low}|}{|\meta{high}|}| defines
% an array called \meta{arrayname} (no backslash e.g. |MyArray|), 
% with low and high limts \meta{low} and \meta{high}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\newarray}[3]{%
  \@nameedef{#1-low}{#2}%
  \@nameedef{#1-high}{#3}%
  \ifnum #3<#2
    \ClassError{memoir}{Limits for array #1 are in reverse order}{\@ehc}%
  \fi
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\stringtoarray}
% |\stringtoarray{|\meta{arrayname}|}{|\meta{string}|}| puts each character
% from \meta{string} sequentially into the \meta{arrayname} array, starting
% with \meta{low} = 1. It checks for an empty \meta{string} and handles that
% specially.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\stringtoarray}[2]{%
  \def\@vsarrayname{#1}%
  \protected@edef\the@vsstring{#2}%
  \newarray{\@vsarrayname}{1}{1}%
  \@ifmtarg{#2}{%
    \c@chrsinstr \z@
    \@namedef{\@vsarrayname-1}{}
  }{%
    \c@chrsinstr \@ne
    \expandafter\@vsstringtoarray \the@vsstring\@vsend
  }
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@vsstringtoarray}
% Recursively adds characters to the array |\@vsarrayname|, incrementing
% the array's high limit.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@vsstringtoarray #1#2\@vsend{%
  \@namedef{\@vsarrayname-\the\c@chrsinstr}{#1}
  \@nameedef{\@vsarrayname-high}{\the\c@chrsinstr}
  \@ifmtarg{#2}{%
    \def\@vsinext{}%
  }{%
    \advance\c@chrsinstr \@ne
    \def\@vsinext{%
      \@vsstringtoarray #2\@vsend%
    }%
  }
  \@vsinext
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\setarrayelement}
% |\setarrayelement{|\meta{arrayname}|}{|\meta{index}|}{|\meta{value}|}| sets
% the \meta{arrayname} array's element at \meta{index} to \meta{value}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setarrayelement}[3]{%
  \checkarrayindex{#1}{#2}%
  \@nameedef{#1-#2}{#3}%
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\getarrayelement}
% |\getarrayelement{|\meta{arrayname}|}{|\meta{index}|}{|\meta{value}|}|
% defines the parameterless macro \meta{value} (e.g., |\result|) to be
% the value at \meta{index} in the \meta{arrayname} array.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\getarrayelement}[3]{%
  \checkarrayindex{#1}{#2}%
  \protected@edef#3{\@nameuse{#1-#2}}%
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\checkarrayindex}
% |\checkarrayindex{|\meta{arrayname}|}{|\meta{index}|}| checks that
% the \meta{index} of the \meta{arrayname} array is valid. |\ifbounderror|
% is set FALSE if everything is OK, otherwise it is set TRUE.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\checkarrayindex}[2]{%
  \bounderrorfalse
  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1-low\endcsname\relax%
    \ifpattern\else
      \ClassError{memoir}{No array called #1}{\@ehc}%
    \fi
    \bounderrortrue
  \fi
  \ifnum #2<\@nameuse{#1-low}\relax%
    \ifpattern\else
      \ClassError{memoir}{Index #2 outside limits for array #1}{\@ehc}%
    \fi
    \bounderrortrue
  \fi
  \ifnum #2>\@nameuse{#1-high}\relax%
    \ifpattern\else
      \ClassError{memoir}{Index #2 outside limits for array #1}{\@ehc}%
    \fi
    \bounderrortrue
  \fi
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\arraytostring}
% |\arraytostring{|\meta{arrayname}|}{|\meta{string}|}| converts the
% characters in the \meta{arrayname} array into the parameterless macro
% \meta{string} (e.g., |\MyString|).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\arraytostring}[2]{%
  \def#2{}%
  \c@chrsinstr = \@nameuse{#1-low}%
  \@vsarraytostring{#1}{#2}%
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@vsarraytostring}
% |\@vsarraytostring{|\meta{arrayname}|}{|\meta{string}|}| recursively
% adds the (character) elements from \meta{arrayname} to \meta{string}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@vsarraytostring}[2]{%
  \ifnum\c@chrsinstr>\@nameuse{#1-high}\else
    \protected@edef#2{#2\@nameuse{#1-\thechrsinstr}}%
    \advance\c@chrsinstr\@ne%
    \@vsarraytostring{#1}{#2}%
  \fi%
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\checkifinteger}
% |\checkifinteger{|\meta{num}|}| checks if \meta{num} is an integer.
% If it is, then |\ifinteger| is set TRUE, otherwise it is set FALSE.
% (Code based on Donald Arseneau's \Lpack{cite} package).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\checkifinteger}[1]{%
  \protected@edef\@vsa{#1}%
  \ifcat _\ifnum9<1\gobm{#1} _\else A\fi
    \integertrue%
  \else
    \integerfalse%
  \fi%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\gobm}
% |\gobm{|\meta{num}|}| is defined as \meta{num}. It could be defined as: \\
% |\newcommand{\gobm}[1]{\ifx-#1\expandafter\gobm\else#1\fi}| \\
% which would remove a leading minus sign (hyphen) from its argument
% (|gobm| = gobble minus sign).
% (Code from a posting to CTT by Donald Arseneau on 1997/07/21).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\gobm}[1]{#1}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\indentpattern}
% |\indentpattern{|\meta{digits}|}| stores \meta{digits} for use as
% a verse indentation pattern.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\indentpattern}[1]{%
  \stringtoarray{Array@vs}{#1}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\get@vsindent}
% |\get@vsindent| gets the indent pattern digit for the |\thevslineno|,
% then uses this to specify the line indentation as |digit*\vgap|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\get@vsindent}{%
  \getarrayelement{Array@vs}{\thevslineno}{\@vspat}%
  \ifbounderror
    \arraytostring{Array@vs}{\@vsp@t}%
    \ClassWarning{memoir}{%
      Index `\thevslineno' for pattern `\@vsp@t' is out of bounds}%
    \def\@vspat{0}%
  \else
    \checkifinteger{\@vspat}%
    \ifinteger\else
      \arraytostring{Array@vs}{\@vsp@t}%
      \ClassWarning{memoir}{%
       `\@vspat' at index `\thevslineno' in pattern `\@vsp@t' is not a digit}%
      \def\@vspat{0}%
    \fi
  \fi
  \ifcase\@vspat\else\hspace*{\@vspat\vgap}\fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\getstar@vsindent}
% |\getstar@vsindent| gets the indent pattern digit for the |patverse*|
% environment,
% then uses this to specify the line indentation as |digit*\vgap|.
% It lets the pattern repeat by resetting the |vslineno| counter.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/28}{Added \cs{getstar@vsindent}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\getstar@vsindent}{%
  \expandafter\ifx\csname Array@vs-high\endcsname\relax
    \ClassError{memoir}{A pattern has not been specified}{\@ehc}
  \else
    \ifnum\c@vslineno>\@nameuse{Array@vs-high}%
      \setcounter{vslineno}{1}%
     \fi
     \get@vsindent
  \fi}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{environment}{patverse}
% The environment for setting verse line indents according to a pattern.
% It starts by setting |\ifpattern| TRUE, any other flags to FALSE,
% and initialises the line number. It ends by setting |\ifpattern| FALSE.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/28}{Added \cs{starpatternfalse} to patverse}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{patverse}%
  {\starpatternfalse\patterntrue\altindentfalse\setcounter{vslineno}{1}}%
  {\patternfalse}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{environment}{patverse*}
% The environment for setting verse line indents according to a repeating
% pattern.
% It starts by setting |\ifstarpattern| TRUE, any other flags to FALSE,
% and initialises the line number. It ends by setting |\ifstarpattern| FALSE.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/28}{Added patverse* environment}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{patverse*}%
  {\starpatterntrue\patternfalse\altindentfalse\setcounter{vslineno}{1}}%
  {\starpatternfalse}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
%
% \subsection{Title code}
%
% \begin{macro}{\poemtitle}
% Typeset a poem title (like |\section| or other). The actual work
% is done by |\@vsptitle| (plain) or |\@vssptitle| (starred).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\poemtitle}{\par%
  \secdef\@vsptitle\@vssptitle}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\poemtoc}
% The kind of entry |\poemtitle| is to make in the ToC.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\poemtoc}{section}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@vsptitle}
% Typeset a |poemtitle|.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{phantomsection} to \cs{@vsptitle}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@vsptitle[#1]#2{%
  \phantomsection
  \addcontentsline{toc}{\poemtoc}{#1}
  \poemtitlemark{#1}%
  \@vstypeptitle{#2}
  \@afterheading}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@vssptitle}
% Typeset a |\poemtitle*|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@vssptitle#1{%
  \@vstypeptitle{#1}
  \@afterheading}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@vstypeptitle}
% This \emph{really} typesets the title.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@vstypeptitle}[1]{%
  \vspace{\beforepoemtitleskip}
  {\poemtitlefont #1\par}
  \vspace{\afterpoemtitleskip}
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\poemtitlefont}
% \begin{macro}{\poemtitlemark}
% Sets the appearance to the title of a poem, and something for a header.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\poemtitlefont}{\normalfont\large\bfseries\centering}
\newcommand{\poemtitlemark}[1]{}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\beforepoemtitleskip}
% \begin{macro}{\afterpoemtitleskip}
% Lengths before and after a poem title, using the |\section| values.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\beforepoemtitleskip}
  \setlength{\beforepoemtitleskip}{3.5ex \@plus 1ex \@minus .2ex}
\newlength{\afterpoemtitleskip}
  \setlength{\afterpoemtitleskip}{2.3ex \@plus.2ex}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \subsection{Defining new environments}
%
%
% \subsubsection{Quotation}
%
% \begin{environment}{quotation}
%   The quotation environment is defined by making clever use of
%   the list environment's parameters. The lines in the environment
%   are set smaller than |\textwidth|. The first line of a paragraph
%   inside this environment is indented.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{quotation}%
               {\list{}{\listparindent 1.5em%
                        \itemindent    \listparindent
                        \rightmargin   \leftmargin
                        \parsep        \z@ \@plus\p@}%
                \item[]}%
               {\endlist}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \subsubsection{Quote}
%
%
% \begin{environment}{quote}
%   The quote environment is like the quotation environment except
%   that paragraphs are not indented.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{quote}%
               {\list{}{\rightmargin\leftmargin}%
                \item[]}%
               {\endlist}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \subsubsection{Theorem}
%
%    This document class does not define it's own theorem environments,
%    the defaults, supplied by \file{latex.dtx} are available.
%
%
%
% \subsubsection{Listing of symbols and abbreviations}
%
%    Another possible element is the listing of symbols
%    and abbreviations. 
%
% \begin{environment}{symbols}
% \begin{macro}{\symbollabel}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\symbollabel}[1]{{#1 \hfill}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{symbols}{\list{}%
    {\itemindent 0em \leftmargin 8em
     \labelsep 1em \labelwidth 5em
     \let\makelabel\symbollabel}}%
    {\endlist}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\symboldef}
%    Within a |symbols| environment the command 
%    |\symboldef{|\meta{symbol}|}{|\meta{meaning}|}|
%    is used to specify and explain each symbol or abbreviation.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\symboldef}[2]{\item[#1] #2}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \subsection{Setting parameters for existing environments}
%
% \subsubsection{Array and tabular}
%
% \begin{macro}{\arraycolsep}
%    The columns in an array environment are separated by
%    2|\arraycolsep|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\arraycolsep{5\p@}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\tabcolsep}
%    The columns in an tabular environment are separated by
%    2|\tabcolsep|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\tabcolsep{6\p@}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\arrayrulewidth}
%    The width of rules in the array and tabular environments is given
%    by\\ |\arrayrulewidth|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\arrayrulewidth{.4\p@}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\doublerulesep}
%    The space between adjacent rules in the array and tabular
%    environments is given by |\doublerulesep|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\doublerulesep{2\p@}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{Tabbing}
%
% \begin{macro}{\tabbingsep}
%    This controls the space that the |\'| command puts in. (See
%    \LaTeX{} manual for an explanation.)
%    \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\tabbingsep{\labelsep}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{Minipage}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@minipagerestore}
%    The macro |\@minipagerestore| is called upon entry to a minipage
%    environment to set up things that are to be handled differently
%    inside a minipage environment. In the current styles, it does
%    nothing.
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@mpfootins}
%    Minipages have their own footnotes; |\skip||\@mpfootins| plays
%    same r\^ole for footnotes in a minipage as |\skip||\footins| does
%    for ordinary footnotes.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\skip\@mpfootins = \skip\footins
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{Framed boxes}
%
% \begin{macro}{\fboxsep}
%    The space left by |\fbox| and |\framebox| between the box and the
%    text in it.
% \begin{macro}{\fboxrule}
%    The width of the rules in the box made by |\fbox| and |\framebox|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\fboxsep{3\p@}
\setlength\fboxrule{.4\p@}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{Equation and eqnarray}
%
%    |equation| and |eqnarray| counters are not required by ISO, and
%    the equations are to be left-justified. The default is for the
%    left-hand side of equations to be flushleft.

% \begin{macro}{\theequation}
%    The equation counter will be reset at beginning of a new chapter
%    and the equation number will be prefixed by the chapter number.
%
%    This code  must follow the |\chapter| definition, or more exactly
%    the definition of the chapter counter.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@addtoreset{equation}{chapter}
\renewcommand{\theequation}{%
  \ifnum \c@chapter>\z@ \thechapter.\fi \@arabic\c@equation}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\jot}
%    |\jot| is the extra space added between lines of an eqnarray
%    environment. The default value is used.
%    \begin{macrocode}
% \setlength\jot{3pt}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@eqnnum}
%    The macro |\@eqnnum| defines how equation numbers are to appear in
%    equations. Again the default is used.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
% \def\@eqnnum{(\theequation)}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Floating objects}
%
%    The file \file{latex.dtx} only defines a number of tools with
%    which floating objects can be defined. This is done in the
%    document class. It needs to define the following macros for each
%    floating object of type \texttt{TYPE} (e.g., \texttt{TYPE} =
%    figure).
%
%    \begin{description}
%    \item[\texttt{\bslash fps@TYPE}]
%        The default placement specifier for floats of type
%        \texttt{TYPE}.
%
%    \item[\texttt{\bslash ftype@TYPE}]
%        The type number for floats of type \texttt{TYPE}.  Each
%        \texttt{TYPE} has associated a unique positive \texttt
%        {TYPE} number, which is a power of two.  E.g., figures might
%        have type number 1, tables type number 2, programs type
%        number 4, etc.
%
%    \item[\texttt{\bslash ext@TYPE}]
%        The file extension indicating the file on which the contents
%        list for float type \texttt{TYPE} is stored.  For example,
%        |\ext@figure| = `lof'.
%
%    \item[\texttt{\bslash fnum@TYPE}]
%        A macro to generate the figure number for a caption. For
%        example, |\fnum@TYPE| == `Figure |\thefigure|'.
%
%    \item[\texttt{\bslash @makecaption}{\meta{num}}{\meta{text}}]
%        A macro to make a caption, with \meta{num} the value produced
%        by |\fnum@...| and \meta{text} the text of the caption. It
%        can assume it's in a |\parbox| of the appropriate width.
%        This will be used for \emph{all} floating objects.
%
%    \end{description}
%
%    The actual environment that implements a floating object such as
%    a figure is defined using the macros |\@float| and |\end@float|,
%    which are defined in \file{latex.dtx}.
%
%    An environment that implements a single column floating object is
%    started with |\@float{|\texttt{TYPE}|}[|\meta{placement}|]| of type
%    \texttt{TYPE} with \meta{placement} as the placement specifier.
%    The default value of \meta{PLACEMENT} is defined by |\fps@TYPE|.
%
%    The environment is ended by |\end@float|.  E.g., |\figure| ==
%    |\@float|{figure}, |\endfigure| == |\end@float|.
%
%
% \subsubsection{New floats}
%
% To define a float environment, say |fenv|, the following macros must be defined:
% \begin{itemize}
% \item |\fps@fenv| The default placement specifier (normally |tbp|). 
% \item |\ftype@fenv| The type number which is an integer and a power of 2.
% \item |\ext@fenv| The file extension for the contents list.
% \item |\c@fenv| A counter for the environment (for caption numbering).
% \item |\fnum@fenv| A macro to generate the caption `number'.
% \item |\l@fenv| A macro to produce an entry in a list of\ldots.
% \item |\flegtocfenv| A macro to write a |\namedlegend| title to a listof file.
% \item |\flegfenv| A macro to typeset the name of a |\namedlegend|.
% \item |\toclevel@fenv| Holding a bookmark level (required if the
%       \Lpack{hyperref} package will be used).
% \end{itemize}
%
% \begin{macro}{newflo@tctr}
% A counter for the type number of a new float. Normally
% figures are of type 1, tables type 2, and the next float type is then 4, and so
% on. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{newflo@tctr}
  \setcounter{newflo@tctr}{1}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\newfloat}
% |\newfloat[|\meta{within}|]{|\meta{fenv}|}{|\meta{ext}|}{|\meta{capname}|}|
% creates the commands for a new float environment, \meta{fenv} (aka |X|),
% using \meta{ext} (aka |Z|) as the
% file extension and \meta{capname} for the caption name.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\newfloat}[4][\@empty]{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\ftype@X}
%  Define the float type, set it to the float counter, and double
% the counter afterwards.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@namedef{ftype@#2}{\value{newflo@tctr}}
  \addtocounter{newflo@tctr}{\value{newflo@tctr}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@X}
% Create the counter for the caption, which must not have been previously
% defined.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@ifundefined{c@#2}{% counter is not defined
    \ifx \@empty#1\relax
      \newcounter{#2}
    \else
      \newcounter{#2}[#1]
      \expandafter\edef\csname the#2\endcsname{%
        \expandafter\noexpand\csname the#1\endcsname.\noexpand\arabic{#2}}
    \fi}{}
  \setcounter{#2}{0}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ext@X}
% \begin{macro}{Zdepth}
% Define |\ext@X| for the file extension and set the new |Zdepth| 
% depth counter to 1.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@namedef{ext@#2}{#3}  % file extension
  \@ifundefined{c@#3depth}{\newcounter{#3depth}}{}
  \setcounter{#3depth}{1}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\fps@X}
% \begin{macro}{\fnum@X}
% \begin{macro}{\flegX}
% \begin{macro}{\flegtocX}
% |\fps@X| is the default float placement specification, |\fnum@X|
% typesets the caption name and number, and |\flegX| and |\flegtocX| are for
% named legends.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@namedef{fps@#2}{tbp}                     % position
  \@namedef{fnum@#2}{#4~\@nameuse{the#2}}    % caption naming
  \@namedef{fleg#2}{#4}                      % legend naming
  \@namedef{flegtoc#2}##1{}                  % legend name in ToC

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{environment}{X}
% \begin{environment}{X*}
% Finally define the new float environment, in both normal and starred
% forms.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \newenvironment{#2}{\@float{#2}}{\end@float}
  \newenvironment{#2*}{\@dblfloat{#2}}{\end@dblfloat}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
% \end{environment}
%
% This ends the definition of |\newfloat|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
} % end \newfloat

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
% To define subcaptions for use in a new float environment, say |fenv|, the
% following macros must be defined~\cite{SUBFIGURE}:
% \begin{itemize}
% \item A new counter |subfenv| for subcaption numbering.
% \item A new counter |extdepth|, where |ext| is the file extension
%       for the contents list of |fenv|, for setting the contents depth.
% \item |\thesubfenv| for the formatting of the subcaption number.
% \item |\@thesubfenv| for typesetting the number.
% \item |\@@thesubfenv| for alternative label reference.
% \item |\p@subfenv| for prepending to the subcaption number when it is referenced.
% \item |\ext@subfenv| the file extension for the contents list.
% \item |\l@subfenv| for formatting the contents list entry.
% \item |\@makesubfloatcaption| for typesetting the subcaption.
% \item |\toclevel@subfenv| for hyperref bookmarks
% \end{itemize}
%
% \begin{macro}{\newsubfloat}
% |\newsubfloat{|\meta{fenv}|}| creates the commands for a new
% subfloat for \meta{fenv} (aka X).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\newsubfloat}[1]{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call |\newlistentry[X]{subX}{extX}{1}| to get most of the work done.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \newlistentry[#1]{sub#1}{\@nameuse{ext@#1}}{1}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ext@subX}
% \begin{macro}{\thesubX}
% \begin{macro}{\@thesubX}
% \begin{macro}{\@@thesubX}
% \begin{macro}{\p@subX}
% \begin{macro}{\toclevel@subX}
% And now for the rest of the commands for subcaptions.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Added \cs{@namedef} of \cs{@@thesubenv}
%                to \cs{newsubfloat}}
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Added \cs{@namedef} of \cs{toclevel@subenv}
%                to \cs{newsubfloat}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@namedef{ext@sub#1}{\csname ext@#1\endcsname}
  \@namedef{thesub#1}{(\alph{sub#1})}
  \@namedef{@thesub#1}{\@nameuse{thesub#1}%
            \if@tightsubcap\hskip\subfloatlabelskip\else\space\fi}
  \@namedef{@@thesub#1}{\@nameuse{thesub#1}}
  \@namedef{p@sub#1}{\csname the#1\endcsname}
  \@namedef{toclevel@sub#1}{1}
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% By permission of Steven Douglas Cochran the class provides similar 
% functionality as the \Lpack{subfigure} package~\cite{SUBFIGURE}.
% This requires some changes to be made to |\@float| and |\end@float|.
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifdonemaincaption}
% This is set TRUE after the |\(cont)caption| has been called in a float.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Changed \cs{if@contmaincaption} to
%          \cs{ifdonemaincaption}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifdonemaincaption
  \donemaincaptionfalse

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@float}
% \begin{macro}{\@dbfloat}
% The kernel |\@float| and |\@dblfloat| macros are redefined to set
% |\ifdonemaincaption| to FALSE, and also to zero the subfloat
% counter, if it is defined.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\@memoldfloat\@float
\renewcommand{\@float}[1]{\donemaincaptionfalse
  \@ifundefined{c@sub#1}{}{\csname c@sub#1\endcsname = 0\relax}
  \@memoldfloat{#1}}
\let\@memolddblfloat\@dblfloat
\renewcommand{\@dblfloat}[1]{\donemaincaptionfalse
  \@ifundefined{c@sub#1}{}{\csname c@sub#1\endcsname = 0\relax}
  \@memolddblfloat{#1}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\end@float}
% \begin{macro}{\end@dblfloat}
% The kernel |\end@float| and |\end@dblfloat| macros are redefined to 
% dump out any subcaptions that have not yet been processed.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\@memoldefloat\end@float
\renewcommand{\end@float}{%
  \@memlistsubcaptions{\@captype}\@memoldefloat}
\let\@memoldedblfloat\end@dblfloat
\renewcommand{\end@dblfloat}{%
  \@memlistsubcaptions{\@captype}\@memoldedblfloat}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Captions}
%
%    The caption styling 
% is accomplished by redefining the |\@makecaption|
% command. First, though, define and initialise the user-level commands.
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@contcw}
% \begin{macro}{\if@conthang}
% \begin{macro}{\if@contindent}
% For use when checking caption width and captioning styles styles.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@contcw
\newif\if@conthang
\newif\if@contindent

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\captiondelim}
% \begin{macro}{\@contdelim}
%  For the caption delimeter.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\captiondelim}[1]{\def\@contdelim{#1}}
\captiondelim{: }

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\captionnamefont}
% \begin{macro}{\@contnfont}
% The font for the caption name.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\captionnamefont}[1]{\def\@contnfont{#1}}
\captionnamefont{}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\captiontitlefont}
% \begin{macro}{\@conttfont}
% The font for the caption title.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\captiontitlefont}[1]{\def\@conttfont{#1}}
\captiontitlefont{}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\flushleftright}
% \begin{macro}{\centerlastline}
% These are in addition to the |\centering|, |\raggedleft| and |\raggedright|
% declarations for paragraphing. |\flushleftright| sets the skips to TeX's
% normal (block) paragraphing values,
% while |\centerlastline| sets the skips to give a centered last line in
% a block paragraph.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\flushleftright}{%
  \leftskip\z@ \rightskip\z@
  \parfillskip=\z@ plus 1fil}
\newcommand{\centerlastline}{%
  \leftskip=\z@ plus 1fil
  \rightskip=\z@ plus -1fil
  \parfillskip=\z@ plus 2fil}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\captionstyle}
% \begin{macro}{\@contcstyle}
% The paragraphing style for the caption.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\captionstyle}[1]{\def\@contcstyle{#1}}
\captionstyle{}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@contcwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\captionwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\changecaptionwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\normalcaptionwidth}
% The macros for dealing with the caption width.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\@contcwidth}
\newcommand{\captionwidth}[1]{\setlength{\@contcwidth}{#1}}
\captionwidth{\linewidth}
\newcommand{\changecaptionwidth}{\@contcwtrue}
\newcommand{\normalcaptionwidth}{\@contcwfalse}
\normalcaptionwidth

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@contindw}
% \begin{macro}{\hangcaption}
% \begin{macro}{\indentcaption}
% \begin{macro}{\normalcaption}
% The macros for hanging and indented captions.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\@contindw}
\newcommand{\hangcaption}{\@conthangtrue\@contindentfalse}
\newcommand{\indentcaption}[1]{\setlength{\@contindw}{#1}%
  \@conthangfalse\@contindenttrue}
\newcommand{\normalcaption}{\@conthangfalse\@contindentfalse}
\normalcaption

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\precaption}
% \begin{macro}{\@contpre}
% \begin{macro}{\postcaption}
% \begin{macro}{\@contpost}
% \begin{macro}{\midbicaption}
% \begin{macro}{\@contmidbi}
% The macros for the pre- and post-caption text/commands, and
% for the mid-caption command for bilingual captions.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\precaption}[1]{\def\@contpre{#1}}
\precaption{}
\newcommand{\postcaption}[1]{\def\@contpost{#1}}
\postcaption{}
\newcommand{\midbicaption}[1]{\def\@contmidbi{#1}}
\midbicaption{}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\abovecaptionskip}
% \begin{macro}{\belowcaptionskip}
% Vertical space above and below a caption. Make them sum to an
% integral number of lines.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\abovecaptionskip}
  \setlength{\abovecaptionskip}{0.5\onelineskip}
\newlength{\belowcaptionskip}
  \setlength{\belowcaptionskip}{0.5\onelineskip}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\caption}
% For subfloat support, the (kernel) |\caption| macro needs to note that it
% has been called.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\@memoldcaption\caption
\def\caption{\donemaincaptiontrue\@memoldcaption}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@makecaption}
%  This is a reimplementation of the kernel |\@makecaption| command.
% As well as including the caption typesetting commands it enables
% captions that include forced newlines (e.g., by |\\|).
%
% The first part is due to 
% Donald Arseneau\footnote{Email: \texttt{asnd@triumf.ca}} from postings
% to the CTT newsgroup and Email discussions. The |\topskip| strut is
% used whenever the caption is the first part of the float. This means,
% among other things, that if a caption comes at the
% top of a page, then the first line of the caption will be aligned with
% the normal first line of a page. The |\abovecaptionskip| is only used
% when there is something above the caption in the current float.
% \changes{v0.31}{2001/07/24}{Changed \cs{@tempa} to \cs{@memtempa} in \cs{@makecaption}}
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/02/12}{Added extra centering code in \cs{@makecaption}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{\let\@memtempa\relax
  \ifdim\prevdepth>-99\p@ \vskip\abovecaptionskip
  \else \def\@memtempa{\vbox to\topskip{}}\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\@contfnote}
% \begin{macro}{\@contfmark}
% The caption title will be typeset twice, firstly to measure its width
% and secondly to actually typeset it. To avoid problems caused by
% a footnote in the caption getting processed twice, we temporarily
% disable the expected relevant commands.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \let\@contfnote\footnote \renewcommand{\footnote}[2][]{}
  \let\@contfmark\footnotemark \renewcommand{\footnotemark}[1][]{}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% Now measure the width of the total caption, not forgetting to take account
% of the font specifications, and then restore the footnoting. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \sbox\@tempboxa{\@contnfont #1\@contdelim \@conttfont #2}
  \let\footnote\@contfnote
  \let\footnotemark\@contfmark
%    \end{macrocode}
% If the caption is less than one
% line, then the whole caption needs to be centered on the page (otherwise
% the short caption may be typeset flushleft).
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifdim\wd\@tempboxa<\linewidth \centering \fi
  \if@contcw
%    \end{macrocode}
% For typesetting at anything other than the normal width, put the caption
% into a |\parbox| of the specified width. This must be centered.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \centering
    \parbox{\@contcwidth}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Henrik Holm\footnote{Email from \texttt{henrik@tele.ntnu.no} on
% 2002/02/10.} proposed adding the next line to center short, narrow captions.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifdim\wd\@tempboxa<\@contcwidth \centering \fi
  \fi
  \if@conthang
%    \end{macrocode}
% For a hanging caption we have to measure the width of the caption name,
% then typeset the whole caption in a hanging paragraph.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Changed code for hangcaption in \cs{@makecaption}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \sbox\@tempboxa{\@contnfont #1\@contdelim}
    \@contpre%
    {\@contcstyle\hangindent=\wd\@tempboxa\noindent\box\@tempboxa\@memtempa
     \@conttfont #2\par}
  \else
    \if@contindent
%    \end{macrocode}
% An indented caption is similar, except the amount of indentation is
% kept in |\@contindw|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \@contpre%
      {\@contnfont #1\@contdelim}\@memtempa 
      {\@contcstyle\hangindent=\@contindw\hangafter=\@ne\@conttfont #2\par}
    \else
%    \end{macrocode}
% For the normal style, just typeset the caption.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \@contpre%
      {\@contnfont #1\@contdelim}\@memtempa 
      {\@contcstyle\@conttfont #2\par}
    \fi
  \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Finish off the typesetting by processing the post-text,  and if not using
% the normal width then close off the |\parbox|, and lastly put in some
% vertical space. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@contpost
  \if@contcw
    \par
    }  % end of the \parbox
  \fi
  \vskip\belowcaptionskip}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \subsubsection{Continuation captions and legends}
%
% \begin{macro}{\contcaption}
%    |\contcaption{|\meta{text}|}| is a user-level command. 
%    It is a simplified
%    version of the normal |\caption| command as it doesn't have to deal
%    with numbering or list of \dots entries.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\contcaption}{\@contcaption\@captype}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@@contcaption}
% \begin{macro}{\@contcaption}
%    |\@contcaption| is the workhorse for the |\contcaption| command. In turn,
% it uses the |\@makecaption| command (defined in the usual classes)
% to do most of its work. It
% uses the number of the previous |\caption| command in the same
% type of float and its implementation includes much of the code
% used in the LaTeX |\@caption| command.
% 
%    First specify |\@@contcaption{|\meta{type}|}{|\meta{title}|}| 
% to save some repetitive code.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\@@contcaption#1#2{%
  \par
  \begingroup
     \@parboxrestore
     \if@minipage
       \@setminipage
     \fi
     \normalsize
     \@makecaption{\csname fnum@#1\endcsname}{\ignorespaces #2}\par
  \endgroup}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% Now for |\@contcaption{|\meta{type}|}{|\meta{title}|}|. 
% It has to flush out any subcaptions at the 
% appropriate time, as well as typesetting the caption.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\@contcaption#1#2{%
  \if@contbotsub
    \@memlistsubcaptions{#1}%
    \@@contcaption{#1}{#2}%
  \else
    \@@contcaption{#1}{#2}%
    \@memlistsubcaptions{#1}%
  \fi}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}    
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\legend}
%    The command is called as |\legend{|\meta{text}|}|. It is intended
% to be used in a float environment for an `anonymous' caption, but can be
% used anywhere.
%
%    The implementation is similar to the |\caption| command but we have
% to eliminate printing of a delimeter.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\legend}[1]{%
  \par
  \begingroup
     \@parboxrestore
     \if@minipage
       \@setminipage
     \fi
     \normalsize
     \captiondelim{\mbox{}}
     \@makecaption{}{\ignorespaces #1}\par
  \endgroup}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\namedlegend}
% |\namedlegend[|\meta{short-title}|]{|\meta{long-title}|}| is like the
% |\caption| command except that it does not number the caption.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\namedlegend}{\@dblarg{\@legend\@captype}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@legend}
% |\@legend{|\meta{type}|}[|\meta{short-title}|]{|\meta{long-title}|}|
% is the workhorse for the |\namedlegend| command. In turn, it calls
% |\@makelegend|. It requires two commands to have been defined, namely
% |\flegtoctype| and |\flegtype|. The command |\flegtoctype{|\meta{text}|}|
% is responsible for writing a title text to the appropriate listof file.
% |\flegtype| is responsible for typeseting the name of the legend.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\@legend#1[#2]#3{%
  \par
  \csname flegtoc#1\endcsname{#2}%
  \begingroup
    \@parboxrestore
    \if@minipage
      \@setminipage
    \fi
    \normalsize
    \@makecaption{\csname fleg#1\endcsname}{\ignorespaces #3}\par
  \endgroup}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsubsection{Non-float captions}
%
% \begin{macro}{\newfixedcaption}
% \begin{macro}{\renewfixedcaption}
% \begin{macro}{\providefixedcaption}
% These commands are defined in terms of their |\...command| counterparts.\\
% Call as |\...fixedcaption[|\meta{capcommand}|]{|\meta{command}|}{|\meta{env}|}|
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\newfixedcaption}[3][\caption]{%
  \newcommand{#2}{\def\@captype{#3}#1}}
\newcommand{\renewfixedcaption}[3][\caption]{%
  \renewcommand{#2}{\def\@captype{#3}#1}}
\newcommand{\providefixedcaption}[3][\caption]{%
  \providecommand{#2}{\def\@captype{#3}#1}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{Bilingual captions}
%
%    The bilingual caption commands all use internal grouping so
% that any changes are kept local. This has the unfortunate side-effect
% that any |\label| command must be within the grouping otherwise the
% wrong number is picked up. To make the coding, if not necessarily the 
% use, of the commands simpler, I have not used the traditional style
% of square brackets for optional caption text arguments. Instead, empty
% `required' arguments are used as the implementation means. 
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\bitwonumcaption}
%  The 6 arguments are: optional label, short and long in language 1, 
% name in
% language 2, and short and long in language 2. Both texts are put
% into the List of as numbered entries.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\bitwonumcaption}[6][\@empty]{%
  \begingroup
%    \end{macrocode}
% Check if the first language argument is vacuous, then call
% the normal |\caption| for language 1.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@ifmtarg{#2}{\caption{#3}}{\caption[#2]{#3}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Do the optional labeling.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifx \@empty #1\else
    \label{#1}
  \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Remove any extra spacing between the captions, and set the
% NAME for the second caption. Use a command to transfer
% the NAME to the renewell code to avoid circularity if
% for example, we are trying to redefine |\tablename| as
% |\tablename|. Decrement the caption counter.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \setlength{\abovecaptionskip}{0pt}
  \setlength{\belowcaptionskip}{0pt}
  \edef\@memtempc{#4}
  \expandafter \renewcommand \csname \@captype name\endcsname{\@memtempc}
  \addtocounter{\@captype}{-1}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Now repeat for the second language caption.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@contmidbi
  \@ifmtarg{#5}{\caption{#6}}{\caption[#5]{#6}}
  \endgroup
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bionenumcaption}
%  The 6 arguments are: optional labelling,
%  short and long in language 1, name in
% language 2, and short and long in language 2. Both texts are put
% into the List of, but only the first is numbered.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\bionenumcaption}[6][\@empty]{%
  \begingroup
%    \end{macrocode}
% Check if the first language argument is vacuous, then call
% the normal |\caption| for language 1.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@ifmtarg{#2}{\caption{#3}}{\caption[#2]{#3}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Do the optional labeling.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifx \@empty #1\else
    \label{#1}
  \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Do the between captions code.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \setlength{\abovecaptionskip}{0pt}
  \setlength{\belowcaptionskip}{0pt}
  \edef\@memtempc{#4}
  \expandafter \renewcommand \csname \@captype name\endcsname{\@memtempc}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Use a continuation caption for the second language, not forgetting
% to add the appropriate unnumbered text to the List.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@contmidbi
  \contcaption{#6}
  \@ifmtarg{#5}{%
    \addcontentsline{\csname ext@\@captype\endcsname}{\@captype}%
      {\protect\numberline{}{\ignorespaces #6}}}{%
    \addcontentsline{\csname ext@\@captype\endcsname}{\@captype}%
      {\protect\numberline{}{\ignorespaces #5}}}
  \endgroup
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bicaption}
%  The 5 arguments are: optional labelling, 
% short and long in language 1, name in
% language 2, and long in language 2. 
% Only the first text is put into the List.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\bicaption}[5][\@empty]{%
  \begingroup
%    \end{macrocode}
% Check if the first language argument is vacuous, then call
% the normal |\caption| for language 1.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@ifmtarg{#2}{\caption{#3}}{\caption[#2]{#3}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Do the optional labeling.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifx \@empty #1\else
    \label{#1}
  \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Do the between captions code and 
% finally just use |\contcaption| for the
% second language.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \setlength{\abovecaptionskip}{0pt}
  \setlength{\belowcaptionskip}{0pt}
  \edef\@memtempc{#4}
  \expandafter \renewcommand \csname \@captype name\endcsname{\@memtempc}
  \@contmidbi
  \contcaption{#5}
  \endgroup
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bicontcaption}
%  The 3 arguments are long in language 1, name in
% language 2, and long in language 2.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\bicontcaption}[3]{%
  \begingroup
%    \end{macrocode}
% Call |\contcaption| for language 1.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \contcaption{#1}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Do the between captions code and use |\contcaption| for the second
% language.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \setlength{\abovecaptionskip}{0pt}
  \setlength{\belowcaptionskip}{0pt}
  \edef\@memtempc{#2}
  \expandafter \renewcommand \csname \@captype name\endcsname{\@memtempc}
  \@contmidbi
  \contcaption{#3}
  \endgroup
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \subsubsection{Support for the \Lopt{subfigure} package functionality}
%
% Much of the code in this section is based on the \Lpack{subfigure}
% package code, by kind permission of its author, Steven Douglas Cochran.
% To try and avoid clashes with the real \Lpack{subfigure} code I have
% used different macro names, especially when I have copied the code.
%
% \begin{macro}{\subcaptionstyle}
% \begin{macro}{\@contsubcstyle}
% The paragraphing style for subcaptions.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\subcaptionstyle}[1]{\def\@contsubcstyle{#1}}
\subcaptionstyle{}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@shortsubcap}
% \begin{macro}{\if@hangsubcap}
% \begin{macro}{\shortsubcaption}
% \begin{macro}{\hangsubcaption}
% \begin{macro}{\normalsubcaption}
%  For dealing with short and hanging subcaptions. 
% Analagous to the \Lpack{subfigure} |nooneline| and |hang| options.
% The default is normal subcaptions.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@shortsubcap
\newif\if@hangsubcap
\newcommand*{\shortsubcaption}{\@shortsubcaptrue}
\newcommand*{\hangsubcaption}{\@hangsubcaptrue}
\newcommand*{\normalsubcaption}{\@shortsubcapfalse\@hangsubcapfalse}
\normalsubcaption

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\subfloattopskip}
% \begin{macro}{\subfloatcapskip}
% \begin{macro}{\subfloatcaptopadj}
% \begin{macro}{\subfloatbottomskip}
% \begin{macro}{\subfloatlabelskip}
% \begin{macro}{\subfloatcapmargin}
% These |\subfloat...| lengths are analagous to the \Lpack{subfigure} 
% |\subfig...| lengths.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newskip\subfloattopskip
\newskip\subfloatcapskip
\newskip\subfloatcaptopadj
\newskip\subfloatbottomskip
\newskip\subfloatlabelskip
\newdimen\subfloatcapmargin
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@tightsubcap}
% \begin{macro}{\loosesubcaptions}
% \begin{macro}{\tightsubcaptions}
% Unlike the \Lpack{subfigure} package the class provides no options for
% subcaptions. These macros provide the \Lpack{subfigure} loose/tight
% option functions. Set the default to tight.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@tightsubcap
\newcommand{\loosesubcaptions}{%
  \subfloattopskip = 10\p@
  \subfloatcapskip  = 10\p@
  \subfloatcaptopadj = \z@
  \subfloatbottomskip = 10\p@
  \subfloatlabelskip = 0.33em
  \subfloatcapmargin = 10\p@
  \@tightsubcapfalse
}

\newcommand{\tightsubcaptions}{%
  \subfloattopskip = 5\p@
  \subfloatcapskip  = \z@
  \subfloatcaptopadj = 3\p@
  \subfloatbottomskip = 5\p@
  \subfloatlabelskip = 0.33em \@plus 0.07em \@minus 0.03em
  \subfloatcapmargin = \z@
  \@tightsubcaptrue
}
\tightsubcaptions

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\subcaptionsize}
% \begin{macro}{\@subcapsize}
% \begin{macro}{\subcaptionlabelfont}
% \begin{macro}{\@subcaplabelfont}
% \begin{macro}{\subcaptionfont}
% \begin{macro}{\@subcapfont}
% These macros set the size and fonts for the subcaptions. Set the defaults
% to |\footnotesize|, and the normal roman font.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\subcaptionsize}[1]{\def\@subcapsize{#1}}
\newcommand*{\subcaptionlabelfont}[1]{\def\@subcaplabelfont{#1}}
\newcommand*{\subcaptionfont}[1]{\def\@subcapfont{#1}}
\subcaptionsize{\footnotesize}
\subcaptionlabelfont{\normalfont}
\subcaptionfont{\normalfont}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@contkeep}
% \begin{macro}{\@contset}
% \begin{macro}{\subconcluded}
% |\@contkeep| stores
% the current subfloat number in counter |@contsubnum| and 
% |\@contset| sets the subfloat number to the value of |@contsubnum|.
% |\subconcluded| sets the subfloat number to zero. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \newcounter{@contsubnum}
  \newcommand{\@contkeep}{\setcounter{@contsubnum}{\value{sub\@captype}}}
  \newcommand{\@contset}{\setcounter{sub\@captype}{\value{@contsubnum}}}
  \newcommand{\subconcluded}{\setcounter{sub\@captype}{0}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@contbotsub}
% A flag indicating whether the subcaption is to be at the bottom or
% top of the subfloat; TRUE for the subcaption at the bottom.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@contbotsub
  \@contbotsubtrue

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\subcaption}
% |\subcaption[|\meta{list-entry}|]{|\meta{caption}|}| is a generic
% subcaption. There is no \Lpack{subfigure} equivalent.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\subcaption}{%
  \bgroup
    \let\label=\memsub@label
    \ifdonemaincaption\else
      \advance\csname c@\@captype\endcsname\@ne
    \fi
    \refstepcounter{sub\@captype}\@contkeep
    \@ifnextchar [%
      {\@memsubcap{sub\@captype}}%
      {\@memsubcap{sub\@captype}[\@empty]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@memsubcap}
% This handles the optional argument to |\subcaption|. It sets |\@tempdima|
% to |\hsize| as later on |\@makesubfloatcaption| uses this.
% \changes{v1.1a}{2002/04/28}{Added \cs{@tempdima} to \cs{@memsubcap}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\@memsubcap#1[#2]#3{%
  \@tempdima=\hsize
  \vskip\subfloatcapskip
  \ifx \@empty #2
    \@memsubcaption{#1}{#3}{#3}%
  \else
    \@memsubcaption{#1}{#2}{#3}%
  \fi
  \vskip\subfloatcapskip
  \egroup}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@memsubcaption}
% |\@memsubcaption{|\meta{type}|}{|\meta{list-entry}|}{|\meta{caption}|}|
% typesets a subcaption. This is a copy of the \Lpack{subfigure} 
% |\@subcaption| macro.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@memsubcaption}[3]{%
  \ifx \relax#2\relax \else
    \bgroup
      \let\label\@gobble
      \let\protect\string
      \def\@memsubcaplabel{\@nameuse{@@the#1}}%
      \xdef\@memsubfigcaptionlist{%
        \@memsubfigcaptionlist,%
        {\protect\numberline{\@memsubcaplabel}\noexpand{\ignorespaces #2}}}%
    \egroup
  \fi
  \@makesubfloatcaption{\@nameuse{@the#1}}{#3}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\contsubcaption}
% |\contsubcaption[|\meta{caption}|]| is the continued version of
% |\subcaption|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\contsubcaption}{%
  \bgroup
    \let\label=\memsub@label
    \@contset
    \refstepcounter{sub\@captype}\@contkeep
    \@ifnextchar [%
      {\@memsubcap{sub\@captype}}%
      {\@memsubcap{sub\@captype}[\@empty]}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{environment}{subfloat}
% The \Lpack{subfigure} documentation suggests a way of defining a |subfloat|
% environment. This is a trivial implementation because the |\subcaption|
% and |\contsubcaption| commands are provided by the class, and can be used
% within a |subfloat|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{subfloat}{}{}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\subbottom}
% \begin{macro}{\@memsubbody}
%    |\subbottom[|\meta{list-entry}|][|\meta{subcaption}|]{|\meta{text}|}|
% typesets a subcaption below the \meta{text}. Most of the  work is
% performed by the |\@memsubbody| macro.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\subbottom}{%
  \@contbotsubtrue
  \@memsubbody}

\newcommand{\@memsubbody}{%
  \bgroup
  \let\label=\memsub@label
  \ifdonemaincaption\else
    \advance\csname c@\@captype\endcsname\@ne
  \fi
  \refstepcounter{sub\@captype}\@contkeep%
  \leavevmode
  \@ifnextchar [%
    {\@memsubfig}%
    {\@memsubfig[\@empty]}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\contsubbottom}
% \begin{macro}{\@memcontsubbody}
%     These are the continued versions of |\subbottom| and |\@memsubbody|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\contsubbottom}{%
  \@contbotsubtrue
  \@memcontsubbody}

\newcommand{\@memcontsubbody}{%
  \bgroup
  \let\label=\memsub@label
  \@contset
  \refstepcounter{sub\@captype}\@contkeep%
  \leavevmode
  \@ifnextchar [%
    {\@memsubfig}%
    {\@memsubfig[\@empty]}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\subtop}
% \begin{macro}{\contsubtop}
%  These are similar to |\subbottom| and |\contsubbottom| except that they
% put the subcaption on top of the \meta{text}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\subtop}{%
  \@contbotsubfalse
  \@memsubbody}

\newcommand{\contsubtop}{%
  \@contbotsubfalse
  \@memcontsubbody}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \changes{v1.1a}{2002/04/28}{Deleted \cs{@contsubfloat} as it was not used}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@memsubfig}
% This is a revised version of the \Lpack{subfigure} |\@subfigure| command
% --- just the called macro names are changed.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@memsubfig[#1]{%
  \@ifnextchar [%
    {\@memsubfloat{sub\@captype}[#1]}%
    {\@memsubfloat{sub\@captype}[\@empty #1][#1]}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@memsubfloat}
%    This is a modified version of the \Lpack{subfigure} |\@subfloat|
% command Essentially the |\csname if#1topcap\endcsname| constructs are
% replaced by |\if@contbotsub|. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@memsubfloat#1[#2][#3]#4{%
  \@tempcnta=\@ne
  \if@tightsubcap
    \if@minipage
      \@tempcnta=\z@
    \else
      \ifdim\lastskip=\z@
        \@tempcnta=\@ne
      \else
        \@tempcnta=\tw@
      \fi
    \fi
  \fi
  \if@contbotsub
    \def\subfig@top{\subfloattopskip}%
    \def\subfig@bottom{\subfloatbottomskip}%
  \else
    \def\subfig@top{\subfloatbottomskip}%
    \def\subfig@bottom{\subfloattopskip}%
  \fi
  \setbox\@tempboxa \hbox{#4}%
  \@tempdima=\wd\@tempboxa
  \vtop\bgroup
    \vbox\bgroup
    \ifcase\@tempcnta
      \@minipagefalse
    \or
      \vspace{\subfig@top}
    \or
      \ifdim \lastskip=\z@ \else
        \@tempskipb\subfig@top\@xaddvskip
      \fi
    \fi
    \if@contbotsub
      \box\@tempboxa\egroup
      \ifx \@empty#3\relax \else
        \vskip\subfloatcapskip
        \@memsubcaption{#1}{#2}{#3}%
      \fi
    \else
      \ifx \@empty#3\relax \else
        \@memsubcaption{#1}{#2}{#3}%
        \vskip\subfloatcapskip
        \vskip\subfloatcaptopadj
      \fi\egroup
      \box\@tempboxa
    \fi
    \vspace{\subfig@bottom}
  \egroup
\egroup}
  
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% The following series of macros, from \Lpack{subfigure}, control the 
% typesetting of the subcaptions.
%
% \begin{macro}{\@memsubfigcaptionlist}
% A copy of |\@subfigcaptionlist|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@memsubfigcaptionlist}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\memlistsubcaptions}
% A copy of |\listsubcaptions|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\memlistsubcaptions}{%
  \@ifstar
    {\gdef\@memsubfigcaptionlist{}}%
    {\@memlistsubcaptions{\@captype}}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% 
%
% \begin{macro}{\@memlistsubcaptions}
% A copy of |\@listsubcaptions|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\@memlistsubcaptions}[1]{%
  \@ifundefined{@captype}{}{%
    \@ifundefined{ext@sub#1}{}{%
      \@for \@tempa:=\@memsubfigcaptionlist \do {%
        \ifx \@empty\@tempa\relax \else
          \addcontentsline{\@nameuse{ext@sub#1}}{sub#1}{\@tempa}%
        \fi}}}%
  \gdef\@memsubfigcaptionlist{}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@makesubfloatcaption}
%  This is a copy of |\@makesubfigurecaption|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@makesubfloatcaption}[2]{%
  \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{%
    \@subcapsize
    {\@subcaplabelfont #1}{\@subcapfont\ignorespaces #2}}%
  \@tempdimb=-\subfloatcapmargin
  \multiply\@tempdimb\tw@
  \advance\@tempdimb\@tempdima
  \hb@xt@\@tempdima{%
    \hss
    \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\@tempdimb
      \memsubfig@caption{#1}{#2}%
    \else
      \if@shortsubcap
        \memsubfig@caption{#1}{#2}%
      \else
        \box\@tempboxa
      \fi
    \fi
    \hss}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\memsubfig@caption}
% This is a copy of |\subfig@caption|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\memsubfig@caption}[2]{%
  \if@hangsubcap
    \sbox{\@tempboxa}{\@subcapsize\@subcaplabelfont #1}%
    \addtolength{\@tempdimb}{-\wd\@tempboxa}%
    \usebox{\@tempboxa}%
    \memsubfig@captionpar{\@tempdimb}{%
      {\@subcapfont\ignorespaces #2}}%
  \else
    \memsubfig@captionpar{\@tempdimb}{{\@subcaplabelfont #1}%
      {\@subcapfont\ignorespaces #2}}%
  \fi}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% 
% \begin{macro}{\memsubfig@captionpar}
% This replaces |\subfig@captionpar|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\memsubfig@captionpar}[2]{%
  \parbox[t]{#1}{\@subcapsize\@contsubcstyle #2}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% 
% \begin{macro}{\memsub@label}
% These are copies of |\sub@label| and |\subref|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\memsub@label}{%
  \@ifnextchar (%
    {\sf@memsub@label}%
    {\sf@memsub@label(Sub\@captype\space
                     \@nameuse{p@sub\@captype}%
                     \@nameuse{thesub\@captype})}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sf@memsub@label}
% This is a copy of |\sf@sub@label|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\sf@memsub@label(#1)#2{%
  \protected@edef\mem@currentlabelname{#1}%
  \sf@@memsub@label{#2}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sf@@memsub@label}
% This is an expanded copy of |\sf@@sub@label| processed after any packages may
% have been loaded.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\AtBeginDocument{%
  \@ifpackageloaded{nameref}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% The \Lpack{nameref} package is loaded.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \newcommand*{\sf@@memsub@label}[1]{%
      \@bsphack
      \protected@write\@auxout{}{%
        \string\newlabel{#1}%
          {{\@nameuse{p@sub\@captype}\@nameuse{@@thesub\@captype}}%
          {\thepage}%
          {\mem@currentlabelname\relax}%
          {\@currentHref}{}}}%
      \protected@write\@auxout{}{%
        \string\newlabel{sub@#1}%
          {{\@nameuse{@@thesub\@captype}}%
          {\thepage}%
          {\mem@currentlabelname\relax}%
          {\@currentHref}{}}}%
  \@esphack}
  }{\@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% The \Lpack{hyperref} package is loaded, but not \Lpack{nameref}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \newcommand*{\sf@@memsub@label}[1]{%
      \@bsphack
      \protected@write\@auxout{}{%
        \string\newlabel{#1}%
          {{\@nameuse{p@sub\@captype}\@nameuse{@@thesub\@captype}}%
          {\thepage}%
          {\mem@currentlabelname\relax}%
          {\@currentHref}{}}}%
      \protected@write\@auxout{}{%
        \string\newlabel{sub@#1}%
          {{\@nameuse{@@thesub\@captype}}%
          {\thepage}%
          {\mem@currentlabelname\relax}%
          {\@currentHref}{}}}%
  \@esphack}
  }{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Neither the \Lpack{hyperref} nor the \Lpack{nameref}
% package is loaded.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \let\@memoldlabel\label
    \newcommand*{\sf@@memsub@label}[1]{%
      \@bsphack
      \@memoldlabel{#1}%
      \protected@write\@auxout{}{%
        \string\newlabel{sub@#1}%
          {{\@nameuse{@@thesub\@captype}}%
          {\thepage}}}%
  \@esphack}
  }{}%
  }
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\subcaptionref}
% This is a copy of the |\subref| macro.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\subcaptionref}{%
  \@ifstar{\ssc@ref}{\sc@ref}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% 
% \begin{macro}{\ssc@ref}
% \begin{macro}{\sc@ref}
% The implementation of the starred and unstarred forms of |\subcaptionref|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\ssc@ref}[1]{\ref{sub@#1}}
\newcommand*{\sc@ref}[1]{{\@subcaplabelfont\ref{sub@#1}}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% 
%
%
%
%    
% \subsection{Marginpars}
%
% A |\marginpar| is a kind of floating object --- you can't control
% exactly where it will go. There is one problem with the kernel
% definition of |\marginpar| in that sometimes a |\marginpar| may
% end up on the wrong side of the page. The following is an attempt
% to fix that using the odd/even page check provided as part of
% the class.
% 
% \begin{macro}{\@addmarginpar}
% The part of the code for |\marginpar| that deals with deciding which
% side of the page it should be printed on is |\@addmarginpar|, buried
% away in the |output| routine. A couple of minor changes are made
% to the kernel code. The first is at the beginning where I have added
% the |\checkoddpage| page checking code.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@addmarginpar{%
    \checkoddpage
%    \end{macrocode}
% Continue with the kernel code.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@next\@marbox\@currlist{\@cons\@freelist\@marbox
    \@cons\@freelist\@currbox}\@latexbug\@tempcnta\@ne
    \if@twocolumn
        \if@firstcolumn \@tempcnta\m@ne \fi
    \else
      \if@mparswitch
%    \end{macrocode}
% The next line, reading \\
% |\ifodd\c@page \else\@tempcnta\m@ne \fi| \\
% is where the odd/even page checking is done in the kernel code. I
% replace it with my code, and then continue with the kernel.
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \ifoddpage \else \@tempcnta\m@ne \fi
      \fi
    \if@reversemargin \@tempcnta -\@tempcnta \fi
    \fi
    \ifnum\@tempcnta <\z@  \global\setbox\@marbox\box\@currbox \fi
    \@tempdima\@mparbottom
    \advance\@tempdima -\@pageht
    \advance\@tempdima\ht\@marbox
    \ifdim\@tempdima >\z@
%    \end{macrocode}
% The next line in the kernel reads: \\
% |\@latex@warning@no@line {Marginpar on page \thepage\space moved}| \\
% I have changed the warning message to give the user an indication
% of the severity of the move. Then follow the kernel on to the end.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \@latex@warning@no@line {Marginpar on page 
                               \thepage\space moved by \the\@tempdima}%
    \else
      \@tempdima\z@
    \fi
    \global\@mparbottom\@pageht
    \global\advance\@mparbottom\@tempdima
    \global\advance\@mparbottom\dp\@marbox
    \global\advance\@mparbottom\marginparpush
    \advance\@tempdima -\ht\@marbox
    \global\setbox \@marbox
                   \vbox {\vskip \@tempdima
                          \box \@marbox}%
    \global \ht\@marbox \z@
    \global \dp\@marbox \z@
    \kern -\@pagedp
    \nointerlineskip
    \hb@xt@\columnwidth
      {\ifnum \@tempcnta >\z@
          \hskip\columnwidth \hskip\marginparsep
       \else
          \hskip -\marginparsep \hskip -\marginparwidth
       \fi
       \box\@marbox \hss}%
    \nointerlineskip
    \hbox{\vrule \@height\z@ \@width\z@ \@depth\@pagedp}%
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Epigraphs}
%
% This code comes from the \Lpack{epigraph} package~\cite{EPIGRAPH}.
%
% \begin{macro}{\beforeepigraphskip}
% \begin{macro}{\afterepigraphskip}
% \begin{macro}{\epigraphwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\epigraphrule}
%    The several length commands, which can be changed by the user with
% |\setlength|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\beforeepigraphskip}
  \setlength{\beforeepigraphskip}{.5\baselineskip}
\newlength{\afterepigraphskip}
  \setlength{\afterepigraphskip}{.5\baselineskip}
\newlength{\epigraphwidth}
  \setlength{\epigraphwidth}{.4\textwidth}
\newlength{\epigraphrule}
  \setlength{\epigraphrule}{.4\p@}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\epigraphsize}
%    The size of the font to be used.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\epigraphsize}{\small}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\epigraphflush}
% \begin{macro}{\textflush}
% \begin{macro}{\sourceflush}
%  The three commands to position epigraphs in the textblock and to position
%  the components of the epigraph.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\epigraphflush}{flushright}
\newcommand{\textflush}{flushleft}
\newcommand{\sourceflush}{flushright}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\epigraphfontsize}
% \begin{macro}{\epigraphposition}
% \begin{macro}{\epigraphtextposition}
% \begin{macro}{\epigraphsourceposition}
% These are declarative forms of the above. It's a bit late now, but
% the previous macros should have been internal.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/10}{Added some declarations for epigraphs.}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\epigraphfontsize}[1]{\def\epigraphsize{#1}}
\newcommand{\epigraphposition}[1]{\long\def\epigraphflush{#1}}
\newcommand{\epigraphtextposition}[1]{\def\textflush{#1}}
\newcommand{\epigraphsourceposition}[1]{\def\sourceflush{#1}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@epirule}
%  The internal command to draw a rule between text and source.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@epirule}{\rule[.5ex]{\epigraphwidth}{\epigraphrule}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@epitext}
% The internal command to typeset the \meta{text}. Put it into a minipage of the
% right size and typeset per |\textflush|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@epitext}[1]{%
  \begin{minipage}{\epigraphwidth}\begin{\textflush} #1\\
%    \end{macrocode}
%  Draw a rule if it will be visible, otherwise add some extra vertical space.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifdim\epigraphrule>\z@ \@epirule \else \vspace*{1ex} \fi
  \end{\textflush}\end{minipage}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@episource}
%    The internal command for typesetting the \meta{source}, which is put 
% into a minipage and typeset according to |\sourceflush|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@episource}[1]{%
  \begin{minipage}{\epigraphwidth}\begin{\sourceflush} #1\end{\sourceflush}
  \end{minipage}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\epigraph}
%    Having got the preliminaries out of the way, here's the user command
% for a single epigraph. This is set in a minipage to prevent breaking
% across a page. Position it according to |\epigraphflush|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\epigraph}[2]{\vspace{\beforeepigraphskip}
  {\epigraphsize\begin{\epigraphflush}\begin{minipage}{\epigraphwidth}
    \@epitext{#1}\\ \@episource{#2}
    \end{minipage}\end{\epigraphflush}
    \vspace{\afterepigraphskip}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\qitem}
% \begin{macro}{\qitemlabel}
%    |\qitem| is the epigraph list version of |\item|. 
% Set everything inside a minipage.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\qitem}[2]{{\raggedright\item \begin{minipage}{\epigraphwidth}
  \@epitext{#1}\\ \@episource{#2}
  \end{minipage}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%  |\qitemlabel| is needed for a list as well. It is not going to 
% typeset anything.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\qitemlabel}[1]{\hfill}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{environment}{epigraphs}
%  Now for the epigraph list. This is defined in terms of a |list|
% environment. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{epigraphs}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Do the vertical space, set the font size, position according to 
% |\epigraphflush|, and put everything into a minipage.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \vspace{\beforeepigraphskip}\begin{\epigraphflush}
  \epigraphsize
  \begin{minipage}{\epigraphwidth}
   \list{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%  Make the list just fit the minipage (i.e., no indents).
%    \begin{macrocode}
    {\itemindent\z@ \labelwidth\z@ \labelsep\z@
     \leftmargin\z@ \rightmargin\z@
     \let\makelabel\qitemlabel}}%
  {\endlist\end{minipage}\end{\epigraphflush}
   \vspace{\afterepigraphskip}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \subsubsection{Epigraphs before a chapter title}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@epichapapp}
% \begin{macro}{\dropchapter}
% \begin{macro}{\undodrop}
%    Commands to drop and restore positions of chapter titles. Dropping is
% accomplished by inserting vertical space before the |\@chapapp| command.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\dropchapter}[1]{%
  \let\@epichapapp\@chapapp
  \renewcommand{\@chapapp}{\vspace*{#1}\@epichapapp}}
\newcommand{\undodrop}{\let\@chapapp\@epichapapp}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% Placing an epigraph before a chapter title uses the scheme outlined
% by Piet van Oostrum~\cite{FANCYHDR}. This is to put a zero sized
% picture into the page header. 
%
% \begin{macro}{\if@epirhs}
% \begin{macro}{\if@epicenter}
%  Two booleans for testing whether an epigraph is to be at the RH margin,
% centered, or at the LH margin. The default is RH margin.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@epirhs     \@epirhstrue
\newif\if@epicenter  \@epicentertrue
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@epipos}
%    This routine sets the |\if@epi...| booleans according to the value of
% |\epigraphflush|. If |\epigraphflush| is neither |center| nor |flushleft|
% then it defaults to |flushright|. We have to use this to be upward 
% compatible with |\epigraphflush| being set by the user with |\renewcommand|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@epipos}{
  \long\def\@ept{flushleft}
  \ifx\epigraphflush\@ept
    \@epirhsfalse \@epicenterfalse
  \else
    \long\def\@ept{center}
    \ifx\epigraphflush\@ept
      \@epirhsfalse \@epicentertrue
    \else
      \@epirhstrue  \@epicenterfalse
    \fi
  \fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\epigraphhead}
% |\epigraphhead[|\meta{distance}|]{|\meta{text}|}| puts \meta{text} at
% \meta{distance} (a number, not a length) below the header at the 
% page position specified by |\epigraphflush|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\epigraphhead}[2][95]{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% We have to use |\def| instead of the normal \LaTeX{} definition commands
% as we will keep on
% (re)defining things. For reasons that are not fully clear to me \LaTeX{}
% doesn't seem to like me using a |\savebox| for storing the epigraph text,
% so I'll use a command instead.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \def\@epitemp{\begin{minipage}{\epigraphwidth}#2\end{minipage}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Define an |epigraph| page style.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \def\ps@epigraph{\let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
%    \end{macrocode}
% There are three possible definitions for |\@oddhead| depending on the
% value of |\epigraphflush|. We call |\@epipos| to decide which one to do.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@epipos
    \if@epirhs
      \def\@oddhead{\hfil\begin{picture}(0,0)
                         \put(0,-#1){\makebox(0,0)[r]{\@epitemp}}
                         \end{picture}}
    \else
      \if@epicenter
        \def\@oddhead{\hfil\begin{picture}(0,0)
                           \put(0,-#1){\makebox(0,0)[b]{\@epitemp}}
                           \end{picture}\hfil}
      \else
        \def\@oddhead{\begin{picture}(0,0)
                           \put(0,-#1){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\@epitemp}}
                           \end{picture}\hfil}
      \fi
    \fi
    \let\@evenhead\@oddhead
    \def\@oddfoot{\reset@font\hfil\thepage\hfil}
    \let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Make |epigraph| be the page style for this page.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \thispagestyle{epigraph}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%    The above produces a |plain| pagestyle with the epigraph. Life is
% more complex if someone wants a fancy style with the epigraph. They
% will have to do some work, though.
%
% \begin{macro}{\the@epigraph}
% \begin{macro}{\@epidrop}
% \begin{macro}{\epigraphforheader}
% |\the@pigraph| is a macro to store the contents of an epigraph, and |\@pidrop|
% stores the \meta{distance} number.
% |\epigraphforheader|\oarg{distance}\marg{text} defines the internal macros
% appropriately.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/10}{Added \cs{the@epigraph}, \cs{@epidrop}}
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/10}{Added \cs{epigraphforheader}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\the@epigraph}{}
\newcommand{\@epidrop}{95}
\newcommand{\epigraphforheader}[2][95]{%
  \def\@epidrop{#1}\long\def\the@epigraph{#2}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\epigraphpicture}
% |\epigraphpicture| puts |\the@epigraph| into a zero-sized picture at location
% |(0,-\@epidrop)|. This can then be used as part of a fancy chapter header.
% The coding is similar to |\epigraphhead|.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/10}{Added \cs{epigraphpicture}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\epigraphpicture}{%
  \def\@epitemp{\begin{minipage}{\epigraphwidth}\the@epigraph\end{minipage}}%
  \@epipos
  \if@epirhs
    \begin{picture}(0,0)%
      \put(0,-\@epidrop){\makebox(0,0)[r]{\@epitemp}}%
    \end{picture}%
  \else
    \if@epicenter
      \begin{picture}(0,0)%
        \put(0,-\@epidrop){\makebox(0,0)[b]{\@epitemp}}%
      \end{picture}%
    \else
      \begin{picture}(0,0)%
        \put(0,-\@epidrop){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\@epitemp}}%
      \end{picture}%
    \fi
  \fi}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \subsection{Font changing}
%
% The class does not support the old font changing commands unless the
% \Lopt{oldfontcommands} option is used.
%
% \begin{macro}{\rm}
% The old command for roman font.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/29}{Changed definition of \cs{rm}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\if@memoldfont
  \DeclareOldFontCommand{\rm}{%
    \ClassWarning{memoir}{The \protect\rm\space font command is deprecated.
    \MessageBreak Try to use \protect\rmfamily\space 
                          or \protect\textrm\space instead}%
    \normalfont\rmfamily}{\mathrm}
\else
  \def\rm{\ClassError{memoir}{Font command \protect\rm\space is not supported}{%
          Use \protect\textrm{...}, 
          or {\protect\rmfamily\space ...}, 
          or the oldfontcommands option}}
\fi

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sf}
% The old sans font command.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/29}{Changed definition of \cs{sf}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\if@memoldfont
  \DeclareOldFontCommand{\sf}{%
    \ClassWarning{memoir}{The \protect\sf\space font command is deprecated.
    \MessageBreak Try to use \protect\sffamily\space 
                          or \protect\textsf\space instead}%
    \normalfont\sffamily}{\mathsf}
\else
  \def\sf{\ClassError{memoir}{Font command \protect\sf\space is not supported}{%
          Use \protect\textsf{...},
          or {\protect\sffamily\space ...},
          or the oldfontcommands option}}
\fi

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\tt}
% The old typewriter font command.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/29}{Changed definition of \cs{tt}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\if@memoldfont
  \DeclareOldFontCommand{\tt}{%
    \ClassWarning{memoir}{The \protect\tt\space font command is deprecated.
    \MessageBreak Try to use \protect\ttfamily\space 
                          or \protect\texttt\space instead}%
    \normalfont\ttfamily}{\mathtt}
\else
  \def\tt{\ClassError{memoir}{Font command \protect\tt\space is not supported}{%
          Use \protect\texttt{...},
          or {\protect\ttfamily\space ...},
          or the oldfontcommands option}}
\fi

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bf}
% The old bold font command.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/29}{Changed definition of \cs{bf}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\if@memoldfont
  \DeclareOldFontCommand{\bf}{%
    \ClassWarning{memoir}{The \protect\bf\space font command is deprecated.
    \MessageBreak Try to use \protect\bfseries\space 
                          or \protect\textbf\space instead}%
    \normalfont\bfseries}{\mathbf}
\else
  \def\bf{\ClassError{memoir}{Font command \protect\bf\space is not supported}{%
          Use \protect\textbf{...},
          or {\protect\bfseries\space ...},
          or the oldfontcommands option}}
\fi

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\it}
% The old italic font command.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/29}{Changed definition of \cs{it}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\if@memoldfont
  \DeclareOldFontCommand{\it}{%
    \ClassWarning{memoir}{The \protect\it\space font command is deprecated.
    \MessageBreak Try to use \protect\itshape\space 
                          or \protect\textit\space instead}%
    \normalfont\itshape}{\mathit}
\else
  \def\it{\ClassError{memoir}{Font command \protect\it\space is not supported}{%
          Use \protect\textit{...},
          or {\protect\itshape\space ...},
          or the oldfontcommands option}}
\fi

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sl}
% The old slanted font command.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/29}{Changed definition of \cs{sl}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\if@memoldfont
  \DeclareOldFontCommand{\sl}{%
    \ClassWarning{memoir}{The \protect\sl\space font command is deprecated.
    \MessageBreak Try to use \protect\slshape\space 
                          or \protect\textsl\space instead}%
    \normalfont\slshape}{\@nomath\sl}
\else
  \def\sl{\ClassError{memoir}{Font command \protect\sl\space is not supported}{%
          Use \protect\textsl{...},
          or {\protect\slshape\space ...},
          or the oldfontcommands option}}
\fi

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sc}
% The old small caps font command.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/29}{Changed definition of \cs{sc}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\if@memoldfont
  \DeclareOldFontCommand{\sc}{%
    \ClassWarning{memoir}{The \protect\sc\space font command is deprecated.
    \MessageBreak Try to use \protect\scshape\space 
                          or \protect\textsc\space instead}%
    \normalfont\scshape}{\@nomath\sc}
\else
  \def\sc{\ClassError{memoir}{Font command \protect\sc\space is not supported}{%
          Use \protect\textsc{...},
          or {\protect\scshape\space ...},
          or the oldfontcommands option}}
\fi

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cal}
% The old calligraphic font command.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/29}{Added definition of \cs{cal}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\if@memoldfont
  \DeclareRobustCommand*\cal{%
    \ClassWarning{memoir}{The \protect\cal\space font command is deprecated.
    \MessageBreak Try to use \protect\mathcal\space instead}%
    \@fontswitch\relax\mathcal}
\else
  \def\cal{\ClassError{memoir}{Font command \protect\cal\space is not supported}{%
          Use \protect\mathcal,
          or the oldfontcommands option}}
\fi

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\mit}
% The old math italic font command.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/29}{Added definition of \cs{mit}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\if@memoldfont
  \DeclareRobustCommand*\mit{%
    \ClassWarning{memoir}{The \protect\mit\space font command is deprecated.
    \MessageBreak Try to use \protect\mathnormal\space instead}%
    \@fontswitch\relax\mathnormal}
\else
  \def\mit{\ClassError{memoir}{Font command \protect\mit\space is not supported}{%
          Use \protect\mathnormal,
          or the oldfontcommands option}}
\fi

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\em}
% The old emphasis font command.
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Redid coding for \cs{emph} and \cs{em}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\@memoldem\em
\DeclareTextFontCommand{\emph}{\@memoldem}
\renewcommand{\em}{\@memoldem%
  \ClassWarning{memoir}{Font command \protect\em\space is deprecated.\MessageBreak
        Use \protect\emph{...} instead}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
%
%
% \section{Cross Referencing} \label{sec:xref}
%
% \subsection{Label referencing}
%
% \begin{macro}{\fref}
% \begin{macro}{\tref}
% \begin{macro}{\pref}
%   These are named references to labeled figures, tables and pages. 
% I find these
% useful to ensure consistency throughout the document --- I don't have
% to remember whether it is `see Figure ...' or `figure' or `Fig.' or \ldots.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\fref}[1]{\figurerefname~\ref{#1}}
\newcommand{\tref}[1]{\tablerefname~\ref{#1}}
\newcommand{\pref}[1]{\pagerefname~\pageref{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\Pref}
% \begin{macro}{\Cref}
% \begin{macro}{\Sref}
%   These are named references to labeled Part, Chapter and Sectional
% divisions.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Added \cs{Pref}, \cs{Cref} and \cs{Sref}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\Pref}[1]{\partrefname\ref{#1}}
\newcommand{\Cref}[1]{\chapterrefname\ref{#1}}
\newcommand{\Sref}[1]{\sectionrefname\ref{#1}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Table of Contents, etc.}
%
%     A |\section| command writes a
%     |\contentsline{section}{|\meta{title}|}{|\meta{page}|}| command
%     on the \file{.toc} file, where \meta{title} contains the
%     contents of the entry and \meta{page} is the page number. If
%     sections are being numbered, then \meta{title} will be of the
%     form |\numberline{|\meta{num}|}{|\meta{heading}|}| where
%     \meta{num} is the number produced by |\thesection|.  Other
%     sectioning commands work similarly.
%
%     A |\caption| command in a `figure' environment writes
%
%     |\contentsline{figure}{\numberline{|\meta{num}|}{|%
%                    \meta{caption}|}}{|\meta{page}|}|
%
%     on the \file{.lof} file, where \meta{num} is the number produced
%     by |\thefigure| and \meta{caption} is the figure caption.  It
%     works similarly for a `table' environment.
%
%    The command |\contentsline{|\meta{name}|}| expands to
%    |\l@|\meta{name}.  So, to specify the table of contents, we must
%    define |\l@chapter|, |\l@section|, |\l@subsection|, ... ; to
%    specify the list of figures, we must define |\l@figure|; and so
%    on.  Most of these can be defined with the |\@dottedtocline|
%    command, which works as follows.
%
%    |\@dottedtocline{|\meta{level}|}{|\meta{indent}|}{|^^A
%                      \meta{numwidth}|}{|^^A
%                      \meta{title}|}{|\meta{page}|}|
%
%    \begin{description}
%    \item[\meta{level}] An entry is produced only if\meta{ level}
%        $<=$ value of the \Lcount{tocdepth} counter.  Note,
%        |\chapter| is level 0, |\section| is level 1, etc.
%    \item[\meta{indent}] The indentation from the outer left margin
%        of the start   of the contents line.
%    \item[\meta{numwidth}] The width of a box in which the section
%        number is to go, if \meta{title} includes a |\numberline|
%        command.
%    \end{description}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@pnumwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\@tocrmarg}
% \begin{macro}{\@dotsep}
%    This command uses the following three parameters, which are set
%    with a |\newcommand| (so em's can be used to make them depend upon
%    the font).
%    \begin{description}
%    \item[\texttt{\bslash @pnumwidth}] The width of a box in which the
%        page number is put.
%    \item[\texttt{\bslash @tocrmarg}] The right margin for multiple
%        line entries.  One wants |\@tocrmarg| $\ge$ |\@pnumwidth|
%    \item[\texttt{\bslash @dotsep}] Separation between dots, in mu
%        units. Should be defined as a number like 2 or 1.7
%    \end{description}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@pnumwidth}{1.55em}
\newcommand{\@tocrmarg} {2.55em}
\newcommand{\@dotsep}{4.5}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\tocentryskip}
% \begin{macro}{\tocbaseline}
% \begin{macro}{\tocskip}
%    We define two lengths and a utility command.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\tocentryskip} \setlength{\tocentryskip}{1em}
\newlength{\tocbaseline} \setlength{\tocbaseline}{20pt}
\newcommand{\tocskip}[1]{%
    \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\vspace{#1}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{New List of \ldots}
%
% It is apparent that users want to do at least two things that are not
% readily provided by the standard classes: (a) change the appearance
% of the Table of Contents, etc., headings, and (b) create new List of\ldots.
% This class provides a means of creating new Lists whose headings are
% parameterized, thereby killing two birds with one stone.
%
% In this class the tables of
%    contents, figures etc. are always set in single-column style.
% The titles are added to the ToC, unless the starred versions of the 
% commands are used.
%
% \begin{macro}{\ensureonecol}
% \begin{macro}{\restorefromonecol}
%  The ToC, LoF, etc are always set in a single column. These two
% macros cooperate to swith from two-columns to one column, and back again.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\ensureonecol}{%
  \if@twocolumn
    \@restonecoltrue\onecolumn
  \else
    \@restonecolfalse
  \fi}
\newcommand*{\restorefromonecol}{\if@restonecol\twocolumn\fi}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/24}{Deleted \cs{ensuretwocol} and \cs{restorefromtwocol}
%                             as they were unused}
% 
% \begin{macro}{\cftparskip}
% The |\parskip| local to the ToC, etc, is set to the length |\cftparskip|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\cftparskip}
\setlength{\cftparskip}{0pt}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\newlistof}
% |\newlistof{|\meta{listofcmmd}|}{|\meta{ext}|}{|\meta{listofname}|}|
% creates the command |\listofcmmd| to typeset a new List of, where the
% external file has the extension |.ext| and the heading title is
% \meta{listofname}. The code for this is a heavily modified part
% of the \Lpack{tocloft} package.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\newlistof}[3]{%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% In the following, |X| stands for the value of \meta{listofcmmd} and
% |Z| stands for the value of \meta{ext}.
%
% \begin{macro}{\ext@Z}
% \begin{macro}{\Zdepth}
% The file extension and listing depth, which is set to level~1.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@namedef{ext@#2}{#2}
  \@ifundefined{c@#2depth}{\newcounter{#2depth}}{}
  \setcounter{#2depth}{1}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\Zmark}
% The heading marks for the listing.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Changed \cs{@mkboth} to \cs{markboth} in \cs{Zmark}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@namedef{#2mark}{\markboth{#3}{#3}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\X}
% Typeset the listing title and entries, 
% with both a normal and starred version.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@namedef{#1}{\@ifstar{\@nameuse{@star#2}}{\@nameuse{@plain#2}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@starZ}
% The starred listof version
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@namedef{@star#2}{%
    \ensureonecol
    \par
    \begingroup
%%%      \parindent\z@ \parskip\cftparskip
      \@nameuse{@#2maketitle}
      \@starttoc{#2}%
    \endgroup
    \restorefromonecol}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@plainZ}
% The unstarred listof version
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@namedef{@plain#2}{%
    \ensureonecol
    \par
    \begingroup
%%%      \parindent\z@ \parskip\cftparskip
      \@nameuse{@#2maketitle}
      \phantomsection
      \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#3}
      \@starttoc{#2}%
    \endgroup
    \restorefromonecol}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@Zmaketitle}
% This macro typesets the title.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Added \cs{printZnonum} to \cs{@Zmaketitle}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@namedef{@#2maketitle}{%
    \@nameuse{#2headstart}
   {\parindent\z@ \parskip\cftparskip
    \interlinepenalty\@M
%    \end{macrocode}
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added printZnonum to \cs{newlistof}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@nameuse{print#2nonum}%
    \@nameuse{print#2title}{#3}%
    \@nameuse{#2mark}%
    \thispagestyle{chapter}%
    \@nameuse{after#2title}
   }
    \@afterheading}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\Zheadstart}
% \begin{macro}{\afterZtitle}
% The macros |\Zheadstart| and |\afterZtitle|
% control what goes before and after the title. They
% default to the corresponding macros for chapters.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@namedef{#2headstart}{\chapterheadstart}
  \@namedef{after#2title}{\afterchaptertitle}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\printZnonum}
% This typesets something before the title and defaults
% to |\printchapternonum|.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Added \cs{printZnonum} macro}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@namedef{print#2nonum}{\printchapternonum}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\printZtitle}
% The title is typeset by the macro |\printZtitle{|\meta{title}|}|
% which defaults to |\printchaptertitle|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@namedef{print#2title}##1{\printchaptertitle{##1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% This is the end of the definition of |\newlistof|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
} % end \newlistof

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@starttoc}
% A list of macro calls |\@starttoc| to read the appropriate file. I have
% changed the kernel definition to allow a file to be read multiple times
% by delaying killing the file until the end of the document.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Changed \cs{@starttoc}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\@starttoc}[1]{%
  \begingroup\makeatletter
    \@input{\jobname.#1}%
    \if@filesw
      \AtEndDocument{%
        \expandafter\newwrite\csname tf@#1\endcsname
        \immediate\openout \csname tf@#1\endcsname \jobname.#1\relax
      }%
    \fi
  \@nobreakfalse
  \endgroup}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsubsection{Table of Contents, etc}
%
% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents*}
%    These macros request that LaTeX produces a table of
%    contents. The ToC heading is added to the ToC unless the starred
% version is used.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlistof{tableofcontents}{toc}{\contentsname}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%    The List of Figures and List of Tables are defined later.
%
%
%
% \subsubsection{List entries}
%
%    Each command in the body of the text that makes an entry in the ToC,
% or LoF or LoT needs an addtional macro to format the entry, as described
% above. Users often want to change the formatting of the entries but
% it is not immediately obvious how to do that.
%
%    I have borrowed and modified more of the code from the \Lpack{tocloft}
% package to enable easy creation and modification the formatting of the
% entries.
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\setpnumwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\setrmarg}
%  User commands for setting |\@pnumwidth| and |\@tocrmarg|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setpnumwidth}[1]{\renewcommand{\@pnumwidth}{#1}}
\newcommand{\setrmarg}[1]{\renewcommand{\@tocrmarg}{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftdot}
% \begin{macro}{\cftdotfill}
% In the default ToC, a dotted line can be used to provide a leader between
% a title and the page number. The definition of this leader is buried
% in the |\@dottedtocline| command. The |\cftdotfill{|\meta{sep}|}|
% command provides a parameterised version of the leader code, where
% \meta{sep} is the separation between the dots in mu units.
% The symbol used for the `dots' in the leader is given by the value
% of |\cftdot|. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\providecommand{\cftdot}{.}
\providecommand{\cftdotfill}[1]{%
  \leaders\hbox{$\m@th\mkern #1 mu\hbox{\cftdot}\mkern #1 mu$}\hfill}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftdotsep}
% \begin{macro}{\cftnodots}
% |\cftdotsep| holds the default dot separation. 
% If the kerns in |\cftdotfill| are large enough, then no dots will
% be printed. |\cftnodots| should be `large enough'.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/07}{Changed \cs{cftnodots} from 10,000 to 2,000 for 
%                17pt option and pdflatex}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\providecommand{\cftdotsep}{4.5}
\newcommand{\cftnodots}{2000}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%     Now for the trickier bits regarding the typesetting of the ToC
% entries.
%
%     A \file{.toc} (also \file{.lof} and \file{.lot}) file consists
% of a list of 
% |\contentsline{|\meta{kind}|}{|\meta{title}|}{|\meta{page}|}|
% commands, where \meta{kind} is the kind of heading (e.g., |part| or
% |section| or |figure|), \meta{title} is the title text (including the number),
% and \meta{page} is the page number. The entries are inserted into the
% file by calling the 
% |\addcontentsline{|\meta{file}|}{|\meta{kind}|}{|\meta{title}|}|
% command, where \meta{file} is the file extension (e.g., |toc|, |lot|)
% and the other arguments are the same as for the |\contentsline|
% command. (Arbitrary stuff may also be put into the file via the
% |\addtocontents{|\meta{file}|}{|\meta{text}|}| command).
% The typesetting of the |\contentsline| entries is performed by 
% commands of the form |\l@kind|. The sectioning and captioning commands
% call |\addcontentsline| to insert their titles into the \file{.toc}
% etc., files.
%
%     For the purposes at hand it is generally impossible to treat 
% the typesetting
% of a title and its number separately, as both are bundled into the
% \meta{title} argument within |\contentsline|. They could be handled
% separately if the |\contentsline| command was suitably modified. If
% this was done, then the |\addtocontentsline| command would also need
% to be changed which would then require the sectioning and captioning
% commands to be modified as well. This is certainly possible, but would
% cause problems if any other package also modified the sectioning or
% captioning commands, and there are several packages which do this.
%
%  I provide modified versions of the |\l@kind| commands. 
% Essentially, my new definitions
% consist of inlined versions of the code for |\@dottedtocline|.
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftparfillskip}
% The |\l@kind| commands modify (locally) the value of |\parfillskip|.
% |\cftparfillskip| is a copy of the default \textit{\TeX book}
% |\parfillskip| definition.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\cftparfillskip}{\parfillskip=0pt plus1fil}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\numberline}
% The purpose of the |\numberline{|\meta{secnum}|}| command is to typeset
% \meta{secnum} left justified in a box of width |\@tempdima|. I redefine
% it to add three additional parameters, namely |\@cftbsnum|, 
% |\@cftasnum| and |\@cftasnumb| 
% (see \file{ltsect.dtx} for the original
% definition).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\numberline}[1]{% 
  \hb@xt@\@tempdima{\@cftbsnum #1\@cftasnum\hfil}\@cftasnumb}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@cftbsnum}
% \begin{macro}{\@cftasnum}
% \begin{macro}{\@cftasnumb}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@cftbsnum}{}
\newcommand{\@cftasnum}{}
\newcommand{\@cftasnumb}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% 
%
% \begin{macro}{\newlistentry}
% |\newlistentry[|\meta{within}|]{|\meta{counter}|}{|\meta{ext}|}{|\meta{level-1}|}| 
% creates a set of commands for typesetting a new kind of entry in a List of.
% \meta{counter} is the name of the counter for the entry and must be 
% the same as the name
% of the entry (e.g., |subsection|). The optional \meta{within} is the
% name of a counter within which |counter| is defined. The file extension
% for the List of is \meta{ext} and \meta{level-1} is one less than the 
% level of the entry in the List of.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\newlistentry}[4][\@empty]{%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    In the following, |X| is used as the value of \meta{counter} and
% |Z| as the value of \meta{ext}.
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@X}
% \begin{macro}{\theX}
% Check if \meta{within} and \meta{counter} have been defined. It is
% an error if \meta{within} has not been defined. \meta{counter}
% will be created if it has not been previously defined.
% Set the default counter values.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@ifundefined{c@#2}{%    check & set the counter
    \ifx \@empty#1\relax
      \newcounter{#2}
    \else
      \newcounter{#2}[#1]%
      \expandafter\edef\csname the#2\endcsname{%
        \expandafter\noexpand\csname the#1\endcsname.\noexpand\arabic{#2}}
    \fi}{}
  \setcounter{#2}{0}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% That finishes off the error checking. No matter what the result, the
% rest of the new commands are defined.
%
% \begin{macro}{\l@X}
% |\l@X{|\meta{title}|}{|\meta{page}|}| typesets the entry.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@namedef{l@#2}##1##2{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Only typeset if the |\Zdepth| is greater than \meta{level-1}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifnum \@nameuse{c@#3depth} > #4\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
% Add some vertical space.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \vskip \@nameuse{cftbefore#2skip}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Start a group to keep paragraphing changes local. Set the |\leftskip|
% to the entry's indentation.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      {\leftskip \@nameuse{cft#2indent}\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set the |\rightskip| to |\@tocrmarg| to leave room for the page number.
%    \begin{macrocode}
       \rightskip \@tocrmarg
%    \end{macrocode}
% Ensure that the last line of an entry will be filled. Setting |\parfillskip|
% to a negative value prevents `overfull box' messages.
%    \begin{macrocode}
       \parfillskip -\rightskip
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set the paragraph's indentation to the entry's indentation.
%    \begin{macrocode}
       \parindent \@nameuse{cft#2indent}\relax\@afterindenttrue
%    \end{macrocode}
% Try and prevent breaks between lines in a multiline entry.
%    \begin{macrocode}
       \interlinepenalty\@M
%    \end{macrocode}
% Make sure we have left vertical mode.
%    \begin{macrocode}
       \leavevmode
%    \end{macrocode}
% Our version of |\numberline| expects that the width of the number box
% is in |\@tempdima|, and that the three macros |\@cftbsnum|, |\@cftaqsnum|,
% and |\@cftasnumb| are defined. We set all these to the values for this entry.
%    \begin{macrocode}
       \@tempdima \@nameuse{cft#2numwidth}\relax
       \expandafter\let\expandafter\@cftbsnum\csname cft#2presnum\endcsname
       \expandafter\let\expandafter\@cftasnum\csname cft#2aftersnum\endcsname
       \expandafter\let\expandafter\@cftasnumb\csname cft#2aftersnumb\endcsname
%    \end{macrocode}
% Arrange that the (entry number and) first line of the title is set at
% the current indent, and that any subsequent lines will be further
% indented.
%    \begin{macrocode}
       \advance\leftskip\@tempdima \null\nobreak\hskip -\leftskip
%    \end{macrocode}
% Print the (number and) title, prohibiting any breqaking.
%    \begin{macrocode}
       {\@nameuse{cft#2font}##1}\nobreak
%    \end{macrocode}
% Print the leader and the page number, and then close the group.
%    \begin{macrocode}
       \@nameuse{cft#2fillnum}{##2}}
    \fi
  }  % end of \l@#2

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% Now define all the layout commands used by |\l@X|. The default
% values of these print the entry in a normal font with a dotted
% line between the title and the page number.
% \begin{macro}{\cftbeforeXskip}
% The skip before the title.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \expandafter\newlength\csname cftbefore#2skip\endcsname
    \setlength{\@nameuse{cftbefore#2skip}}{\z@ \@plus .2\p@}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\cftXindent}
% \begin{macro}{\cftXnumwidth}
% The indent and width for the number.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \expandafter\newlength\csname cft#2indent\endcsname
  \expandafter\newlength\csname cft#2numwidth\endcsname
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set the default values for the indent and numwidth depending on
% the entry's level. A level of 1 corresponds to a figure entry
% (no indent, and space for a number like N.N).
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifcase #4\relax  % 0   (level 1)
    \setlength{\@nameuse{cft#2indent}}{0em}
    \setlength{\@nameuse{cft#2numwidth}}{2.3em}
  \or               % 1   (level 2)
    \setlength{\@nameuse{cft#2indent}}{2.3em}
    \setlength{\@nameuse{cft#2numwidth}}{3.2em}
  \or               % 2   (level 3)
    \setlength{\@nameuse{cft#2indent}}{5.5em}
    \setlength{\@nameuse{cft#2numwidth}}{4.1em}
  \or               % 3   (level 4)
    \setlength{\@nameuse{cft#2indent}}{8.5em}
    \setlength{\@nameuse{cft#2numwidth}}{5.0em}
  \else             % anything else
    \setlength{\@nameuse{cft#2indent}}{10.5em}
    \setlength{\@nameuse{cft#2numwidth}}{6.0em}
  \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\cftXfont}
% \begin{macro}{\cftXpresnum}
% \begin{macro}{\cftXaftersnum}
% \begin{macro}{\cftXaftersnumb}
% \begin{macro}{\cftXdotsep}
% \begin{macro}{\cftXleader}
% \begin{macro}{\cftXpagefont}
% \begin{macro}{\cftXafterpnum}
% And the remaining commands; the only ones that are not null are for the
% dotsep, the font and the leader
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@namedef{cft#2font}{\normalfont}
  \@namedef{cft#2presnum}{}
  \@namedef{cft#2aftersnum}{}
  \@namedef{cft#2aftersnumb}{}
  \@namedef{cft#2dotsep}{\cftdotsep}
  \@namedef{cft#2leader}{\normalfont\cftdotfill{\@nameuse{cft#2dotsep}}}
  \@namedef{cft#2pagefont}{\normalfont}
  \@namedef{cft#2afterpnum}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\toclevel@X}
% The hyperref package needs a command |\toclevel@X|, holding
% the \meta{level-1} value.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@namedef{toclevel@#2}{#4}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftXfillnum}
% Typeset the leader and page number.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@namedef{cft#2fillnum}##1{%
    {\@nameuse{cft#2leader}}\nobreak
    \hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{%
      \hfil\@nameuse{cft#2pagefont}##1}\@nameuse{cft#2afterpnum}\par}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% This ends the definition of |\newlistentry|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
} % end \newlistentry

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftsetindents}
% |\cftsetindents{|\meta{entry}|}{|\meta{indent}|}{|\meta{numwidth}|}| sets
% the \textit{indent} and \textit{numwidth} for entry \meta{entry}. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\cftsetindents}[3]{%
  \setlength{\@nameuse{cft#1indent}}{#2}
  \setlength{\@nameuse{cft#1numwidth}}{#3}
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% 
%
% \begin{macro}{\l@part}
% Can't use |\newlistentry| for this because of the initial penalty
% and the final |\nobreak| code.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\l@part}[2]{%
  \ifnum \c@tocdepth >-2\relax
      \addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}%
    \addvspace{\cftbeforepartskip}%
    \begingroup
      {\leftskip \cftpartindent\relax
       \rightskip \@tocrmarg
       \parfillskip -\rightskip
       \parindent \cftpartindent\relax\@afterindenttrue
       \interlinepenalty\@M
       \leavevmode    
       \@tempdima \cftpartnumwidth\relax
       \let\@cftbsnum \cftpartpresnum
       \let\@cftasnum \cftpartaftersnum
       \let\@cftasnumb \cftpartaftersnumb
       \advance\leftskip \@tempdima \null\nobreak\hskip -\leftskip
       {\cftpartfont #1}%
       \cftpartfillnum{#2}}
      \nobreak
        \global\@nobreaktrue
        \everypar{\global\@nobreakfalse\everypar{}}%
    \endgroup
  \fi}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\partnumberline}
% |\partnumberline| is a special version of |\numberline| output by |\part|.
% It's default definition uis identical to |\numberline|.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{partnumberline}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\partnumberline}[1]{%
  \hb@xt@\@tempdima{\@cftbsnum #1\@cftasnum\hfil}\@cftasnumb}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftbeforepartskip}
% \begin{macro}{\cftpartnumwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\cftpartfont}
% \begin{macro}{\cftpartpresnum}
% \begin{macro}{\cftpartaftersnum}
% \begin{macro}{\cftpartaftersnumb}
% \begin{macro}{\cftpartleader}
% \begin{macro}{\cftpartdotsep}
% \begin{macro}{\cftpartpagefont}
% \begin{macro}{\cftpartafterpnum}
% \begin{macro}{\cftpartindent}
% \begin{macro}{\cftpartfillnum}
%  These are the user commands to control the typesetting of Part entries.
%  They are initialised to give the standard appearance.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Changed \cs{cftpartnumwidth} to cater for
%                            use of \cs{numberline} in the ToC}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \newlength{\cftbeforepartskip}
    \setlength{\cftbeforepartskip}{2.25em \@plus\p@}
  \newlength{\cftpartindent}
    \setlength{\cftpartindent}{0em}
  \newlength{\cftpartnumwidth}
    \setlength{\cftpartnumwidth}{1.5em}
  \newcommand{\cftpartfont}{\large\bfseries}
  \newcommand{\cftpartpresnum}{}
  \newcommand{\cftpartaftersnum}{}
  \newcommand{\cftpartaftersnumb}{}
  \newcommand{\cftpartleader}{\large\bfseries\cftdotfill{\cftpartdotsep}}
  \newcommand{\cftpartdotsep}{\cftnodots}
  \newcommand{\cftpartpagefont}{\large\bfseries}
  \newcommand{\cftpartafterpnum}{}
  \newcommand{\cftpartfillnum}[1]{%
    {\cftpartleader}%
    {\hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss {\cftpartpagefont #1}}}\cftpartafterpnum\par}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\l@chapter}
%  |\l@chapter{|\meta{title}|}{|\meta{page}|}| typesets the ToC entry for
% a |chapter| heading. It is a parameterised copy of the default |\l@chapter|
% (see \file{classes.dtx} for the original definition). Can't use
% |\newlistentry| for this because of the intial penalty.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{cftchapterbreak} to \cs{l@chapter}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\l@chapter}[2]{%
  \ifnum \c@tocdepth >\m@ne
%%    \addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}% replaced this by next line
    \cftchapterbreak
    \vskip \cftbeforechapterskip
    {\leftskip \cftchapterindent\relax
     \rightskip \@tocrmarg
     \parfillskip -\rightskip
     \parindent \cftchapterindent\relax\@afterindenttrue
     \interlinepenalty\@M
     \leavevmode
     \@tempdima \cftchapternumwidth\relax
     \let\@cftbsnum \cftchapterpresnum
     \let\@cftasnum \cftchapteraftersnum
     \let\@cftasnumb \cftchapteraftersnumb
     \advance\leftskip \@tempdima \null\nobreak\hskip -\leftskip
     {\cftchapterfont #1}\nobreak
     \cftchapterfillnum{#2}}
  \fi}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\chapternumberline}
% |\chapternumberline| is a special version of |\numberline| output by 
% |\chapter|.
% It's default definition uis identical to |\numberline|.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{chapternumberline}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\chapternumberline}[1]{%
  \hb@xt@\@tempdima{\@cftbsnum #1\@cftasnum\hfil}\@cftasnumb}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftbeforechapterskip}
% \begin{macro}{\cftchapterindent}
% \begin{macro}{\cftchapternumwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\cftchapterfont}
% \begin{macro}{\cftchapterpresnum}
% \begin{macro}{\cftchapteraftersnum}
% \begin{macro}{\cftchapteraftersnumb}
% \begin{macro}{\cftchapterleader}
% \begin{macro}{\cftchapterdotsep}
% \begin{macro}{\cftchapterpagefont}
% \begin{macro}{\cftchapterafterpnum}
% \begin{macro}{\cftchapterfillnum}
%  These are the user commands to control the typesetting of Chapter entries.
%  They are initialised to give the standard appearance.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \newlength{\cftbeforechapterskip}
    \setlength{\cftbeforechapterskip}{1.0em \@plus\p@}
  \newlength{\cftchapterindent}
    \setlength{\cftchapterindent}{0em}
  \newlength{\cftchapternumwidth}
    \setlength{\cftchapternumwidth}{1.5em}
  \newcommand{\cftchapterfont}{\bfseries}
  \newcommand{\cftchapterpresnum}{}
  \newcommand{\cftchapteraftersnum}{}
  \newcommand{\cftchapteraftersnumb}{}
  \newcommand{\cftchapterleader}{\bfseries\cftdotfill{\cftchapterdotsep}}
  \newcommand{\cftchapterdotsep}{\cftnodots}
  \newcommand{\cftchapterpagefont}{\bfseries}
  \newcommand{\cftchapterafterpnum}{}
  \newcommand{\cftchapterfillnum}[1]{
    {\cftchapterleader}\nobreak
    \hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hfil\cftchapterpagefont #1}\cftchapterafterpnum\par}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftchapterbreak}
% Another parameter for |\l@chapter|.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{cftchapterbreak}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \newcommand{\cftchapterbreak}{\addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\l@section}
% \begin{macro}{\l@subsection}
% \begin{macro}{\l@subsubsection}
%  |\l@section{|\meta{title}|}{|\meta{page}|}| typesets the ToC entry for
% a |section| heading. Similarly |\l@subsection| and |\l@subsubsection|
% for |\subsection| and |\subsubsection| entries.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlistentry[chapter]{section}{toc}{0}
  \cftsetindents{section}{1.5em}{2.3em}
\newlistentry[section]{subsection}{toc}{1}
  \cftsetindents{subsection}{3.8em}{3.2em}
\newlistentry[subsection]{subsubsection}{toc}{2}
  \cftsetindents{subsubsection}{7.0em}{4.1em}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%    To save on some macro names, use the |subsubsection| layout for
% |paragraph| and |subparagraph|, except for the space for numbers.
%
% \begin{macro}{\l@paragraph}
%  |\l@paragraph{|\meta{title}|}{|\meta{page}|}| typesets the ToC entry for
% a |paragraph| heading. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\l@paragraph}[2]{%
  \ifnum \c@tocdepth >3\relax
    \vskip \cftbeforesubsubsectionskip
    {\leftskip \cftparagraphindent\relax
     \rightskip \@tocrmarg
     \parfillskip -\rightskip
     \parindent \cftparagraphindent\relax\@afterindenttrue
     \interlinepenalty\@M
     \leavevmode
     \@tempdima \cftparagraphnumwidth\relax
     \let\@cftbsnum \cftsubsubsectionpresnum
     \let\@cftasnum \cftsubsubsectionaftersnum
     \let\@cftasnumb \cftsubsubsectionaftersnumb
     \advance\leftskip \@tempdima \null\nobreak\hskip -\leftskip
     {\cftsubsubsectionfont #1}\nobreak
     \cftsubsubsectionfillnum{#2}}
  \fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftparagraphindent}
% \begin{macro}{\cftparagraphnumwidth}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\cftparagraphindent}
\newlength{\cftparagraphnumwidth}
  \cftsetindents{paragraph}{10.0em}{5.0em}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\l@subparagraph}
%  |\l@subparagraph{|\meta{title}|}{|\meta{page}|}| typesets the ToC entry for
% a |subparagraph| heading. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\l@subparagraph}[2]{%
  \ifnum \c@tocdepth >4\relax
    \vskip \cftbeforesubsubsectionskip
    {\leftskip \cftsubparagraphindent\relax
     \rightskip \@tocrmarg
     \parfillskip -\rightskip
     \parindent \cftsubparagraphindent\relax\@afterindenttrue
     \interlinepenalty\@M
     \leavevmode
     \@tempdima \cftsubparagraphnumwidth\relax
     \let\@cftbsnum \cftsubsubsectionpresnum
     \let\@cftasnum \cftsubsubsectionaftersnum
     \let\@cftasnumb \cftsubsubsectionaftersnumb
     \advance\leftskip \@tempdima \null\nobreak\hskip -\leftskip
     {\cftsubsubsectionfont #1}\nobreak
     \cftsubsubsectionfillnum{#2}}
  \fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftsubparagraphindent}
% \begin{macro}{\cftsubparagraphnumwidth}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\cftsubparagraphindent}
\newlength{\cftsubparagraphnumwidth}
  \cftsetindents{subparagraph}{12.0em}{6.0em}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%   The typesetting for Figures and Tables is defined later.
%
%
%
% \subsubsection{Support for the \Lpack{subfigure} package}
%
%  The code for supporting the \Lpack{subfigure} package is, in all 
% essentials, the same as that for the figure and table captions; only the
% names are changed. However, the code need only be executed if the
% \Lpack{subfigure} package is actually loaded. 
%
% \begin{macro}{\@cftl@subfigtab}
%    This command redefines the |\l@subfigure| and |\l@subtable| commands. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@cftl@subfigtab}{
%    \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\l@subfigure}
% \begin{macro}{\l@subtable}
%  |\l@subfigure{|\meta{title}|}{|\meta{page}|}| typesets the LoF entry for
% a |subfigure| caption heading, and |\l@subtable| does the same for subtables.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlistentry[figure]{subfigure}{lof}{1}
  \cftsetindents{subfigure}{2.3em}{2.5em}
\newlistentry[table]{subtable}{lot}{1}
  \cftsetindents{subtable}{2.3em}{2.5em}
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%    Call the \Lpack{subfigure} package setup code only if the 
% \Lopt{subfigure} package has been used.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{subfigure}{\@cftl@subfigtab}{}}

%    \end{macrocode}
%
%
% \subsubsection{Switching page numbering}
%
%    It can, at times, be useful to be able to have ToC entries that have
% no printed page numbers.
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftpagenumbersoff}
% The user level command for switching off page numbers is 
% |\cftpagenumbersoff{|\meta{entry}|}| where \meta{entry} is the 
% name of the entry. 
% The macro redefines the |\cftXnumfill| command so that there is no leader
% and the page number is ignored.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand{\cftpagenumbersoff}[1]{%
  \@namedef{cft#1fillnum}##1{%
    \cftparfillskip\@nameuse{cft#1afterpnum}\par}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftpagenumberson}
% |\cftpagenumberson{|\meta{entry}|}| is the user level command for 
% reversing the corresponding |\cftpagenumbersoff|.
% The macro defines the |\cftXnumfill| command to correspond to 
% the default definition.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand{\cftpagenumberson}[1]{%
  \@namedef{cft#1fillnum}##1{%
    {\@nameuse{cft#1leader}}\nobreak
    \hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{%
      \hfil\@nameuse{cft#1pagefont}##1}\@nameuse{cft#1afterpnum}\par}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
% \subsubsection{Chapter precis}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\chapterprecis}
% The command |\chapterprecis{|\meta{text}|}| typesets
% \meta{text} at the point where it is called, and also adds \meta{text}
% to the \file{.toc} file. It is expects to be called immediately after
% a |\chapter| command.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\chapterprecis}[1]{%
  \chapterprecishere{#1}
  \chapterprecistoc{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\chapterprecishere}
% |\chapterprecishere{|\meta{text}|}| typesets \meta{text}. It expects
% to be called immediately after a |\chapter| command. 
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Parameterised \cs{chapterprecishere}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\chapterprecishere}[1]{%
  \prechapterprecis #1\postchapterprecis}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\prechapterprecis}
% \begin{macro}{\postchapterprecis}
% These put code before and after |\chapterprecishere| text. By
% default |\prechapterprecis| adds some negative space and starts a
% quote environment using italics. |\postchapterprecis| ends
% the quote environment.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{prechapterprecis} and 
%                            \cs{postchapterprecis}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\prechapterprecis}{%
  \vspace*{-2\baselineskip}%
  \begin{quote}\normalfont\itshape}
\newcommand{\postchapterprecis}{\end{quote}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\precistocfont}
% Font for typesetting chapter precis in the ToC.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{precistocfont}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\precistocfont}{\normalfont\itshape}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\chapterprecistoc}
% \begin{macro}{\precistoctext}
% |\chapterprecistoc{|\meta{text}|}| effectively adds \meta{text} to 
% the \file{.toc}
% file. The \meta{text} will be typeset within the same margins as the
% the title text of a |\chapter| heading, using the |\precistocfont| font.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{precistoctext}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\chapterprecistoc}[1]{\addtocontents{toc}{\precistoctext{#1}}}
\DeclareRobustCommand{\precistoctext}[1]{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Start a group to localize changes to the paragraphing. Set the 
% left margin to the chapter indent plus the chapter number width.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  {\leftskip \cftchapterindent\relax
   \advance\leftskip \cftchapternumwidth\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set the right hand margin to |\@tocrmarg|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
   \rightskip \@tocrmarg\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
% Typeset \meta{text} using an italic font, then ensure that the paragraph
% is finished (to use the local skips). Finally close the group and we 
% are done.
%    \begin{macrocode}
   \precistocfont #1\par}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{Adding things to the ToC}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftlocalchange}
% |\cftmakelocalchange{|\meta{file}|}{|\meta{pnumwidth}|}{|\meta{tocrmarg}|}|
% makes an entry into \meta{file} to change the |\@pnumwidth| and
% the |\@tocrmarg| values.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\cftlocalchange}[3]{%
  \addtocontents{#1}{\protect\setpnumwidth{#2} \protect\setrmarg{#3}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftaddtitleline}
% |\cftaddtitleline{|\meta{file}|}{|\meta{kind}|}{|\meta{title}|}{|\meta{page}|}|
% adds a |\contentsline| entry to \meta{file} with the given information.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\cftaddtitleline}[4]{%
  \addtocontents{#1}{\protect\contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cftaddnumtitleline}
% |\cftaddtitleline{|\meta{file}|}{|\meta{kind}|}{|\meta{num}|}{|\meta{title}|}{|\meta{page}|}|
% adds a |\contentsline| entry to \meta{file} with the given information.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\cftaddnumtitleline}[5]{%
  \addtocontents{#1}%
    {\protect\contentsline{#2}{\protect\numberline{#3}{\protect\ignorespaces #4}}{#5}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsubsection{ToC and divisional numbering}
%
%  Commands are provided, based on the \Lpack{tocvsec2} package, for changing
% the section numbering level and the ToC entry level.
%
% \begin{macro}{\@setclcnt}
% Helper macro to set a sectioning-related counter. Use as
% |\@setclcnt{|\meta{sec}|}{|\meta{counter}|}| to set \Lcount{counter}
% to the level of \meta{sec}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@setclcnt}[2]{
  \@tempswafalse
  \nametest{#1}{none}
  \ifsamename
    \setcounter{#2}{-10}
    \@tempswatrue
  \fi
  \nametest{#1}{part}
  \ifsamename
    \setcounter{#2}{-1}
    \@tempswatrue
  \fi
  \nametest{#1}{chapter}
  \ifsamename
    \setcounter{#2}{0}
    \@tempswatrue
  \fi
  \nametest{#1}{section}
  \ifsamename
    \setcounter{#2}{1}
    \@tempswatrue
  \fi
  \nametest{#1}{subsection}
  \ifsamename
    \setcounter{#2}{2}
    \@tempswatrue
  \fi
  \nametest{#1}{subsubsection}
  \ifsamename
    \setcounter{#2}{3}
    \@tempswatrue
  \fi
  \nametest{#1}{paragraph}
  \ifsamename
    \setcounter{#2}{4}
    \@tempswatrue
  \fi
  \nametest{#1}{subparagraph}
  \ifsamename
    \setcounter{#2}{5}
    \@tempswatrue
  \fi
  \nametest{#1}{all}
  \ifsamename
    \setcounter{#2}{50}
    \@tempswatrue
  \fi
    \if@tempswa\else
    \ClassError{memoir}{%
      Unknown document division name (#1)
    }{%
      I'll ignore it. Type \space <return> and I'll continue.\MessageBreak
      If you haven't mistyped the name then use \protect\setcounter\space instead.}
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\settocdepth}
% |\settocdepth{|\meta{sec}|}| is the user command for setting 
% \Lcount{tocdepth} in the \file{.toc} file to the value corresponding to
% \meta{sec}. 
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Changed \cs{settocdepth} to use \cs{changetocdepth}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\settocdepth}[1]{%
  \@tempswafalse
  \nametest{#1}{none}
  \ifsamename
    \addtocontents{toc}{\changetocdepth{-10}}
    \@tempswatrue
  \fi
  \nametest{#1}{part}
  \ifsamename
    \addtocontents{toc}{\changetocdepth{-1}}
    \@tempswatrue
  \fi
  \nametest{#1}{chapter}
  \ifsamename
    \addtocontents{toc}{\changetocdepth{0}}
    \@tempswatrue
  \fi
  \nametest{#1}{section}
  \ifsamename
    \addtocontents{toc}{\changetocdepth{1}}
    \@tempswatrue
  \fi
  \nametest{#1}{subsection}
  \ifsamename
    \addtocontents{toc}{\changetocdepth{2}}
    \@tempswatrue
  \fi
  \nametest{#1}{subsubsection}
  \ifsamename
    \addtocontents{toc}{\changetocdepth{3}}
    \@tempswatrue
  \fi
  \nametest{#1}{paragraph}
  \ifsamename
    \addtocontents{toc}{\changetocdepth{4}}
    \@tempswatrue
  \fi
  \nametest{#1}{subparagraph}
  \ifsamename
    \addtocontents{toc}{\changetocdepth{5}}
    \@tempswatrue
  \fi
  \nametest{#1}{all}
  \ifsamename
    \addtocontents{toc}{\changetocdepth{50}}
    \@tempswatrue
  \fi
    \if@tempswa\else
    \ClassError{memoir}{%
      Unknown document division name (#1)
    }{%
      I'll ignore it. Type \space <return> and I'll continue.}
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\changetocdepth}
% Changes the |tocdepth| counter. Make it robust as it will be written
% to the *.toc file.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{changetocdepth}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand{\changetocdepth}[1]{\setcounter{tocdepth}{#1}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\maxtocdepth}
% |\maxtocdepth{|\meta{sec}|}| can be used to initialise \Lcount{tocdepth}
% to the value corresponding to \meta{sec}. This can only be used
% between the end of the preamble and the |\tableofcontents| command.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\maxtocdepth}[1]{%
  \@setclcnt{#1}{tocdepth}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% 
% \begin{macro}{\setsecnumdepth}
% |\setsecnumdepth{|\meta{sec}|}| is the user command for setting
% \Lcount{secnumdepth} to the value for \meta{sec}. It can only be used after
% the preamble.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setsecnumdepth}[1]{%\leavevmode%
  \@setclcnt{#1}{secnumdepth}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% 
% 
% \begin{macro}{\maxsecnumdepth}
% |\maxsecnumdepth{|\meta{sec}|}| can be used to initialise 
% \Lcount{secnumdepth}
% to the value corresponding to \meta{sec}.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Added maxsecnumdepth counter and modified \cs{maxsecnumdepth}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{maxsecnumdepth}
\newcommand{\maxsecnumdepth}[1]{%
  \@setclcnt{#1}{secnumdepth}\@setclcnt{#1}{maxsecnumdepth}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% 
%
%
% \subsection{Bibliography}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\bibindent}
% The \Lopt{open} bibliography uses an indentation of |\bibindent|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newdimen\bibindent
\setlength\bibindent{1.5em}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{environment}{bibitemlist}
%  The |thebibliography| environment starts a new document division. 
% Internally it tweaks some typesetting aspects; principally it
% uses |\sloppy| because good linebreaking is hard in a bibliography,
% and |\sfcode`\.=1000\relax| causes a full stop not to produce an
% end-of-sentence space. The implementation of the environment is
% based on the generic |list| environment, and uses the |\c@enumiv|
% counter for the labels. The following code is extracted from the
% \Lpack{book} class.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{bibitemlist}[1]{%
  \list{\@biblabel{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}%
       {\settowidth\labelwidth{\@biblabel{#1}}%
        \leftmargin\labelwidth
        \advance\leftmargin\labelsep
        \@openbib@code
        \usecounter{enumiv}%
        \let\p@enumiv\@empty
        \renewcommand\theenumiv{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}%
  \sloppy
  \clubpenalty4000
  \@clubpenalty \clubpenalty
  \widowpenalty4000%
  \sfcode`\.\@m}
  {\def\@noitemerr
    {\@latex@warning{Empty `thebibliography' environment}}%
    \endlist}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\newblock}
% The default is for |\newblock| to provide a small space.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\newblock}{\hskip .11em\@plus.33em\@minus.07em}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@openbib@code}
% This a an empty hook. It will be modified if the \Lopt{openbib}
% option is used.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\@openbib@code\@empty
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setbiblabel}
% \begin{macro}{\@biblabel}
% This is the user command for setting the label for a |\bibitem|. 
% The following sets the default definition.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\setbiblabel}[1]{%
  \renewcommand*{\@biblabel}[1]{#1}}
\setbiblabel{[#1]\hfill}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{environment}{thebibliography}
% The definition of the |thebibliography| environment in this class is not
% quite the same as in the standard classes. 
%
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Deleted starred version of thebibliography}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{thebibliography}[1]{%
  \chapter*{\bibname}
  \bibmark
  \ifnobibintoc\else
    \phantomsection
    \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\bibname}
  \fi
  \prebibhook
  \begin{bibitemlist}{#1}}{\end{bibitemlist}\postbibhook}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifnobibintoc}
% \begin{macro}{\bibintoc}
% \begin{macro}{\nobibintoc}
% Flag to control whether or not to add the bibliography title to the ToC,
% and declarations to set the flag.
% Default is to put the title into the ToC.
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Added \cs{ifnobibintoc}, etc.}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifnobibintoc
\newcommand*{\bibintoc}{\nobibintocfalse}
\newcommand*{\nobibintoc}{\nobibintoctrue}
\bibintoc

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\prebibhook}
% \begin{macro}{\postbibhook}
% These two macros are called just before starting the bib items and just
% after finishing them. By default they do nothing but can be changed
% by the user to give, say, some introductory information.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\prebibhook}{}
\newcommand{\postbibhook}{}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@cite}
% The output of the |\cite| command is produced by this macro. The default
% is used. The \Lpack{cite} package is a good way of changing this.
%    \begin{macrocode}
% \renewcommand*{\@cite}[1]{[#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
%
%  \subsection{The index}
%
% I allow for a single column index as well as the default double column.
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifonecolindex}
% TRUE for a one column index.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Added one column index}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifonecolindex
  \onecolindexfalse

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{environment}{theindex}
%    The environment `theindex' can be used for indices. It makes an
%    index with two columns, with each entry a separate paragraph. At
%    the user level the commands |\item|, |\subitem| and |\subsubitem|
%    are used to produce index entries of various levels. When a new
%    letter of the alphabet is encountered an amount of |\indexspace|
%    white space can be added.
%
%
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Deleted starred version of theindex}
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Changed Index pagestyle to chapter}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{theindex}{%
  \if@twocolumn
    \@restonecolfalse
  \else
    \@restonecoltrue
  \fi
  \ifonecolindex
    \onecolumn
    \chapter*{\indexname}
    \preindexhook
  \else
    \twocolumn[\@makeschapterhead{\indexname}
               \preindexhook]%
  \fi
  \indexmark
  \setlength{\columnseprule}{\indexrule}
  \setlength{\columnsep}{\indexcolsep}
  \ifnoindexintoc\else
    \phantomsection
    \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\indexname}
  \fi
  \thispagestyle{chapter}\parindent\z@
  \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax
  \let\item\@idxitem}
  {\if@restonecol\onecolumn\else\twocolumn\fi}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifnoindexintoc}
% \begin{macro}{\indexintoc}
% \begin{macro}{\noindexintoc}
% Flag to control whether or not to add the index title to the ToC,
% and declarations to set the flag.
% Default is to put the title into the ToC.
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Added \cs{ifnoindexintoc}, etc.}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifnoindexintoc
\newcommand*{\indexintoc}{\noindexintocfalse}
\newcommand*{\noindexintoc}{\noindexintoctrue}
\indexintoc

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\indexcolsep}
% \begin{macro}{\indexrule}
% These two lengths control the column separation and the thickness
% of the inter-column rule.
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Added \cs{indexcolsep} and \cs{indexrule}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\indexcolsep} \setlength{\indexcolsep}{35pt}
\newlength{\indexrule}   \setlength{\indexrule}{0pt}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\preindexhook}
% A macro that is called between the index heading and the start of the
% two columns. The user can modify it to add something.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\preindexhook}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\l@index}
%   Format the index entry in the table of contents.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\l@index}{\@dottedtocline{1}{0em}{0pt}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@idxitem}
% \begin{macro}{\subitem}
% \begin{macro}{\subsubitem}
%    Thsee macros are used to format the entries in the index. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@idxitem}  {\par\hangindent 40\p@}
\newcommand{\subitem}   {\par\hangindent 40\p@ \hspace*{20\p@}}
\newcommand{\subsubitem}{\par\hangindent 40\p@ \hspace*{30\p@}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\indexspace}
%    The amount of white space that is inserted between `letter
%    blocks' in the index.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\indexspace}{\par \vskip 10\p@ \@plus5\p@ \@minus3\p@\relax}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\makeindex}
% \begin{macro}{\index}
% \begin{macro}{\specialindex}
% This is a modified version of the kernel |\makeindex| to allow for
% multiple indexes. It also defines |\index| (which is a modified version
% of the standard |\index|) and |\specialindex|.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Indexing macros completely redone and extended}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\makeindex}[1][\jobname]{%
  \def\index{\@bsphack%
    \@ifnextchar [{\@index}{\@index[\jobname]}}
  \def\specialindex{\@bsphack\@spindex}%
  \if@filesw \expandafter\newwrite\csname #1@idxfile\endcsname
    \expandafter\immediate\openout \csname #1@idxfile\endcsname #1.idx\relax
    \typeout{Writing index file #1.idx }%
  \fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Initially define, but emasculate, |\index| and |\specialindex| which are
% defined properly by the user calling |\makeindex|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\index}[2][\jobname]{\@bsphack\@esphack}
\newcommand{\specialindex}[3]{\@bsphack\@esphack}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\printindex}
% The command to read an \file{ind} file.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\printindex}[1][\jobname]{\@input@{#1.ind}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifreportnoidxfile}
% \begin{macro}{\ifshowindexmark}
% Two booleans to control reporting on unknown \file{idx} files and
% displaying indexed items in the margin.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifreportnoidxfile
  \reportnoidxfilefalse
\newif\ifshowindexmark
  \showindexmarkfalse

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@index}
% |\@index[file]| is first stage of |\index|, handling the \file{idx} file.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@index[#1]{%
  \@ifundefined{#1@idxfile}%
  {\ifreportnoidxfile
     \ClassWarning{memoir}{Undefined index file #1}%
    \fi
    \begingroup
    \@sanitize
    \@nowrindex}%
  {\def\@idxfile{#1}%
   \begingroup
   \@sanitize
   \@wrindexm@m}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@nowrindex}
% Called when there is no \file{idx} file to throw away the indexed item.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@nowrindex}[1]{%
  \ifshowindexmark\@showidx{#1}\fi\endgroup\@esphack}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@wrindexm@m}
% \begin{macro}{\@@wrindexhyp}
% The next stage in index processing is |\@wrindexm@m{item}|, 
% which writes the \file{idx} file name
% and indexed item to the \file{aux} file. The |\@@wrindexhyp| macro
% provides hyperlinks in case the \Lpack{hyperref} package is used.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@wrindexm@m}[1]{\@@wrindexhyp#1||\\}
\def\@@wrindexhyp#1|#2|#3\\{%
  \ifshowindexmark\@showidx{#1}\fi
  \ifx\\#2\\%
    \protected@write\@auxout{}%
      {\string\@@wrindexm@m{\@idxfile}{#1|hyperpage}{\thepage}}%
  \else
    \def\Hy@temp@A{#2}%
    \ifx\Hy@temp@A\HyInd@ParenLeft
      \protected@write\@auxout{}%
        {\string\@@wrindexm@m{\@idxfile}{#1|#2hyperpage}{\thepage}}%
    \else
      \protected@write\@auxout{}%
        {\string\@@wrindexm@m{\@idxfile}{#1|#2}{\thepage}}%
    \fi
  \fi
  \endgroup
  \@esphack}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\hyperpage}
% \begin{macro}{\hyperlink}
% These are defined in the \Lpack{hyperref} package but we need them.
% other hyperstuff is only used if the package itself is used.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\hyperpage}[1]{#1}
\newcommand{\hyperlink}[2]{#2}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@@wrindexm@m}
% The macro |\@@wrindexm@m{file}{item}{page}| has been written into
% the \file{aux} file. It is normally defined so that it calls
% |\@@@wrindexm@m{item}{page}| to finally write to the \file{idx} file.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@@wrindexm@m}[1]{\begingroup
  \def\@idxfile{\@nameuse{#1@idxfile}}
  \@sanitize
  \@@@wrindexm@m}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@@@wrindexm@m}
% |\@@@wrindexm@m{item}{page}| writes the |\indexentry| to the \file{idx} file
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@@@wrindexm@m}[2]{%
  \immediate\write \@idxfile{\string\indexentry{#1}{#2}}%
  \endgroup}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The \file{aux} file is read both at the beginning and end of a document.
% |\@@@wrindexm@m| must be disabled after the first \file{aux} read so that
% items are not inserted twice into an \file{idx} file. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\AtBeginDocument{%
  \def\@@@wrindexm@m#1#2{\endgroup}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@spindex}
% Now do similar things for |\specialindex|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@spindex}[2]{%
  \@ifundefined{#1@idxfile}%
  {\ifreportnoidxfile
     \ClassWarning{memoir}{Undefined index file #1}%
    \fi
    \begingroup
    \@sanitize
    \@nowrindex}%
  {\def\@idxfile{#1}%
   \def\@sptheidx{#2}%
   \begingroup
   \@sanitize
   \@wrspindex}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@wrspindex}
% \begin{macro}{\@@wrspindexhyp}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@wrspindex}[1]{\@@wrspindexhyp#1||\\}
\def\@@wrspindexhyp#1|#2|#3\\{%
  \ifshowindexmark\@showidx{#1}\fi
  \ifx\\#2\\%
    \protected@write\@auxout{}%
      {\string\@@wrindexm@m{\@idxfile}{#1|hyperspindexpage(\thepage)}{\@nameuse{the\@sptheidx}}}%
  \else
    \def\Hy@temp@A{#2}%
    \ifx\Hy@temp@A\HyInd@ParenLeft
      \protected@write\@auxout{}%
        {\string\@@wrindexm@m{\@idxfile}{#1|#2hyperspindexpage(\thepage)}{\@nameuse{the\@sptheidx}}}%
    \else
      \protected@write\@auxout{}%
        {\string\@@wrindexm@m{\@idxfile}{#1|#2}{\@nameuse{the\@sptheidx}}}%
    \fi
  \fi
  \endgroup
  \@esphack}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\hyperpage}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\hyperspindexpage(#1)#2{\hyperlink{page.#1}{#2}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\see}
% \begin{macro}{\seename}
% \begin{macro}{\seealso}
% \begin{macro}{\alsoname}
% These definitions are taken from the \Lpack{makeidx} package.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\see}[2]{\emph{\seename} #1}
\newcommand*{\seename}{see}
\newcommand*{\seealso}[2]{\emph{\alsoname} #1}
\newcommand*{\alsoname}{see also}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\citeindexfile}
% For the \Lpack{natbib} package, and possibly other packages that do 
% some special indexing.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\citeindexfile}{\jobname}
\AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{natbib}{%
  \def\NAT@index{\index[\citeindexfile]{\NAT@idxtxt}}}{}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% The next part of the code is essentially the \Lpack{showidx} package.
% I tried putting index entries into marginoars but too many on a page
% led to the `too many floats' problem.
%
% \begin{macro}{\indexmarkstyle}
% \begin{macro}{\@indexbox}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newtoks\indexmarkstyle
  \indexmarkstyle{\normalfont\footnotesize\ttfamily}
\newinsert\@indexbox
  \dimen\@indexbox\maxdimen

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\begingroup
  \catcode`\@\active
  \expandafter\gdef\csname\string @sanitizeat\endcsname
  {\def @{\char`\@}}
\endgroup

%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@showidx}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@showidx}[1]{%
  \insert\@indexbox{%
    \@sanitizeat
    \the\indexmarkstyle
    \hsize\marginparwidth
    \hangindent\marginparsep \parindent\z@
    \everypar{}\let\par\@@par \parfillskip\@flushglue
    \lineskip\normallineskip
    \baselineskip .8\normalbaselineskip\sloppy
    \raggedright \leavevmode
    \vrule \@height .7\normalbaselineskip \@width \z@\relax
      #1\relax
    \vrule \@height \z@ \@depth .3\normalbaselineskip \@width \z@\relax
  }%
  \ifhmode\penalty\@M \hskip\z@skip\fi
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@leftidx}
% \begin{macro}{\@rightidx}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@leftidx}{\hskip-\marginparsep \hskip-\marginparwidth}
\newcommand{\@rightidx}{\hskip\columnwidth \hskip\marginparsep}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@mkidx}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@mkidx}{\vbox to \z@{%
  \rlap{%
    \if@twocolumn
      \if@firstcolumn \@leftidx \else \@rightidx \fi
    \else
      \if@twoside
        \ifodd\c@page \@rightidx \else \@leftidx \fi
      \else
        \@rightidx
      \fi
    \fi
    \box\@indexbox
  }%
  \vss
}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\raggedbottom}
% \begin{macro}{\flushbottom}
% \begin{macro}{\@texttop}
% These kernel macros need changing because of the new marginal insert.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\raggedbottom}{%
  \def\@textbottom{\vskip\z@ plus.0001fil}%
  \let\@texttop\@mkidx}
\renewcommand{\flushbottom}{%
  \let\@textbottom\relax
  \let\@texttop\@mkidx}
\let\@texttop\@mkidx

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%      
%
% \subsection{Footnotes}
%
% \begin{macro}{\footnoterule}
%    Usually, footnotes are separated from the main body of the text
%    by a small rule. This rule is drawn by the macro |\footnoterule|.
%    We have to make sure that the rule takes no vertical space (see
%    \file{plain.tex}) so we compensate for the natural heigth of the
%    rule of 0.4pt by adding the right amount of vertical skip.
%
%    To prevent the rule from colliding with the footnote we first add
%    a little negative vertical skip, then we put the rule and make
%    sure we end up at the same point where we begun this operation.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\footnoterule}{%
  \kern-3\p@
  \hrule width .4\columnwidth
  \kern 2.6\p@}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@footnote}
%    Footnotes are numbered per chapter. The counter is predefined.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@addtoreset{footnote}{chapter}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%    The footnote mechanism of \LaTeX{} calls the macro |\@makefntext|
%    to produce the actual footnote. The macro gets the text of the
%    footnote as its argument and should use |\@thefnmark| as the mark
%    of the footnote. The macro |\@makefntext| is called when
%    effectively inside a |\parbox| of width |\columnwidth| (i.e.,
%    with |\hsize| = |\columnwidth|).
%
%   An example of what can be achieved is given by the following piece
%   of TeX code.
% \begin{verbatim}
%          \long\def\@makefntext#1{%
%             \@setpar{\@@par
%                      \@tempdima = \hsize
%                      \advance\@tempdima-10pt
%                      \parshape \@ne 10pt \@tempdima}%
%             \par
%             \parindent 1em\noindent
%             \hbox to \z@{\hss\@makefnmark}#1}
% \end{verbatim}
%    The effect of this definition is that all lines of the footnote
%    are indented by 10pt, while the first line of a new paragraph is
%    indented by 1em. To change these dimensions, just substitute the
%    desired value for `10pt' (in both places) or `1em'.  The mark is
%    flushright against the footnote.
%
%    The standard classes use a simpler macro, in which the
%    footnote text is set like an ordinary text paragraph, with no
%    indentation except on the first line of a paragraph, and the
%    first line of the footnote. Thus, all the macro must do is set
%    |\parindent| to the appropriate value for succeeding paragraphs
%    and put the proper indentation before the mark.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \newcommand{\@makefntext}[1]{%
%     \parindent 1em%
%     \noindent
%     \hb@xt@1.8em{\hss\@makefnmark}#1}
% \end{verbatim}
%
% This class provides a configurable specification.
%
% \begin{macro}{\footmarkwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\footmarksep}
% \begin{macro}{\footparindent}
% The mark is typset right justified in a box with width |\footmarkwidth|.
% Second and later lines of the text are offset |\footmarksep| from the
% end of the box. Paragraphs in footnotes are indented by |\parindent|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\footmarkwidth}
\newlength{\footmarksep}
\newlength{\footparindent}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\footmarkstyle}
% \begin{macro}{\footscript}
% The marker is typeset according to |\footscript|\marg{marker}. This
% can be specified by the user via |\footmarkstyle|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\footmarkstyle}[1]{\def\footscript##1{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\makefootmarkhook}
% A vacuous macro that thye user can redefine to do something useful?
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\makefootmarkhook}{}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\footfootmark}
% This macro typesets the footnote marker.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\footfootmark}{%
  \ifdim\footmarkwidth < \z@
%    \end{macrocode}
% Negative width, mark is in the margin.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \llap{\hb@xt@ -\footmarkwidth{\hss\normalfont\footscript{\@thefnmark}}%
          \hspace*{-\footmarkwidth}}%
  \else
    \ifdim\footmarkwidth = \z@
%    \end{macrocode}
% Zero width, mark is at (inside) the margin.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      {\normalfont\footscript{\@thefnmark}}%
    \else
%    \end{macrocode}
% Positive width.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \hb@xt@\footmarkwidth{\hss\normalfont\footscript{\@thefnmark}}%
    \fi
  \fi}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\makefootmark}
% \begin{macro}{\@makefntext}
% The class version of |\@makefntext|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\makefootmark}[1]{%
  \leavevmode
  \parindent \footparindent\noindent
  \leftskip\footmarksep\relax
  \advance\leftskip \footmarkwidth \null\nobreak\hskip -\leftskip\relax
  \makefootmarkhook\relax
  \footfootmark #1}
\newcommand{\@makefntext}[1]{\makefootmark{#1}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% All that now remains for the footer part is to set the defaults.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\footmarkstyle{\textsuperscript{#1}}
\setlength{\footmarkwidth}{1.8em}
\setlength{\footmarksep}{-1.8em}
\setlength{\footparindent}{1em}

%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@makefnmark}
%    The footnote markers that are printed in the text to point to the
%    footnotes should be produced by the macro |\@makefnmark|. We use
%    the default definition for it.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%\renewcommand\@makefnmark{\hbox{\@textsuperscript{%
%                                \normalfont\@thefnmark}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\footref}
%    Sometimes it is desireable to reference a footnote more than
% once.
%    If a footnote is labelled (e.g., |\footnote{text\label{fn}}|) then
% the macro |\footref|\marg{fn} will print the footnote marker.
% The code is essentially a much simplified version of |\footnotemark|
% from file{ltfloat.dtx}.
% \changes{v1.0}{2001/10/30}{Added \cs{footref}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\footref}[1]{%
  \begingroup
    \unrestored@protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\ref{#1}}%
  \endgroup
  \@footnotemark}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% The following code for footnotes that can include verbatims is based
% on Jeremy Gibbons \textit{`Footnotes with verbatim material'}
% in the column \textit{`Hey --- it works'} (edited by Jeremy Gibbons), 
% TeX and TUG NEWS, vol 2 no. 4, p 9, October 1993. I have updated
% the basic code so that it works for LaTeX2e.
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbfootnote}
% \begin{macro}{\@xverbfootnote}
% |\verbfootnote| is just like |\footnote| except that it can contain
% verbatim material.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbfootnote{\@ifnextchar[\@xverbfootnote{\stepcounter\@mpfn
  \protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thempfn}%
  \@footnotemark\@verbfootnotetext}}

\def\@xverbfootnote[#1]{%
  \begingroup
    \csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname #1\relax
    \unrestored@protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thempfn}%
  \endgroup
  \@footnotemark\@verbfootnotetext}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@verbfootnotetext}
% This is the secret ingredient. It is based on the |\footnote| macro
% in the TeXbook page 363, which somehow manages to read an argument 
% with verbatims. As Knuth says that it is subtle and involves trickery,
% don't expect me to even try to explain anything. 
%
% I'm not at all sure about the color bits, though!
%    \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\@verbfootnotetext{%
  \insert\footins\bgroup
    \footnotesize
    \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
    \splittopskip\footnotesep
    \splitmaxdepth \dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty \@MM
    \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
    \edef\@currentlabel{\csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
    \color@begingroup    
    \@makefntext{\rule{\z@}{\footnotesep}\ignorespaces}%
    \futurelet\next\fo@t
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\fo@t}
% \begin{macro}{\f@@t}
% \begin{macro}{\f@t}
% \begin{macro}{\@foot}
% Guess what these do.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\fo@t{\ifcat\bgroup\noexpand\next \let\next\f@@t
          \else \let\next\f@t\fi \next}
\def\f@@t{\bgroup\aftergroup\@foot\let\next}
\def\f@t#1{#1\@foot}
\def\@foot{\strut\egroup\color@endgroup}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@verbmpfootnotetext}
%    Footnotes in minipages are a little different, so another
% version of |\...footnotetext|. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\@verbmpfootnotetext{%
  \global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox{%
    \reset@font\footnotesize
    \unvbox\@mpfootins
    \bgroup
    \hsize\columnwidth
    \@parboxrestore
    \edef\@currentlabel{\csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
    \color@begingroup
    \@makefntext{\rule{\z@}{\footnotesep}\ignorespaces}%
    }
    \futurelet\next\fo@t
} 

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@minipagerestore}
% To get the |\verbfootnote| to work in a |minipage| we have to use
% |\@verbmpfootnotetext| instead of |\\@verbfootnotetext|. There is
% a nice hook in the kernel |minipage| code for this.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@minipagerestore{\let\@verbfootnotetext\@verbmpfootnotetext}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}                      
%
%    For my reference, in case I want to fiddle with it even more
% than I have already done so, here is the kernel code (from ltfloat.dtx) 
% for footnotes.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \newinsert\footins
%   \skip\footins=\bigskipamount
%   \count\footins=1000
%   \dimen\footins=8in
%
% \def\footnoterule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule \@width 2in \kern 2.6\p@}
%
% \@definecounter{footnote}
%   \def\thefootnote{\@arabic\c@footnote}
% \@definecounter{mpfootnote}
%   \def\thempfootnote{\itshape\@alph\c@mpfootnote}
% \def\@makefnmark{\hbox{\@textsuperscript{\normalfont\@thefnmark}}}
%
% \DeclareRobustCommand*\textsuperscript[1]{%
%    \@textsuperscript{\selectfont#1}}
% \def\@textsuperscript#1{%
%    {\m@th\ensuremath{^{\mbox{\fontsize\sf@size\z@#1}}}}}
%
% \newdimen\footnotesep
%
% \def\footnote{\@ifnextchar[\@xfootnote{\stepcounter\@mpfn
%   \protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thempfn}%
%   \@footnotemark\@footnotetext}}
% 
% \def\@xfootnote[#1]{%
%   \begingroup
%     \csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname #1\relax
%     \unrestored@protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thempfn}%
%   \endgroup
%   \@footnotemark\@footnotetext}
% 
% \long\def\@footnotetext#1{%
%   \insert\footins{%
%     \reset@font\footnotesize
%     \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
%     \splittopskip\footnotesep
%     \splitmaxdepth \dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty \@MM
%     \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
%     \protected@edef\@currentlabel{\csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
%     \color@begingroup
%       \@makefntext{\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces#1\@finalstrut\strutbox}%
%     \color@endgroup}}
%
% \def\footnotemark{%
%    \@ifnextchar[\@xfootnotemark
%      {\stepcounter{footnote}%
%       \protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thefootnote}%
%       \@footnotemark}}
%
% \def\@xfootnotemark[#1]{%
%    \begingroup
%      \c@footnote #1\relax
%      \unrestored@protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thefootnote}%
%    \endgroup
%    \@footnotemark}
%
% \def\@footnotemark{%
%    \leavevmode
%    \ifhmode\edef\@x@sf{\the\spacefactor}\nobreak\fi
%    \@makefnmark
%    \ifhmode\spacefactor\@x@sf\fi
%    \relax}
% 
% \def\footnotetext{%
%    \@ifnextchar [\@xfootnotenext
%       {\protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thempfn}%
%       \@footnotetext}}
%
% \def\@xfootnotenext[#1]{%
%   \begingroup
%     \csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname #1\relax
%     \unrestored@protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thempfn}%
%   \endgroup
%   \@footnotetext}
%
% \def\@mpfn{footnote}
% \def\thempfn{\thefootnote}
% \end{verbatim}
% And from ltboxes.dtx for the |minipage| environment. When setting up
% the environment, it includes:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \def\@mpfn{mpfootnote}\def\thempfn{\thempfootnote}\c@mpfootnote\z@
% \let\@footnotetext\@mpfootnotetext
% \end{verbatim}
% Later it defines:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \long\def\@mpfootnotetext#1{%
%   \global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox{%
%     \unvbox\@mpfootins
%     \reset@font\footnotesize
%     \hsize\columnwidth
%     \@parboxrestore
%     \protected@edef\@currentlabel{\csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
%     \color@begingroup
%       \@makefntext{\rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces#1\@finalstrut\strutbox}%
%     \color@endgroup}}
% \end{verbatim}
%
%
%
% \section{Change marks} \label{sec:vct}
%
%    When preparing a manuscript it normally goes through
%    several iterations. The commands provided may be used to identify
%    changes made to a document during its life cycle.
%
% The code for this part of the class is based on the version
% controls in the \Lpack{iso} class~\cite{ISOCLASS}.
%
% \subsection{Print control}
%
%    Members of the development group often need to see the changes
%    between document versions, while the general public does not.
% \begin{macro}{\ifchangemarks}
%    This controls the appearence of the version controls defined
%    below.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifchangemarks\changemarksfalse
%    \end{macrocode}
%   The marks only work properly when the |draft| option
%   is in effect. Also, the command |\changemarkstrue| must be
%   put in the document preamble.
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\v@rid}
%    This acts as an alias for |\marginpar| when both |changemarks| is
%    true and the |draft| option is in effect, otherwise it throws
%    away its two arguments.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Added \cs{@bsphack} and \cs{@esphack} to \cs{v@rid}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\v@rid}[2]{%
  \@bsphack
  \ifchangemarks
     \ifdraftdoc
       \marginpar[#1]{#2}%
  \fi\fi
  \@esphack}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Change marking}
%
%    The following commands flag changes in the typeset document. Each of
%    the commands takes one parameter which is intended to be a 
%    `change number' or comment for tracking purposes. A symbol and
% the \meta{change-id} is put into the margin near where the command 
% is given. The marking commands should be attached to some word or 
% punctuation mark in the text otherwise extraneous spaces may creep
% into the final document.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Added \cs{@bsphack} and \cs{@esphack} to changemarks}
% \begin{macro}{\added}
%    |\added{|\meta{change-id}|}|
%    Flags, with the symbol $\oplus$, that something has been added 
% to the manuscript.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\added}[1]{%
  \@bsphack
  \ifchangemarks
    \v@rid{\small$\oplus$ #1}{\small$\oplus$ #1}%
  \fi
  \@esphack}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\deleted}
%    |\deleted{|\meta{change-id}|}|
%    Flags, with the symbol $\neq$, that something has been deleted 
% from the manuscript.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\deleted}[1]{%
  \@bsphack
  \ifchangemarks
    \v@rid{\small$\neq$ #1}{\small$\neq$ #1}%
  \fi
  \@esphack}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\changed}
%    |\changed{|\meta{change-id}|}|
%    Flags, with the symbol $\Leftrightarrow$,  that something
% has been changed in the text.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\changed}[1]{%
  \@bsphack
  \ifchangemarks
    \v@rid{\small$\Leftrightarrow$ #1}{\small$\Leftrightarrow$ #1}%
  \fi
  \@esphack}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \section{Trimming marks}
%
% The \Lopt{showtrims} options prints trimming marks at the corners
% of the logical page. The code for this comes from ideas gleaned
% from Martin Schr\"{o}der's \Lpack{everyshi} package~\cite{EVERYSHI}
% and Melchior Franz's \Lpack{crop} package~\cite{CROP}. 
% The implementation and any errors are mine.
%
%    The implementation up to October 2002 was limited to putting a cross
% at the page corners. The manual directed users to the \Lpack{crop}
% packge if they wanted anything more. In October 2002 the implementation
% was substantially extended. The background to this is below.
%
%    Before the release of version 1.7 of \Lpack{crop} in May 2002 its
% author asked me to make some changes to \Lpack{memoir} that would be
% helpful to him, and I did so. Later he told me that the changes were
% unnecessary and I reverted to the original \Lpack{memoir} code.
%
%    On 2002/10/06 Peter Heslin (\url{peter.heslin@ucd.ie}) started a
% thread on \url{comp.text.tex} titled `Incompatibility of memoir.cls 
% and crop.sty' in which he said that \Lpack{memoir} and \Lpack{crop}
% did not seem to work together. The following are some snippets from
% that thread, identified by the various proponents.
% \begin{description}
% \item[crop] Ah, yes. It cannot work with all those |\settrims| etc.
%             crop.sty does only respect |\stock{width,height}|,
%             but none of the other memoir specific trim marks stuff \ldots
%
% \item[crop] \ldots I'm not a memoir expert. crop.sty respects all the
%  usual LaTeX paper dimensions and simply puts the marks around the
% page. It works with all standard classes and the KOMA classes. memoir
% seems to do things completely differently \ldots
%
%    Sorry, but I'm afraid I have to pass the problem to the memoir
% author. \ldots
%
% \item[memoir] I will try and take a look at the problem but I'm
%  not a crop expert --- I've never used it. However it seems odd to
% me that crop doesn't work with memopir. Memoir provides a different
% interface for specifying the page layout but then translates everything
% to the standard length variables. \ldots
%
% \item[crop] You've just taken code from it |...:->|
%
%    crop doesn't have its own idea at all. It just uses that of DEK
% and LaTeX, which says, that the reference point of the output box
% in the output routine is assumed 1 inch to the left [later corrected 
% to right] and 1 inch down
% from the upper left (virtual) paper corner.
%
% \item[crop] With other words: crop changes |\hoffset| and |\voffset|,
% in order to center the logical (virtual) page on the physical sheet
% of paper, in the middle of the crop marks. The length macros 
% |\evensidemargin| and |\oddsidemargin| are unchanged and refer still 
% to the logical page (modulo 1 inch).
%
%    The memoir class, in contrast (mis)uses the LaTeX margins
% |\even(odd)sidemargin| for that purpose.
%
%    Thus, the meaning of |\even(odd)sidemargin| is different
% in both packages.
% \end{description}
%
%     Given all the above I concluded that \Lpack{crop} would remain
% as it was, and that in order to satisfy Peter Heslin I would have
% to extend the trimming marks. The following is limited to extensions
% asked for by Peter Heslin.
%
% \begin{macro}{\trimmark}
% This is a cross 
% in a zero sized picture for marking the corner of a logical page. Up to 
% version 1.0 the macro used |\setlength| for adjusting the |\unitlength|
% but Henrik Holm\footnote{Message to CTT on 2002/01/04 
% (\texttt{h.holm@spray.no})} discovered that if the \Lpack{calc} package
% is used then LaTeX complains about a missing number.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2002/01/04}{Removed \cs{setlength} from \cs{trimmark}. Stops
%                 problem with the calc package.}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\trimmark}{%
  \begin{picture}(0,0)
    \unitlength 1cm
    \thinlines
    \put(-2,0){\line(1,0){4}}
    \put(0,-2){\line(0,1){4}}
  \end{picture}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\Ltrimpictl}
% \begin{macro}{\Ltrimpictr}
% \begin{macro}{\Ltrimpicbl}
% \begin{macro}{\Ltrimpicbr}
%  `L' shaped trim marks for four corners.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Added \cs{Ltrimpictl}, \cs{Ltrimpictr}, \cs{Ltrimpicbl}
%                            and \cs{Ltrimpicbr}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\Ltrimpictl}{%
  \begin{picture}(0,0)
    \unitlength 1mm
    \thinlines
    \put(-2,0){\line(-1,0){18}}
    \put(0,2){\line(0,1){18}}
  \end{picture}}
\newcommand*{\Ltrimpictr}{%
  \begin{picture}(0,0)
    \unitlength 1mm
    \thinlines
    \put(2,0){\line(1,0){18}}
    \put(0,2){\line(0,1){18}}
  \end{picture}}
\newcommand*{\Ltrimpicbl}{%
  \begin{picture}(0,0)
    \unitlength 1mm
    \thinlines
    \put(-2,0){\line(-1,0){18}}
    \put(0,-2){\line(0,-1){18}}
  \end{picture}}
\newcommand*{\Ltrimpicbr}{%
  \begin{picture}(0,0)
    \unitlength 1mm
    \thinlines
    \put(2,0){\line(1,0){18}}
    \put(0,-2){\line(0,-1){18}}
  \end{picture}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\Ftrimpicbl}
%    Frame the page.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Added \cs{Ftrimpictl}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\Ftrimpicbl}{%
  \begin{picture}(0,0)
    \unitlength 1pt
    \thinlines
    \put(0,0){\framebox(\strip@pt\paperwidth,\strip@pt\paperheight){}}
  \end{picture}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\tmarktl}
% \begin{macro}{\tmarktr}
% \begin{macro}{\tmarkbl}
% \begin{macro}{\tmarkbr}
% The trimming marks used for corner display.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Added \cs{tmarktl}, \cs{tmarktr}, \cs{tmarkbl}
%                            and \cs{tmarkbr}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\tmarktl}{\trimmark} 
\newcommand*{\tmarktr}{\trimmark} 
\newcommand*{\tmarkbl}{\trimmark} 
\newcommand*{\tmarkbr}{\trimmark} 

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\tmarktm}
% \begin{macro}{\tmarkml}
% \begin{macro}{\tmarkmr}
% \begin{macro}{\tmarkbm}
% The trimming marks used for mid-side display.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Added \cs{tmarktm}, \cs{tmarkml}, \cs{tmarkmr}
%                            and \cs{tmarkbm}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\tmarktm}{}
\newcommand*{\tmarkml}{}
\newcommand*{\tmarkmr}{}
\newcommand*{\tmarkbm}{}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\trimXmarks}
% \begin{macro}{\trimLmarks}
% \begin{macro}{\trimFrame}
% \begin{macro}{\trimNone}
% These are declarations for the different kinds of trimming marks.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Added \cs{trimXmarks}, \cs{trimLmarks}, 
%                            \cs{trimFrame} and \cs{trimNone}} 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\trimXmarks}{%
  \let\tmarktl\trimmark
  \let\tmarktr\trimmark
  \let\tmarkbl\trimmark
  \let\tmarkbr\trimmark
}
\newcommand*{\trimLmarks}{%
  \let\tmarktl\Ltrimpictl
  \let\tmarktr\Ltrimpictr
  \let\tmarkbl\Ltrimpicbl
  \let\tmarkbr\Ltrimpicbr
}
\newcommand*{\trimFrame}{%
  \let\tmarktl\null
  \let\tmarktr\null
  \let\tmarkbl\Ftrimpicbl
  \let\tmarkbr\null
}
\newcommand*{\trimNone}{%
  \let\tmarktl\relax
  \let\tmarktr\relax
  \let\tmarkbl\relax
  \let\tmarkbr\relax
  \let\tmarktm\relax
  \let\tmarkml\relax
  \let\tmarkmr\relax
  \let\tmarkbm\relax
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\trimmarks}
%    This positions four marks (|\trimmark|) at the corners of a
% logical page. It is basically a |\vbox| with zero height and width.
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Changed \cs{trimmarks} to work properly with the oneside option}
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Changed \cs{trimmarks} to use \cs{tmarktl}, etc.,
%                            instead of four \cs{trimmark}s}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\trimmarks}{%   
  \vbox to \z@{\vskip-1in \vskip\trimtop % top of logical page
    \hb@xt@\z@{\hskip-1in
      \ifodd\c@page 
        \hskip\stockwidth \hskip-\trimedge \hskip-\paperwidth
      \else 
        \if@twoside
          \hskip\trimedge  % left of logical page
        \else
          \hskip\stockwidth \hskip-\trimedge \hskip-\paperwidth
        \fi
      \fi
      \vbox to \paperheight{%
        \hb@xt@\paperwidth{\tmarktl\hfil\tmarktm\hfil\tmarktr}%
        \vfil
        \hb@xt@\paperwidth{\tmarkml\hfil\tmarkmr}%
        \vfil
        \hb@xt@\paperwidth{\tmarkbl\hfil\tmarkbm\hfil\tmarkbr}}%
    \hss}%
  \vss}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@sheetsequence}
% Peter Heslin asked for the ability to add a sequential page number
% (1 for the first page, N for the last page, no matter what value
% the page counter has) to the trimming marks.
%
%    |\c@sheetsequence| is a new counter for pages starting at the 
% beginning and independent
% of the standard page counter. This should not be reset by anything.
% The counter increment has to be added to the output routine.
%
%     This may also be useful for page N of M numbering.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/10/10}{Added sheetsequence counter.}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{sheetsequence}
  \setcounter{sheetsequence}{1}
  \renewcommand{\thesheetsequence}{\@arabic\c@sheetsequence}
\g@addto@macro{\@outputpage}{\stepcounter{sheetsequence}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\c@lastsheet}
% \begin{macro}{\c@lastpage}
% While we're at it, might as well provide for lastpage and lastsheet counters
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added lastsheet and lastpage functions.}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{lastsheet}
  \setcounter{lastsheet}{0}
\newcounter{lastpage}
  \setcounter{lastpage}{0}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\dol@stsheet}
% \begin{macro}{\dol@stpage}
% These two macros write the values of lastsheet and lastpage to the
% \file{aux} file. They have to be called at the end of the document
% after a |\clearpage| to flush out any floats.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\dol@stsheet}{\addtocounter{sheetsequence}{-1}%
  \immediate\write\@auxout%
    {\string\setcounter{lastsheet}{\thesheetsequence}}%
  \stepcounter{sheetsequence}}
\newcommand{\dol@stpage}{\addtocounter{page}{-1}%
  \immediate\write\@auxout%
    {\string\setcounter{lastpage}{\thepage}}%
  \stepcounter{page}}
\AtEndDocument{\clearpage\dol@stsheet\dol@stpage}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%    Any marks are put onto the pages by adding to the |\shipout|
% routine.
%
% \begin{macro}{\mem@oldshipout}
% Keep a copy of the current version of |\shipout| in |\mem@oldshipout|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\mem@oldshipout\shipout
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\mem@shipi}
% \begin{macro}{\mem@shipii}
% Effectively these will add the |\trimmarks| to the box holding
% the contents of the page.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\mem@shipi}{%
  \ifvoid\@cclv\expandafter\aftergroup\fi\mem@shipii}
\newcommand*\mem@shipii{\mem@oldshipout\vbox{\trimmarks\unvbox\@cclv}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\shipout}
% Our new version of |\shipout|, which is only needed for the 
% \Lopt{showtrims} option. This adds |\mem@shipi| to the page box
% which then calls the original version of |\shipout|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifshowtrims
  \renewcommand*{\shipout}{\afterassignment\mem@shipi\setbox\@cclv=}
\fi

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \section{Titles and abstracts}
%
% \subsection{Titles}
%
%    After some thought I decided to add in the code from the 
% \Lpack{titling} package~\cite{TITLING}. However, in this case life
% is a bit simpler as there is no pre-existing class code.
% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Added titling code}
%
% \begin{macro}{\pretitle}
% \begin{macro}{\@bspretitle}
% \begin{macro}{\posttitle}
% \begin{macro}{\@bsposttitle}
% \begin{macro}{\preauthor}
% \begin{macro}{\@bspreauthor}
% \begin{macro}{\postauthor}
% \begin{macro}{\@bspostauthor}
% \begin{macro}{\predate}
% \begin{macro}{\@bspredate}
% \begin{macro}{\postdate}
% \begin{macro}{\@bspostdate}
%    To provide some flexibilty in the titling style of the document,
% user level commands are provided that can be changed to reconfigure
% the appearance resulting from |\maketitle|. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\pretitle}[1]{\def\@bspretitle{#1}}
\newcommand{\posttitle}[1]{\def\@bsposttitle{#1}}
\newcommand{\preauthor}[1]{\def\@bspreauthor{#1}}
\newcommand{\postauthor}[1]{\def\@bspostauthor{#1}}
\newcommand{\predate}[1]{\def\@bspredate{#1}}
\newcommand{\postdate}[1]{\def\@bspostdate{#1}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% These are defined initially
% to mimic the normal \LaTeX{} style.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \pretitle{\begin{center}\LARGE}
  \posttitle{\par\end{center}\vskip 0.5em}
  \preauthor{\begin{center}
    \large \lineskip .5em%
    \begin{tabular}[t]{c}}
  \postauthor{\end{tabular}\par\end{center}}
  \predate{\begin{center}\large}
  \postdate{\par\end{center}}

%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\maketitlehooka}
% \begin{macro}{\maketitlehookb}
% \begin{macro}{\maketitlehookc}
% \begin{macro}{\maketitlehookd}
% The four hooks which will be called by |\maketitle|. These are initially
% vacuous.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\maketitlehooka}{}
\newcommand{\maketitlehookb}{}
\newcommand{\maketitlehookc}{}
\newcommand{\maketitlehookd}{}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\thanksmarkseries}
% \begin{macro}{\@bsmarkseries}
% \begin{macro}{\symbolthanksmark}
%  These are for specifying the kind of series for thanks markers.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\thanksmarkseries}[1]{%
  \def\@bsmarkseries{\renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\@nameuse{#1}{footnote}}}}
\newcommand{\symbolthanksmark}{\thanksmarkseries{\fnsymbol}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\continuousmarks}
% \begin{macro}{\@bscontmark}
% These are for (non) zeroing of the footnote counter.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@bscontmark}{\setcounter{footnote}{0}}
\newcommand{\continuousmarks}{\def\@bscontmark{}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\thanksheadextra}
% \begin{macro}{\@bsthanksheadpre}
% \begin{macro}{\@bsthanksheadpost}
% These are for inserting stuff before and after a mark in the titling.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\thanksheadextra}[2]{%
  \def\@bsthanksheadpre{#1}%
  \def\@bsthanksheadpost{#2}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\thanksfootextra}
% These are for inserting stuff before and after a thanks mark in the 
% footnoting.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/10}{Deprecated \cs{thanksfootextra}}
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/10}{Removed \cs{thanksfootpre} and \cs{thanksfootpost}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\thanksfootextra}[2]{%
  \ClassWarning{memoir}{Use \protect\thanksmarkstyle\space instead of
                        \protect\thanksfootextra}%
%%%%  \def\thanksfootpre{#1}%
%%%%  \def\thanksfootpost{#2}
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\thanksmark}
% This adds a thanks mark. The |\footnotemark| could have been used directly
% but it is fragile in a moving argument.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand{\thanksmark}[1]{\footnotemark[#1]}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\thanksgap}
% This specifies some horizontal space.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\thanksgap}[1]{\hspace{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\tamark}
% This stores the current definition of |\@thefnmark|. For some reason
% using |\@thefnmark| directly only gave the last value.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\tamark}{\@thefnmark}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\thanksmarkwidth}
% A length determining the size of the box for typesetting
% a thanks marker.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\thanksmarkwidth}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\thanksmarksep}
% A length determining the inset of thanks footnotes.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/10}{Replaced \cs{thanksmargin} by \cs{thanksmarksep}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\thanksmarksep}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\thanksmarkstyle}
% \begin{macro}{\thanksscript}
% |\thanksscript| is a wrapper round the actual mark stuff to be typeset. 
% The user can define this via |\thanksmarkstyle|\marg{code}.
% The default is a superscript mark.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/10}{Added \cs{thanksmarkstyle}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\thanksmarkstyle}[1]{\def\thanksscript##1{#1}}
\thanksmarkstyle{\textsuperscript{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\makethanksmarkhook}
% A vacuous macro used as a hook into |\makethanksmark|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\makethanksmarkhook}{}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\thanksfootmark}
% This typesets the thanks footnote mark.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/10}{Complete rewrite of \cs{thanksfootmark}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\thanksfootmark}{%
  \ifdim\thanksmarkwidth < \z@
%    \end{macrocode}
% Negative width, mark is in the margin.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \llap{\hb@xt@ -\thanksmarkwidth{\hss\normalfont\thanksscript{\tamark}}%
          \hspace*{-\thanksmarkwidth}}%
  \else
    \ifdim\thanksmarkwidth = \z@
%    \end{macrocode}
% Zero width, mark is at (inside) the margin.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      {\normalfont\thanksscript{\tamark}}%
    \else
%    \end{macrocode}
% Positive width.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \hb@xt@\thanksmarkwidth{\hss\normalfont\thanksscript{\tamark}}%
    \fi
  \fi}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\makethanksmark}
% This sets the general indentations for the thanks footnote, 
% and typesets the mark. The code is a simplified version of that
% for typesetting ToC entries.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/10}{Minor changes to \cs{makethanksmark}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\makethanksmark}{%
  \leavevmode%
  \parindent 1em\noindent
  \leftskip\thanksmarksep\relax
  \advance\leftskip \thanksmarkwidth \null\nobreak\hskip -\leftskip\relax
  \makethanksmarkhook\relax
  \thanksfootmark}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\usethanksrule}
% \begin{macro}{\cancelhanksrule}
%  Simple macros that let |\footnoterule| to another rule definition.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\usethanksrule}{\let\footnoterule\thanksrule}
\newcommand{\cancelthanksrule}{\let\footnoterule\@bsfootnoterule}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%    Now set up the rest of the thanks defaults, styling having been
% done earlier.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\thanksmarkseries{fnsymbol}  % symbols
\thanksheadextra{}{}
\setlength{\thanksmarkwidth}{1.8em}
\setlength{\thanksmarksep}{-\thanksmarkwidth}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\thanksrule}
% \begin{macro}{\@bsfootnoterule}
% These are saved versions of the |\footnoterule| definition as it
% is at the end of the preamble.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\AtBeginDocument{%
  \let\thanksrule\footnoterule
  \let\@bsfootnoterule\footnoterule
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\droptitle}
% A titling block has |\droptitle| amount of additional vertical space 
% above it (normally zero).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\droptitle}
\setlength{\droptitle}{0pt}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\maketitle}
% The following is a
% modification of |\maketitle| as in the \Lpack{article}, \Lpack{report},
% and \Lpack{book} classes. It sets the pagestyle to \pstyle{title}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\maketitle}{\par
  \begingroup
    \@bsmarkseries
    \def\@makefnmark{\rlap{\@textsuperscript{%
       \normalfont\@bsthanksheadpre \tamark \@bsthanksheadpost}}}%
    \long\def\@makefntext##1{\makethanksmark ##1}
    \if@twocolumn
      \ifnum \col@number=\@ne
        \@maketitle
      \else
        \twocolumn[\@maketitle]%
      \fi
    \else
      \newpage
      \global\@topnum\z@
      \@maketitle
    \fi
    \thispagestyle{title}\@thanks
  \endgroup
  \@bscontmark  %  \setcounter{footnote}{0}%
  }
\aliaspagestyle{title}{plain}

%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@maketitle}
% Our version of |\@maketitle|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@maketitle}{%               
  \newpage
  \null
  \vskip 2em%
        \vspace*{\droptitle}
  \maketitlehooka
  {\@bspretitle \@title \@bsposttitle}
  \maketitlehookb
  {\@bspreauthor \@author \@bspostauthor}
  \maketitlehookc
  {\@bspredate \@date \@bspostdate}
  \maketitlehookd
  \par
  \vskip 1.5em}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{environment}{titlingpage}
%  The |titlingpage| environment sets the pagestyle to be \pstyle{titlingpage},
% disables the footnote rule and ensures that the page is single
% column. At the end it switches back to twocolumn if neccessary,
% and then starts a new page as number 1.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{titlingpage}%
  {\let\footnoterule\relax
   \let\footnotesize\small
   \if@twocolumn
     \@restonecoltrue\onecolumn
   \else
     \@restonecolfalse
   \fi
   \thispagestyle{titlingpage}%
   \setcounter{page}{\@ne}%
  }{%
   \thispagestyle{titlingpage}%
   \if@restonecol \twocolumn \fi
   \if@twoside \cleardoublepage \else \clearpage \fi
   \setcounter{page}{\@ne}}
\aliaspagestyle{titlingpage}{empty}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\emptythanks}
% This macro discards all prior |\thanks| texts.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\emptythanks}{\global\let\@thanks\@empty}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@bsmtitlempty}
%    |\@bsmtitlempty| is a helper macro to save some macro space. 
% It empties some elements of |\maketitle|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@bsmtitlempty}{%
  \global\let\maketitle\relax
  \global\let\@maketitle\relax
  \global\let\title\relax
  \global\let\author\relax
  \global\let\date\relax
  \global\let\thanksmarkseries\relax
  \global\let\thanksheadextra\relax
  \global\let\thanksfootextra\relax
  \global\let\thanksmark\relax
  \global\let\thanksgap\relax
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\keepthetitle}
% This macro undefines all the titling commands except for
% |\thetitle|, |\theauthor| and |\thedate|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\keepthetitle}{%
  \@bsmtitlempty
  \global\let\thanks\relax
  \global\let\and\relax
  \global\let\@thanks\@empty
  \global\let\@title\@empty
  \global\let\@author\@empty
  \global\let\@date\@empty
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\killtitle}
% |\killtitle| undefines the remaining macros of |\maketitle|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\killtitle}{%
  \keepthetitle
  \global\let\thetitle\relax
  \global\let\theauthor\relax
  \global\let\thedate\relax
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% 
% \begin{macro}{\thetitle}
% \begin{macro}{\theauthor}
% \begin{macro}{\thedate}
%    In order to make the |\title|, etc., values available for printing
% their definitions (in \file{ltsect.dtx}) need extending to save their 
% arguments. We have to make sure that extraneous material,
% like |\thanks|, is excluded from the saved texts.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\addtoiargdef{\title}{}{%
  \begingroup
    \renewcommand{\thanks}[1]{}
    \renewcommand{\thanksmark}[1]{}
    \renewcommand{\thanksgap}[1]{}
    \protected@xdef\thetitle{#1}
  \endgroup}
\addtoiargdef{\author}{}{%
  \begingroup
    \renewcommand{\thanks}[1]{}
    \renewcommand{\and}{\unskip, }
    \renewcommand{\thanksmark}[1]{}
    \renewcommand{\thanksgap}[1]{}
    \protected@xdef\theauthor{#1}
  \endgroup}
\addtoiargdef{\date}{}{%
  \begingroup
    \renewcommand{\thanks}[1]{}
    \renewcommand{\thanksmark}[1]{}
    \renewcommand{\thanksgap}[1]{}
    \protected@xdef\thedate{#1}
  \endgroup}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Abstracts}
%
% I also decided to add in the code from the \Lpack{abstract} 
% package~\cite{ABSTRACT}.
% \changes{v0.3}{2001/07/09}{Added code for abstracts}
%
%
% We just have the \Lpack{report} or \Lpack{article} style for the
% abstract with no \Lopt{titlepage} option. The original code,
% from \file{classes.dtx} for this is:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \newenvironment{abstract}{%
%   \if@twocolumn
%     \section*{\abstractname}
%   \else
%     \small
%     \begin{center}%
%       {\bfseries \abstractname\vspace{-.5em}\vspace{\z@}}%%
%     \end{center}%
%     \quotation
%   \fi}%
%   {\if@twocolumn\else\endquotation\fi}
% \end{verbatim}
%
%
%    The following |\if...| commands are for implementing various options.
% \begin{macro}{\if@bsonecol}
% \begin{macro}{\ifadd@bstotoc}
% \begin{macro}{\ifnumber@bs}
% \begin{macro}{\if@bsrunin}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@bsonecol
  \@bsonecoltrue
\newif\ifadd@bstotoc
  \add@bstotocfalse
\newif\ifnumber@bs
  \number@bsfalse
\newif\if@bsrunin
  \@bsruninfalse

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\abstractcol}
% \begin{macro}{\abstractintoc}
% \begin{macro}{\abstractnum}
% \begin{macro}{\abstractrunin}
% These are the use-level commands for setting the options. If
% the abstract is runin, then it must not be numbered otherwise
% adding it to the ToC might result in something peculiar.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\abstractcol}{\@bsonecolfalse}
\newcommand{\abstractintoc}{\add@bstotoctrue}
\newcommand{\abstractnum}{\number@bstrue\@bsruninfalse}
\newcommand{\abstractrunin}{\@bsrunintrue\number@bsfalse}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% 
%    The next set of macros comprise the 
% implementation of the |abstract| environment.
%
% \begin{macro}{\abstractnamefont}
% \begin{macro}{\abstracttextfont}
%    These two macros are for specifying the fonts for typesetting the
% abstract's title and text. They are initialised for the default case
% (i.e., no class options).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\abstractnamefont}{\normalfont\small\bfseries}
\newcommand{\abstracttextfont}{\normalfont\small}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\absnamepos}
% \begin{macro}{\abstitleskip}
%    |\absnamepos| specifies the environment in which the abstract's title
% name will be typeset, and the length |\abstitleskip| is an adjustement
% to the vertical space between the title and the abstract's text. These
% are initialised for the default case.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\absnamepos}{center}
\newlength{\abstitleskip} \setlength{\abstitleskip}{-0.5em}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\absleftindent}
% \begin{macro}{\absrightindent}
% \begin{macro}{\absparindent}
% \begin{macro}{\absparsep}
%    The abstract's text is typeset as a single item list, called 
% |@bstr@ctlist|. These lengths set the left and right margin indents, the
% paragraph indentation, and the inter-paragraph vertical space. Their
% initial values are all class option-dependent.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\absleftindent} 
\newlength{\absrightindent}
\newlength{\absparindent}
\newlength{\absparsep}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\abslabeldelim}
% \begin{macro}{\@bslabeldelim}
% The contents of |\abslabeldelim| are typeset after a run-in heading.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\abslabeldelim}[1]{\def\@bslabeldelim{#1}}
\abslabeldelim{}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@bsrunintitle}
% This macro typeset the run-in heading.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\@bsrunintitle}{%
  \hspace*{\abstitleskip}{\abstractnamefont\abstractname\@bslabeldelim}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setup@bstract}
%    Now arrange to set all the class option-dependent values.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setup@bstract}{%
  \if@twocolumn
%    \end{macrocode}
% Values for the \Lopt{twocolumn} class option.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \if@bsonecol 
      \setlength{\absleftindent}{\leftmargin}
    \else
      \setlength{\absleftindent}{\z@}
      \renewcommand{\abstractnamefont}{\normalfont\Large\bfseries}
      \renewcommand{\abstracttextfont}{\normalfont}
      \renewcommand{\absnamepos}{flushleft}
      \setlength{\abstitleskip}{-2ex}
    \fi
  \else
%    \end{macrocode}
% Values for the default, if not already initialised.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \setlength{\absleftindent}{\leftmargin}
  \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Finally, values that apply for all cases.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \setlength{\absrightindent}{\absleftindent}
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\AtBeginDocument{\setlength{\absparindent}{\parindent}
                 \setlength{\absparsep}{\parskip}}

%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{environment}{@bstr@ctlist}
%    The abstract's text is typeset within the |@bstr@ctlist| list environment.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{@bstr@ctlist}{%
  \list{}{%
          %%\topsep        \z@
          \partopsep     \z@
          \listparindent \absparindent
          \itemindent    \listparindent
          \leftmargin    \absleftindent
          \rightmargin   \absrightindent
          \parsep        \absparsep}%
  \item\relax}
  {\endlist}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\put@bsintoc}
%    This macro adds the abstract's title to the ToC. It does nothing if
% the abstract is being numbered.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\put@bsintoc}{%
  \ifadd@bstotoc
    \ifnumber@bs\else
      \phantomsection
      \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\abstractname}
    \fi
  \fi}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\num@bs}
%    This macro generates a numbered abstract heading.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\num@bs}{\chapter{\abstractname}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{environment}{abstract}
%  At last we are in position to define the |abstract| environment. This
% follows very much along the lines of the standard class definitions, but with
% macros inserted at strategic points.
%
% The \Lopt{twocolumn} option and the default case. These use the same code
% as any style differences are embedded in the new macros.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{abstract}{%
  \setup@bstract
  \if@bsrunin\else
    \ifnumber@bs \num@bs \else
      \begin{\absnamepos}\abstractnamefont\abstractname\end\absnamepos%
      \vspace{\abstitleskip}%
    \fi
  \fi
  \put@bsintoc%
  \begin{@bstr@ctlist}\if@bsrunin\@bsrunintitle\fi\abstracttextfont}%
  {\par\end{@bstr@ctlist}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{environment}{onecolabstract}
%  An environment for typesetting a single column abstract, 
% particularly as the optional argument to the |\twocolumn| command.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{onecolabstract}{%
  \begin{@twocolumnfalse}\begin{abstract}}{%
  \end{abstract}\end{@twocolumnfalse}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\thanks}
% \begin{macro}{\@bs@thanks}
%    We have to keep the contents of the |\thanks| commands as normally these
% are emptied by the |\maketitle| command. I do this by extending the definition
% of the |\thanks| (from \file{ltsect.dtx}) command, 
% so that |\@bs@thanks| has a copy of the contents
% of |\@thanks|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\addtoiargdef{\thanks}{}{%
  \protected@xdef\@bs@thanks{\@bs@thanks
    \protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{#1}}%
}
\let\@bs@thanks\@empty

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\saythanks}
% This macro typesets any |\thanks| commands \emph{after} using 
% |onecolabstract|. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\saythanks}{\begingroup
  \renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}}\@bs@thanks
  \endgroup\global\let\@bs@thanks\@empty}
  
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%
% \section{Verbatims, boxes, and files}
%
% All the code in this section was added for version 1.2 of the class.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Section `Verbatims, boxes and files' added}
%
% \subsection{Modified version of the verbatim package}
%
% Much of this is from the \Lpack{verbatim} package code~\cite{VERBATIM}.
% Unless indicated otherwise, the code and commentary is from that
% package.
%
%
% \subsubsection{Preliminaries}
%
% \begin{macro}{\every@verbatim}
% \begin{macro}{\afterevery@verbatim}
%    The hook (i.e.\ token register) |\every@verbatim|
%    is initialized to \meta{empty}.
%
% PW added the |\afterevery@verbatim| hook.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newtoks\every@verbatim
  \every@verbatim={}
\newtoks\afterevery@verbatim
  \afterevery@verbatim={}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@makeother}
%    |\@makeother| takes as argument a character and changes
%    its category code to $12$ (other).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@makeother#1{\catcode`#112\relax}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@vobeyspaces}
%    The macro |\@vobeyspaces| causes spaces in the input
%    to be printed as spaces in the output.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\begingroup
 \catcode`\ =\active%
 \def\x{\def\@vobeyspaces{\catcode`\ \active\let \@xobeysp}}
 \expandafter\endgroup\x
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@xobeysp}
%    The macro |\@xobeysp| produces exactly one space in
%    the output, protected against breaking just before it.
%    (|\@M| is an abbreviation for the number $10000$.)
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@xobeysp{\leavevmode\penalty\@M\ }
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@line}
%    We use a newly defined token register called |\verbatim@line|
%    that will be used as the character buffer.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newtoks\verbatim@line
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% PW. I have extended the original \Lpack{verbatim} package code to handle
% TABs within verbatims. Normally TeX replaces a TAB by either a single space or
% ignores it altogether. For this purpose I have bits of code from the \Lpack{moreverb}
% package~\cite{MOREVERB} for handling TABs.
%
% \textit{Code and commentary from moreverb.}
%
% We define a few auxiliary macros and counters for expanding tabs.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcount\tab@position 
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@xobeytab}
% |\@xobeytab| puts enough spaces in to get to the next nominal
% tab stop
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@xobeytab{%
  \loop
    \toks@\expandafter{\the\toks@\@xobeysp}%
    \advance\tab@position-1
  \ifnum\tab@position>0 \repeat
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@vobeytabs}
% |\@vobeytabs| initialises use of \cs{@xobeytab}.  Needs to be
% executed within a group, as mustn't be allowed to leak out into the
% wide world.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\begingroup
  \catcode`\^^I=\active
  \gdef\@vobeytabs{\catcode`\^^I\active\let^^I\@xobeytab}%
\endgroup
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@tabexpand}
% |\verbatim@tabexpand|\meta{body of line}|\@nil| processes every
% character of a line by tail recursion, counting the characters and
% juggling things when a tab is encountered.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbatim@tabexpand#1{%
  \ifx#1\@nil
    \the\toks@
    \expandafter\par
  \else
    \ifx#1\@xobeytab
      \@xobeytab
    \else
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% We can safely put |\@xobeysp| into the token register, since it
% does precisely what we need
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \toks@\expandafter{\the\toks@#1}%
      \advance\tab@position\m@ne
    \fi
    \ifnum\tab@position=0 \tab@position\tab@size \fi
    \expandafter\verbatim@tabexpand
  \fi
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \textit{End of code and commentary from moreverb.}
%
% PW. Some macros for turning tabbing on and off.
%
% \begin{macro}{\tabson}
% \begin{macro}{\tabsoff}
% \begin{macro}{\@maybeobeytabs}
% |\tabson| turns tabbing on, and |\tabsoff| turns it off. Default
% is no tabbing.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ift@bs
\newcommand{\tabson}[1][4]{%
  \ifnum\@ne > #1\relax
    \tabsoff
  \else
    \t@bstrue
    \def\tab@size{#1\relax}%
    \def\@maybeobeytabs{\@vobeytabs}%
  \fi
}
\newcommand{\tabsoff}{%
  \t@bsfalse
  \def\tab@size{\z@}%
  \def\@maybeobeytabs{}%
}
\tabsoff

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\tabverbatim@processline}
% Process a line with TABs (extracted from \Lpack{moreverb}).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\tabverbatim@processline{\tab@position\tab@size
  \toks@{}%
  \expandafter\verbatim@tabexpand\the\verbatim@line\@nil}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\notabverbatim@processline}
% Processes a line ignoring TABs (this is the original \Lpack{verbatim}
% package definition of |\verbatim@processline|).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\notabverbatim@processline{\the\verbatim@line\par}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \textit{We are now back to the \Lpack{verbatim} code.}
%
% The following four macros are defined globally in a way suitable for
% the \texttt{verbatim} and \texttt{verbatim*} environments.
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@startline}
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@addtoline}
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@processline}
%    |\verbatim@startline| initializes processing of a line
%    by emptying the character buffer (|\verbatim@line|).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbatim@startline{\verbatim@line{}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    |\verbatim@addtoline| adds the tokens in its argument
%    to our buffer register |\verbatim@line| without expanding
%    them.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbatim@addtoline#1{%
  \verbatim@line\expandafter{\the\verbatim@line#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    Processing a line inside a \texttt{verbatim} or \texttt{verbatim*}
%    environment means printing it.
%    Ending the line means that we have to begin a new paragraph.
%    We use |\par| for this purpose.  Note that |\par|
%    is redefined in |\@verbatim| to force \TeX{} into horizontal
%    mode and to insert an empty box so that empty lines in the input
%    do appear in the output.
% (PW changed next line from \\
% |\def\verbatim@processline{\the\verbatim@line\par}|
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbatim@processline{\notabverbatim@processline}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@finish}
%    As a default, |\verbatim@finish| processes the remaining
%    characters.
%    When this macro is called we are facing the following problem:
%    when the |\end{verbatim}|
%    command is encountered |\verbatim@processline| is called
%    to process the characters preceding the command on the same
%    line.  If there are none, an empty line would be output if we
%    did not check for this case.
%
%    If the line is empty |\the\verbatim@line| expands to
%    nothing.  To test this we use a trick similar to that on p.\ 376
%    of the \TeX{}book, but with |$|\ldots|$| instead of
%    the |!| tokens.  These |$| tokens can never have the same
%    category code as a |$| token that might possibly appear in the
%    token register |\verbatim@line|, as such a token will always have
%    been read with category code $12$ (other).
%    Note that |\ifcat| expands the following tokens so that
%    |\the\verbatim@line| is replaced by the accumulated
%    characters
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbatim@finish{\ifcat$\the\verbatim@line$\else
  \verbatim@processline\fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsubsection{The \texttt{verbatim} and \texttt{verbatim*} environments}
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@font}
%    We start by defining the macro |\verbatim@font| that is
%    to select the font and to set font-dependent parameters.
%    Then we go through |\verbatim@nolig@list| to avoid
%    certain ligatures.
%    |\verbatim@nolig@list| is a macro defined in the \LaTeXe{} kernel
%    to expand to
% \begin{verbatim}
%    \do\`\do\<\do\>\do\,\do\'\do\-
% \end{verbatim}
%    All the characters in this list can be part of a ligature in some
%    font or other.
% 
% PW. This is the original version which I'm going to replace.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \def\verbatim@font{\normalfont\ttfamily
%                    \hyphenchar\font\m@ne
%                    \let\do\do@noligs
%                    \verbatim@nolig@list}
% \end{verbatim}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setverbatimfont}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mverbfont}
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@font}
% User level handle for changing the font used for verbatim text.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setverbatimfont}[1]{\def\m@mverbfont{#1}}
\setverbatimfont{\normalfont\ttfamily}

\def\verbatim@font{\m@mverbfont
                   \hyphenchar\font\m@ne
                   \let\do\do@noligs
                   \verbatim@nolig@list}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@verbatim}
%    The macro |\@verbatim| sets up things properly.
%    First of all, the tokens of the |\every@verbatim| hook
%    are inserted.
%    Then a \texttt{trivlist} environment is started and its first
%    |\item| command inserted.
%    Each line of the \texttt{verbatim} or \texttt{verbatim*}
%    environment will be treated as a separate paragraph.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@verbatim{\the\every@verbatim
  \trivlist \item \relax
%    \end{macrocode}
%    The following extra vertical space is for compatibility with the
%    \LaTeX kernel: otherwise, using the |verbatim| package changes
%    the vertical spacing of a |verbatim| environment nested within a
%    |quote| environment.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \if@minipage\else\vskip\parskip\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%    The paragraph parameters are set appropriately:
%    the penalty at the beginning of the environment,
%    left and right margins, paragraph indentation, the glue to
%    fill the last line, and the vertical space between paragraphs.
%    The latter space has to be zero since we do not want to add
%    extra space between lines.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@beginparpenalty \predisplaypenalty 
  \leftskip\@totalleftmargin\rightskip\z@
  \parindent\z@\parfillskip\@flushglue\parskip\z@
%    \end{macrocode}
%    There's one point to make here:
%    the \texttt{list} environment uses \TeX's |\parshape|
%    primitive to get a special indentation for the first line
%    of the  list.
%    If the list begins with a \texttt{verbatim} environment
%    this |\parshape| is still in effect.
%    Therefore we have to reset this internal parameter explicitly.
%    We could do this by assigning $0$ to |\parshape|.
%    However, there is a simpler way to achieve this:
%    we simply tell \TeX{} to start a new paragraph.
%    As is explained on p.~103 of the \TeX{}book, this resets
%    |\parshape| to zero.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@@par
%    \end{macrocode}
%    We now ensure that |\par| has the correct definition,
%    namely to force \TeX{} into horizontal mode
%    and to include an empty box.
%    This is to ensure that empty lines do appear in the output.
%    Afterwards, we insert the |\interlinepenalty| since \TeX{}
%    does not add a penalty between paragraphs (here: lines)
%    by its own initiative. Otherwise a |verbatim| environment
%    could be broken across pages even if a |\samepage|
%    declaration were present.
%
%    However, in a top-aligned minipage, this will result in an extra
%    empty line added at the top. Therefore, a slightly more
%    complicated construct is necessary.
%    One of the important things here is the inclusion of
%    |\leavevmode| as the first macro in the first line, for example,
%    a blank verbatim line is the first thing in a list item.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \def\par{%
    \if@tempswa
      \leavevmode\null\@@par\penalty\interlinepenalty
    \else
      \@tempswatrue
      \ifhmode\@@par\penalty\interlinepenalty\fi
    \fi}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%    But to avoid an error message when the environment
%    doesn't contain any text, we redefine |\@noitemerr|
%    which will in this case be called by |\endtrivlist|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \def\@noitemerr{\@warning{No verbatim text}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%    Now we call |\obeylines| to make the end of line character
%    active,
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \obeylines
%    \end{macrocode}
%    change the category code of all special characters,
%    to $12$ (other).
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \let\do\@makeother \dospecials
%    \end{macrocode}
%    and switch to the font to be used.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \verbatim@font
%    \end{macrocode}
%    To avoid a breakpoint after the labels box, we remove the penalty
%    put there by the list macros: another use of |\unpenalty|!
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \everypar \expandafter{\the\everypar \unpenalty}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% PW added next code at end of |\@verbatim|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \wrapright\the\afterevery@verbatim}
%    \end{macrocode}   
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim}
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim*}
%    Now we define the toplevel macros.
%    |\verbatim| is slightly changed:
%    after setting up things properly it calls
%    |\verbatim@start|.
%    This is done inside a group, so that |\verbatim| can be used
%    directly, without |\begin|.
%
% PW. The following is the original code, but I want a version of
% |verbatim| that recognises TABs.
% \begin{verbatim}
%    \begin{macrocode}
% \def\verbatim{\begingroup\@verbatim \frenchspacing\@vobeyspaces 
%              \verbatim@start}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    |\verbatim*| is defined accordingly.
%    \begin{macrocode}
% \@namedef{verbatim*}{\begingroup\@verbatim\verbatim@start}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\endverbatim}
% \begin{macro}{\endverbatim*}
%    To end the \texttt{verbatim} and \texttt{verbatim*}
%    environments it is only necessary to finish the
%    \texttt{trivlist} environment started in |\@verbatim| and
%    close the corresponding group.
%    \begin{macrocode}
% \def\endverbatim{\endtrivlist\endgroup}
% \expandafter\let\csname endverbatim*\endcsname =\endverbatim
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{verbatim}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim}
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim*}
% PW. The code for these is a modified version of the original \Lpack{verbatim}
% code.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbatim{\begingroup
      \ift@bs
        \def\verbatim@processline{\tabverbatim@processline}%
      \fi
      \@verbatim \frenchspacing\@vobeyspaces\@maybeobeytabs\verbatim@start}
\@namedef{verbatim*}{\begingroup
      \ift@bs
        \def\verbatim@processline{\tabverbatim@processline}%
      \fi
      \@verbatim\@maybeobeytabs\verbatim@start}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\endverbatim}
% \begin{macro}{\endverbatim*}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\endverbatim{\endtrivlist\endgroup}
\expandafter\let\csname endverbatim*\endcsname =\endverbatim

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsubsection{The \texttt{comment} environment}
%
%    The |\comment| macro is similar to |\verbatim*|.
%    However, we do not need to switch fonts or set special
%    formatting parameters such as |\parindent| or |\parskip|.
%    We need only set the category code of all special characters
%    to $12$ (other) and that of |^^M| (the end of line character)
%    to $13$ (active).
%    The latter is needed for macro parameter delimiter matching in
%    the internal macros defined below.
%    In contrast to the default definitions used by the
%    |\verbatim| and |\verbatim*| macros,
%    we define |\verbatim@addtoline| to throw away its argument
%    and |\verbatim@processline|, |\verbatim@startline|,
%    and |\verbatim@finish| to act as no-ops.
%    Then we call |\verbatim@|.
%    But the first thing we do is to call |\@bsphack| so that
%    this environment has no influence whatsoever upon the spacing.
%
% PW: This is the original code for the |comment| environment, 
% which I'm going to change.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \def\comment{\@bsphack
%              \let\do\@makeother\dospecials\catcode`\^^M\active
%              \let\verbatim@startline\relax
%              \let\verbatim@addtoline\@gobble
%              \let\verbatim@processline\relax
%              \let\verbatim@finish\relax
%              \verbatim@}
% \end{verbatim}
%    |\endcomment| is very simple: it only calls
%    |\@esphack| to take care of the spacing.
%    The |\end| macro closes the group and therefore takes care
%    of restoring everything we changed.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \let\endcomment=\@esphack
% \end{verbatim}
%
% PW: The remainder of this section is my code.
%
% \begin{macro}{\setupcomment}
% |\setupcomment| does all the |\let|s in the original |\comment| code.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setupcomment}{%
  \let\do\@makeother\dospecials\catcode`\^^M\active
  \let\verbatim@startline\relax
  \let\verbatim@addtoline\@gobble
  \let\verbatim@processline\relax
  \let\verbatim@finish\relax}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% The macros below do no checking to see if something has (not) been defined
% previously. It's `user beware' time.
%
% \begin{macro}{\newcomment}
% |\newcomment|\marg{name} creates a new comment environment called 
% \meta{name}. This is a generalisation of the original comment code.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\newcomment}[1]{%
  \expandafter\def\csname #1\endcsname{\@bsphack\setupcomment\verbatim@}%
  \expandafter\let\csname end#1\endcsname=\@esphack}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\commentsoff}
% |\commentsoff|\marg{name} switches off the \meta{name} comment 
% environment by defining the relevent macros to do nothing.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\commentsoff}[1]{%
  \expandafter\def\csname #1\endcsname{}%
  \expandafter\def\csname end#1\endcsname{}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\commentson}
% |\commentson|\marg{name} switches on the \meta{name} comment 
% environment. It has to do the same things as |\newcomment| does,
% so let |\newcomment| do the work.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\commentson}[1]{\newcomment{#1}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% We had better supply the |comment| environment, as promised.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcomment{comment}

%    \end{macrocode}
%
% PW: That is the end of my changes and extensions to the original 
% |comment| environment code.
%
%
% \subsubsection{The main loop}
%
% Here comes the tricky part:
% During the definition of the macros we need to use the special
% characters |\|, |{|, and |}| not only with their
% normal category codes,
% but also with category code $12$ (other).
% We achieve this by the following trick:
% first we tell \TeX{} that |\|, |{|, and |}|
% are the lowercase versions of |!|, |[|, and |]|.
% Then we replace every occurrence of |\|, |{|, and |}|
% that should be read with category code $12$ by |!|, |[|,
% and |]|, respectively,
% and give the whole list of tokens to |\lowercase|,
% knowing that category codes are not altered by this primitive!
%
% But first we have ensure that
% |!|, |[|, and |]| themselves have
% the correct category code!
% To allow special settings of these codes we hide their setting in
% the macro |\vrb@catcodes|.  If it is already defined our new
% definition is skipped.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@ifundefined{vrb@catcodes}%
  {\def\vrb@catcodes{%
     \catcode`\!12\catcode`\[12\catcode`\]12}}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
% This trick allows us to use this code for applications where other
% category codes are in effect.
%
% We start a group to keep the category code changes local.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\begingroup
 \vrb@catcodes
 \lccode`\!=`\\ \lccode`\[=`\{ \lccode`\]=`\}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    We also need the end-of-line character |^^M|,
%    as an active character.
%    If we were to simply write |\catcode`\^^M=\active|
%    then we would get an unwanted active end of line character
%    at the end of every line of the following macro definitions.
%    Therefore we use the same trick as above:
%    we write a tilde |~| instead of |^^M| and
%    pretend that the
%    latter is the lowercase variant of the former.
%    Thus we have to ensure now that the tilde character has
%    category code $13$ (active).
%    \begin{macrocode}
 \catcode`\~=\active \lccode`\~=`\^^M
%    \end{macrocode}
%    The use of the |\lowercase| primitive leads to one problem:
%    the uppercase character `|C|' needs to be used in the
%    code below and its case must be preserved.
%    So we add the command:
%    \begin{macrocode}
 \lccode`\C=`\C
%    \end{macrocode}
%    Now we start the token list passed to |\lowercase|.
%    We use the following little trick (proposed by Bernd Raichle):
%    The very first token in the token list we give to |\lowercase| is
%    the |\endgroup| primitive. This means that it is processed by
%    \TeX{} immediately after |\lowercase| has finished its operation,
%    thus ending the group started by |\begingroup| above. This avoids
%    the global definition of all macros.
%    \begin{macrocode}
 \lowercase{\endgroup
%    \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@start}
%    The purpose of |\verbatim@start| is to check whether there
%    are any characters on the same line as the |\begin{verbatim}|
%    and to pretend that they were on a line by themselves.
%    On the other hand, if there are no characters remaining
%    on the current line we shall just find an end of line character.
%    |\verbatim@start| performs its task by first grabbing the
%    following character (its argument).
%    This argument is then compared to an active |^^M|,
%    the end of line character.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \def\verbatim@start#1{%
      \verbatim@startline
      \if\noexpand#1\noexpand~%
%    \end{macrocode}
%    If this is true we transfer control to |\verbatim@|
%    to process the next line.  We use
%    |\next| as the macro which will continue the work.
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \let\next\verbatim@
%    \end{macrocode}
%    Otherwise, we define |\next| to expand to a call
%    to |\verbatim@| followed by the character just
%    read so that it is reinserted into the text.
%    This means that those characters remaining on this line
%    are handled as if they formed a line by themselves.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \else \def\next{\verbatim@#1}\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%    Finally we call |\next|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \next}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@}
%    The three macros |\verbatim@|, |\verbatim@@|,
%    and |\verbatim@@@| form the ``main loop'' of the
%    \texttt{verbatim} environment.
%    The purpose of |\verbatim@| is to read exactly one line
%    of input.
%    |\verbatim@@| and |\verbatim@@@| work together to
%    find out whether the four characters
%    |\end| (all with category code $12$ (other)) occur in that
%    line.
%    If so, |\verbatim@@@| will call
%    |\verbatim@test| to check whether this |\end| is
%    part of |\end{verbatim}| and will terminate the environment
%    if this is the case.
%    Otherwise we continue as if nothing had happened.
%    So let's have a look at the definition of |\verbatim@|:
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \def\verbatim@#1~{\verbatim@@#1!end\@nil}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%    Note that the |!| character will have been replaced by a
%    |\| with category code $12$ (other) by the |\lowercase|
%    primitive governing this code before the definition of this
%    macro actually takes place.
%    That means that
%    it takes the line, puts |\end| (four character tokens)
%    and |\@nil| (one control sequence token) as a
%    delimiter behind it, and
%    then calls |\verbatim@@|.
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@@}
%    |\verbatim@@| takes everything up to the next occurrence of
%    the four characters |\end| as its argument.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \def\verbatim@@#1!end{%
%    \end{macrocode}
%    That means: if they do not occur in the original line, then
%    argument |#1| is the
%    whole input line, and |\@nil| is the next token
%    to be processed.
%    However, if the four characters |\end| are part of the
%    original line, then
%    |#1| consists of the characters in front of |\end|,
%    and the next token is the following character (always remember
%    that the line was lengthened by five tokens).
%    Whatever |#1| may be, it is verbatim text,
%    so |#1| is added to the line currently built.
%    \begin{macrocode}
       \verbatim@addtoline{#1}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%    The next token in the input stream
%    is of special interest to us.
%    Therefore |\futurelet| defines |\next| to be equal
%    to it before calling |\verbatim@@@|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
       \futurelet\next\verbatim@@@}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@@@}
%    |\verbatim@@@| will now read the rest of the tokens on
%    the current line,
%    up to the final |\@nil| token.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \def\verbatim@@@#1\@nil{%
%    \end{macrocode}
%    If the first of the above two cases occurred, i.e.\ no
%    |\end| characters were on that line, |#1| is empty
%    and |\next| is equal to |\@nil|.
%    This is easily checked.
%    \begin{macrocode}
       \ifx\next\@nil
%    \end{macrocode}
%    If so, this was a simple line.
%    We finish it by processing the line we accumulated so far.
%    Then we prepare to read the next line.
%    \begin{macrocode}
         \verbatim@processline
         \verbatim@startline
         \let\next\verbatim@
%    \end{macrocode}
%    Otherwise we have to check what follows these |\end|
%    tokens.
%    \begin{macrocode}
       \else
%    \end{macrocode}
%    Before we continue, it's a good idea to stop for a moment
%    and remember where we are:
%    We have just read the four character tokens |\end|
%    and must now check whether the name of the environment (surrounded
%    by braces) follows.
%    To this end we define a macro called |\@tempa|
%    that reads exactly one character and decides what to do next.
%    This macro should do the following: skip spaces until
%    it encounters either a left brace or the end of the line.
%    But it is important to remember which characters are skipped.
%    The |\end|\meta{optional spaces}|{| characters
%    may be part of the verbatim text, i.e.\ these characters
%    must be printed.
%
%    Assume for example that the current line contains
%    \begin{verbatim*}
%      \end {AVeryLongEnvironmentName}
%\end{verbatim*}
%    As we shall soon see, the scanning mechanism implemented here
%    will not find out that this is text to be printed until
%    it has read the right brace.
%    Therefore we need a way to accumulate the characters read
%    so that we can reinsert them if necessary.
%    The token register |\@temptokena| is used for this purpose.
%
%    Before we do this we have to get rid of the superfluous
%    |\end| tokens at the end of the line.
%    To this end we define a temporary macro whose argument
%    is delimited by |\end\@nil| (four character tokens
%    and one control sequence token) to be used below
%    on the rest of the line, after appending a |\@nil| token to it.
%    (Note that this token can never appear in |#1|.)
%    We use the following definition of
%    |\@tempa| to get the rest of the line (after the first
%    |\end|).
%    \begin{macrocode}
         \def\@tempa##1!end\@nil{##1}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%    We mentioned already that we use token register
%    |\@temptokena|
%    to remember the characters we skip, in case we need them again.
%    We initialize this with the |\end| we have thrown away
%    in the call to |\@tempa|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
         \@temptokena{!end}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%    We shall now call |\verbatim@test|
%    to process the characters
%    remaining on the current line.
%    But wait a moment: we cannot simply call this macro
%    since we have already read the whole line.
%    Therefore we have to first expand the macro |\@tempa| to insert
%    them again after the |\verbatim@test| token.
%    A |^^M| character is appended to denote the end of the line.
%    (Remember that this character comes disguised as a tilde.)
%    \begin{macrocode}
         \def\next{\expandafter\verbatim@test\@tempa#1\@nil~}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%    That's almost all, but we still have to
%    now call |\next| to do the work.
%    \begin{macrocode}
       \fi \next}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@test}
%    We define |\verbatim@test| to investigate every token
%    in turn.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \def\verbatim@test#1{%
%    \end{macrocode}
%    First of all we set |\next| equal to |\verbatim@test|
%    in case this macro must call itself recursively in order to
%    skip spaces.
%    \begin{macrocode}
           \let\next\verbatim@test
%    \end{macrocode}
%    We have to distinguish four cases:
%    \begin{enumerate}
%      \item The next token is a |^^M|, i.e.\ we reached
%            the end of the line.  That means that nothing
%            special was found.
%            Note that we use |\if| for the following
%            comparisons so that the category code of the
%            characters is irrelevant.
%    \begin{macrocode}
           \if\noexpand#1\noexpand~%
%    \end{macrocode}
%            We add the characters accumulated in token register
%            |\@temptokena| to the current line.  Since
%            |\verbatim@addtoline| does not expand its argument,
%            we have to do the expansion at this point.  Then we
%            |\let| |\next| equal to |\verbatim@|
%            to prepare to read the next line.
%    \begin{macrocode}
             \expandafter\verbatim@addtoline
               \expandafter{\the\@temptokena}%
             \verbatim@processline
             \verbatim@startline
             \let\next\verbatim@
%    \end{macrocode}
%      \item A space character follows.
%            This is allowed, so we add it to |\@temptokena|
%            and continue.
%    \begin{macrocode}
           \else \if\noexpand#1
             \@temptokena\expandafter{\the\@temptokena#1}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%      \item An open brace follows.
%            This is the most interesting case.
%            We must now collect characters until we read the closing
%            brace and check whether they form the environment name.
%            This will be done by |\verbatim@testend|, so here
%            we let |\next| equal this macro.
%            Again we will process the rest of the line, character
%            by character.
%            The characters forming the name of the environment will
%            be accumulated in |\@tempc|.
%            We initialize this macro to expand to nothing.
%    \begin{macrocode}
           \else \if\noexpand#1\noexpand[%
             \let\@tempc\@empty
             \let\next\verbatim@testend
%    \end{macrocode}
%            Note that the |[| character will be a |{| when
%            this macro is defined.
%      \item Any other character means that the |\end| was part
%            of the verbatim text.
%            Add the characters to the current line and prepare to call
%            |\verbatim@| to process the rest of the line.
%    \begin{macrocode}
           \else
             \expandafter\verbatim@addtoline
               \expandafter{\the\@temptokena}%
             \def\next{\verbatim@#1}%
           \fi\fi\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{enumerate}
%    The last thing this macro does is to call |\next|
%    to continue processing.
%    \begin{macrocode}
           \next}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@testend}
%    |\verbatim@testend| is called when
%    |\end|\meta{optional spaces}|{| was seen.
%    Its task is to scan everything up to the next |}|
%    and to call |\verbatim@@testend|.
%    If no |}| is found it must reinsert the characters it read
%    and return to |\verbatim@|.
%    The following definition is similar to that of
%    |\verbatim@test|:
%    it takes the next character and decides what to do.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \def\verbatim@testend#1{%
%    \end{macrocode}
%    Again, we have four cases:
%    \begin{enumerate}
%      \item |^^M|: As no |}| is found in the current line,
%            add the characters to the buffer.  To avoid a
%            complicated construction for expanding
%            |\@temptokena|
%            and |\@tempc| we do it in two steps.  Then we
%            continue with |\verbatim@| to process the
%            next line.
%    \begin{macrocode}
         \if\noexpand#1\noexpand~%
           \expandafter\verbatim@addtoline
             \expandafter{\the\@temptokena[}%
           \expandafter\verbatim@addtoline
             \expandafter{\@tempc}%
           \verbatim@processline
           \verbatim@startline
           \let\next\verbatim@
%    \end{macrocode}
%      \item |}|: Call |\verbatim@@testend| to check
%            if this is the right environment name.
%    \begin{macrocode}
         \else\if\noexpand#1\noexpand]%
           \let\next\verbatim@@testend
%    \end{macrocode}
%      \item |\|: This character must not occur in the name of
%            an environment.  Thus we stop collecting characters.
%            In principle, the same argument would apply to other
%            characters as well, e.g., |{|.
%            However, |\| is a special case, since it may be
%            the first character of |\end|.  This means that
%            we have to look again for
%            |\end{|\meta{environment name}|}|.
%            Note that we prefixed the |!| by a |\noexpand|
%            primitive, to protect ourselves against it being an
%            active character.
%    \begin{macrocode}
         \else\if\noexpand#1\noexpand!%
           \expandafter\verbatim@addtoline
             \expandafter{\the\@temptokena[}%
           \expandafter\verbatim@addtoline
             \expandafter{\@tempc}%
           \def\next{\verbatim@!}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%      \item Any other character: collect it and continue.
%            We cannot use |\edef| to define |\@tempc|
%            since its replacement text might contain active
%            character tokens.
%    \begin{macrocode}
         \else \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempc\expandafter
           {\@tempc#1}\fi\fi\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{enumerate}
%    As before, the macro ends by calling itself, to
%    process the next character if appropriate.
%    \begin{macrocode}
         \next}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@@testend}
%    Unlike the previous macros |\verbatim@@testend| is simple:
%    it has only to check if the |\end{|\ldots|}|
%    matches the corresponding |\begin{|\ldots|}|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \def\verbatim@@testend{%
%    \end{macrocode}
%    We use |\next| again to define the things that are
%    to be done.
%    Remember that the name of the current environment is
%    held in |\@currenvir|, the characters accumulated
%    by |\verbatim@testend| are in |\@tempc|.
%    So we simply compare these and prepare to execute
%    |\end{|\meta{current environment}|}|
%    macro if they match.
%    Before we do this we call |\verbatim@finish| to process
%    the last line.
%    We define |\next| via |\edef| so that
%    |\@currenvir| is replaced by its expansion.
%    Therefore we need |\noexpand| to inhibit the expansion
%    of |\end| at this point.
%    \begin{macrocode}
       \ifx\@tempc\@currenvir
         \verbatim@finish
         \edef\next{\noexpand\end{\@currenvir}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%    Without this trick the |\end| command would not be able
%    to correctly check whether its argument matches the name of
%    the current environment and you'd get an
%    interesting \LaTeX{} error message such as:
%    \begin{verbatim}
%! \begin{verbatim*} ended by \end{verbatim*}.
%\end{verbatim}
%    But what do we do with the rest of the characters, those
%    that remain on that line?
%    We call |\verbatim@rescan| to take care of that.
%    Its first argument is the name of the environment just
%    ended, in case we need it again.
%    |\verbatim@rescan| takes the list of characters to be
%    reprocessed as its second argument.
%    (This token list was inserted after the current macro
%    by |\verbatim@@@|.)
%    Since we are still in an |\edef| we protect it
%    by means of|\noexpand|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
                    \noexpand\verbatim@rescan{\@currenvir}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%    If the names do not match, we reinsert everything read up
%    to now and prepare to call |\verbatim@| to process
%    the rest of the line.
%    \begin{macrocode}
       \else
         \expandafter\verbatim@addtoline
           \expandafter{\the\@temptokena[}%
           \expandafter\verbatim@addtoline
             \expandafter{\@tempc]}%
         \let\next\verbatim@
       \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%    Finally we call |\next|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
       \next}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@rescan}
%    In principle |\verbatim@rescan| could be used to
%    analyse the characters remaining after the |\end{...}|
%    command and pretend that these were read
%    ``properly'', assuming ``standard'' category codes are in
%    force.\footnote{Remember that they were all read with
%          category codes $11$ (letter) and $12$ (other) so
%          that control sequences are not recognized as such.}
%    But this is not always possible (when there are unmatched
%    curly braces in the rest of the line).
%    Besides, we think that this is not worth the effort:
%    After a \texttt{verbatim} or \texttt{verbatim*} environment
%    a new line in the output is begun anyway,
%    and an |\end{comment}| can easily be put on a line by itself.
%    So there is no reason why there should be any text here.
%    For the benefit of the user who did put something there
%    (a comment, perhaps)
%    we simply issue a warning and drop them.
%    The method of testing is explained in Appendix~D, p.\ 376 of
%    the \TeX{}book. We use |^^M| instead of the |!|
%    character used there
%    since this is a character that cannot appear in |#1|.
%    The two |\noexpand| primitives are necessary to avoid
%    expansion of active characters and macros.
%
%    One extra subtlety should be noted here: remember that
%    the token list we are currently building will first be
%    processed by the |\lowercase| primitive before \TeX{}
%    carries out the definitions.
%    This means that the `|C|' character in the
%    argument to the |\@warning| macro must be protected against
%    being changed to `|c|'.  That's the reason why we added the
%    |\lccode`\C=`\C| assignment above.
%    We can now finish the argument to |\lowercase| as well as the
%    group in which the category codes were changed.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \def\verbatim@rescan#1#2~{\if\noexpand~\noexpand#2~\else
        \@warning{Characters dropped after `\string\end{#1}'}\fi}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{The \cs{verbatiminput} command}
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@in@stream}
%    We begin by allocating an input stream (out of the 16 available
%    input streams).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newread\verbatim@in@stream
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@readfile}
%    The macro |\verbatim@readfile| encloses the main loop by calls to
%    the macros |\verbatim@startline| and |\verbatim@finish|,
%    respectively.  This makes sure
%    that the user can initialize and finish the command when the file
%    is empty or doesn't exist.  The \texttt{verbatim} environment has a
%    similar behaviour when called with an empty text.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbatim@readfile#1{%
  \verbatim@startline
%    \end{macrocode}
%    When the file is not found we issue a warning.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \openin\verbatim@in@stream #1\relax
  \ifeof\verbatim@in@stream
    \typeout{No file #1.}%
  \else
%    \end{macrocode}
%    At this point we pass the name of the file to |\@addtofilelist|
%    so that its appears appears in the output of a |\listfiles|
%    command.
%    In addition, we use |\ProvidesFile| to make a log entry in the
%    transcript file and to distinguish files read in via
%    |\verbatiminput| from others.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@addtofilelist{#1}%
    \ProvidesFile{#1}[(verbatim)]%
%    \end{macrocode}
%    While reading from the file it is useful to switch off the
%    recognition of the end-of-line character.  This saves us stripping
%    off spaces from the contents of the line.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \expandafter\endlinechar\expandafter\m@ne
    \expandafter\verbatim@read@file
    \expandafter\endlinechar\the\endlinechar\relax
    \closein\verbatim@in@stream
  \fi
  \verbatim@finish
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@read@file}
%    All the work is done in |\verbatim@read@file|.  It reads the input
%    file line by line and recursively calls itself until the end of
%    the file.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbatim@read@file{%
  \read\verbatim@in@stream to\next
  \ifeof\verbatim@in@stream
  \else
%    \end{macrocode}
%    For each line we call |\verbatim@addtoline| with the contents of
%    the line. \hskip0pt plus 3cm\penalty0\hskip0pt plus -3cm
%    |\verbatim@processline| is called next.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \expandafter\verbatim@addtoline\expandafter{\next}%
    \verbatim@processline
%    \end{macrocode}
%    After processing the line we call |\verbatim@startline| to
%    initialize all before we read the next line.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \verbatim@startline
%    \end{macrocode}
%    Without |\expandafter| each call of |\verbatim@read@file| uses
%    space in \TeX's input stack.\footnote{A standard \TeX\ would
%    report an overflow error if you try to read a file with more than
%    ca.\ 200~lines.  The same error occurs if the first line of code
%    in \S 390 of \textsl{``TeX: The Program''\/} is missing.}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \expandafter\verbatim@read@file
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatiminput}
%    |\verbatiminput| first starts a group to keep font and category
%    changes local.
%    Then it calls the macro |\verbatim@input| with additional
%    arguments, depending on whether an asterisk follows.
%
% PW. I added the TAB checking code.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbatiminput{\begingroup
  \ift@bs
    \def\verbatim@processline{\tabverbatim@processline}%
  \fi
  \@ifstar{\verbatim@input{\@maybeobeytabs}}%
          {\verbatim@input{\frenchspacing\@vobeyspaces\@maybeobeytabs}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@input}
%    |\verbatim@input| first checks whether the file exists, using
%    the standard macro |\IfFileExists| which leaves the name of the
%    file found in |\@filef@und|.
%    Then everything is set up as in the |\verbatim| macro.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\verbatim@input#1#2{%
   \IfFileExists {#2}{\@verbatim #1\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
%    Then it reads in the file, finishes off the \texttt{trivlist}
%    environment started by |\@verbatim| and closes the group.
%    This restores everything to its normal settings.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \verbatim@readfile{\@filef@und}\endtrivlist\endgroup\@doendpe}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%   If the file is not found a more or less helpful message is
%    printed. The final |\endgroup| is  needed to close the group
%    started in |\verbatiminput| above.
%    \begin{macrocode}
   {\typeout {No file #2.}\endgroup}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \textit{That completes my borrowings from \Lpack{verbatim}.}
%
% The next bunch of code implements wrapping verbatim lines so they, hopefully,
% stay within the typeblock.
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatimindent}
% \begin{macro}{\verbatimbreakchar}
% \begin{macro}{\setverbatimbreak}
% The length |\verbatimindent| is the distance continuation lines are indented
% from the left margin. |\verbatimbreakchar| is the character to indicate
% a wrapped line.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\verbatimindent}
  \setlength{\verbatimindent}{3em}
\newcommand*{\verbatimbreakchar}{\char`\%}
\newcommand*{\setverbatimbreak}{%
  \vspace*{-\baselineskip}%
  \def\@xobeysp{~\discretionary{\verbatimbreakchar}{\kern\verbatimindent}{}}%
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\wrappingon}
% \begin{macro}{\wrapright}
% \begin{macro}{\wrappingoff}
% |\wrappingon| and |\wrappingoff| enable/prohibit wrapping. The
% default is |\wrappingoff|.
%
% The macro
% |\wrapright|  is used to set paragraph skips; without |\raggedright| lines
% may break at the first space \emph{outside} the text area
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\wrappingon}{%
  \def\@xobeysp{~\discretionary{\verbatimbreakchar}{\kern\verbatimindent}{}}%
  \def\wrapright{\raggedright}%
}
\newcommand{\wrappingoff}{%
  \def\@xobeysp{\leavevmode\penalty\@M\ }%
  \def\wrapright{}%
}
\wrappingoff

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Writing and boxing verbatim}
%
%    This bunch of code is from the \Lpack{moreverb} package.
%
% \begin{environment}{verbatimoutput}
% |\begin{verbatimoutput}|\marg{filename} writes all text in its body to a
% file, the name of which it is given as an argument. (The code was
% written by Rainer Sch\"opf but the environment was called |verbatimwrite|).
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/09/27}{Changed name verbatimwrite to 
%               verbatimoutput (but neither were mentioned in the manual)}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newwrite \verbatim@out
\def\verbatimoutput#1{%
  \@bsphack
  \immediate\openout \verbatim@out #1
  \let\do\@makeother\dospecials
  \catcode`\^^M\active %% \catcode`\^^I=12  %% PW with this TABs are written ^^I
  \def\verbatim@processline{%
    \immediate\write\verbatim@out
      {\the\verbatim@line}}%
  \verbatim@start}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\endverbatimoutput{%
  \immediate\closeout\verbatim@out
  \@esphack}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
%
%
% \begin{environment}{fboxverbatim}
% \texttt{fboxverbatim} puts the contents of a verbatim environment
% in a framing box. (PW: This was originally called |boxedverbatim|).
%
% (Written by Victor Eijkhout.)
%
% Bug fix (supplied by David Carlisle) 1995/12/28, marked
% \verb+%%%DPC%%%+
%
% First, redefine `processline' to produce only a line as wide
% as the natural width of the line
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\fboxverbatim{\begingroup%
  \tabsoff %% PW otherwise box fills the width
  \def\verbatim@processline{%
    {\setbox0=\hbox{\the\verbatim@line}%
    \hsize=\wd0 \the\verbatim@line\par}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Now save the verbatim code in a box
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@minipagetrue%%%DPC%%%
  \@tempswatrue%%%DPC%%%
  \setbox0=\vbox\bgroup \verbatim
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% At the end of the environment, we (umm) simply have to stick the
% results into a frame.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\endfboxverbatim{%
  \endverbatim
  \unskip\setbox0=\lastbox %%%DPC%%%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Now everything's in the box, so we can close it\dots
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \egroup
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% To change the code for centring, the next line needs a spot of
% hacking.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \fbox{\box0}% <<<=== change here for centering,...
\endgroup}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
%
%
% \subsection{The shortvrb package}
%
% The following is the \Lpack{shortvrb} package code (from |doc.dtx|
% by Frank Mittelbach). It has been so useful to me that I wanted
% to include it in the class.
%
% CODE AND COMMENTARY IS BY FRANK MITTELBACH
%
% \begin{macro}{\MakeShortVerb}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MakeShortVerb#1{%
  \expandafter\ifx\csname cc\string#1\endcsname\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@shortvrbinfo{Made }{#1}%
    \add@special{#1}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Then the character's current catcode is stored in |\cc\|\meta{c}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \expandafter
    \xdef\csname cc\string#1\endcsname{\the\catcode`#1}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% The character is spliced into the definition using the same trick as
% used in |\verb| (for instance), having activated |~| in a group.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \begingroup
      \catcode`\~\active  \lccode`\~`#1%
      \lowercase{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% The character's old meaning is recorded in |\ac\|\meta{c} prior to
% assigning it a new one.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \global\expandafter\let
         \csname ac\string#1\endcsname~%
      \gdef~{\verb~}}%
    \endgroup
%    \end{macrocode}
% Finally the character is made active.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \global\catcode`#1\active
%    \end{macrocode}
% If we suspect that \meta{c} is already a short reference, we tell
% the user. Now he or she is responsible if anything goes wrong\,\dots
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \else
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@shortvrbinfo\@empty{#1 already}%
  \fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\DeleteShortVerb}
% Here's the means of undoing a |\MakeShortVerb|, for instance in a
% region where you need to use the character outside a verbatim
% environment.  It arranges for |\dospecials| and |\@sanitize| to be
% altered appropriately, restores the saved catcode and, if necessary,
% the character's meaning (as stored by 
% |\MakeShortVerb|).  If the catcode wasn't stored in
% |\cc\|\meta{c} (by |\MakeShortVerb|) the command is silently
% ignored. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\DeleteShortVerb#1{%
  \expandafter\ifx\csname cc\string#1\endcsname\relax
  \else
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@shortvrbinfo{Deleted }{#1 as}%
    \rem@special{#1}%
    \global\catcode`#1\csname cc\string#1\endcsname
%    \end{macrocode}
% We must not forget to reset |\cc\|\meta{c}, otherwise the check in
% |\MakeShortVerb| for a repeated definition will not work.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \global \expandafter\let \csname cc\string#1\endcsname \relax
    \ifnum\catcode`#1=\active
      \begingroup
        \catcode`\~\active   \lccode`\~`#1%
        \lowercase{%
          \global\expandafter\let\expandafter~%
          \csname ac\string#1\endcsname}%
      \endgroup \fi \fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%  \begin{macro}{\@shortvrbinfo}
% Helper function for info messages.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@shortvrbinfo#1#2{%
  \PackageInfo{shortvrb}{%
     #1\expandafter\@gobble\string#2 a short reference
                                          for \string\verb}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%  \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\add@special}
% This helper macro adds its argument to the
% |\dospecials| macro which is conventionally used by verbatim macros
% to alter the catcodes of the currently active characters.  We need
% to add |\do\|\meta{c} to the expansion of |\dospecials| after
% removing the character if it was already there to avoid multiple
% copies building up should |\MakeShortVerb| not be balanced by
% |\DeleteShortVerb| (in case anything that uses |\dospecials| cares
% about repetitions).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\add@special#1{%
  \rem@special{#1}%
  \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\dospecials\expandafter
    {\dospecials \do #1}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Similarly we have to add |\@makeother\|\meta{c} to |\@sanitize|
% (which is used in things like |\index| to re-catcode all special
% characters except braces).
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\@sanitize\expandafter
    {\@sanitize \@makeother #1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\rem@special}
% The inverse of |\add@special| is slightly trickier.  |\do| is
% re-defined to expand to nothing if its argument is the character of
% interest, otherwise to expand simply to the argument.  We can then
% re-define |\dospecials| to be the expansion of itself.  The space
% after |=`##1| prevents an expansion to |\relax|!
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\rem@special#1{%
  \def\do##1{%
    \ifnum`#1=`##1 \else \noexpand\do\noexpand##1\fi}%
  \xdef\dospecials{\dospecials}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Fixing |\@sanitize| is the same except that we need to re-define
% |\@makeother| which obviously needs to be done in a group. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \begingroup
    \def\@makeother##1{%
      \ifnum`#1=`##1 \else \noexpand\@makeother\noexpand##1\fi}%
    \xdef\@sanitize{\@sanitize}%
  \endgroup}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% END OF MITTELBACH CODE AND COMMENTARY.
%
% \subsection{General verbatim boxing and line numbering}
%
%    A while ago I wrote a package that I never released. Here it is
% now, updated and improved. The package was based on code originally
% posted to CTT  by Donald Arseneau on 13 July 2000.
%
% This is DA's posted code.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \RequirePackage{verbatim}
% \def\boxverbflag{14 }
%
% \def\boxedverbatim{%
%    \fboxsep=1em
%    \def\verbatim@processline{\leavevmode
%      \vrule\vbox{\advance\hsize-.8p@ \@@line
%        {\strut\kern\fboxsep\the\verbatim@line\hss}%
%         \kern\fbozsep}\vrule\par}%
%    \@verbatim % but make some replacement settings
% %   \ifdim\@totalleftmargin>\fboxsep \fboxsep\@totalleftmargin \fi
%    \leftskip\x@skip \rightskip\z@skip
%    \interlinepenalty\boxverbflag
%    \parfillskip\z@ plus\p@ minus\p@
%    \lineskip-\fboxsep \baselineskip\z@skip
%    \frenchspacing\@vobeyspaces
%    \boxverb@toprule
%    \verbatim@start}
%
% \def\endboxedverbatim{\hrule\endtrivlist}
%
% \@namefdef{boxedverbatim*}{\let\frenchspacing\@gobble \boxedverbatim}
% \@namefdef{endboxedverbatim*}{\hrule\endtrivlist}
%
% \output=\expandafter{\expandafter\boxverb@split \the\output}
%
% \def\boxverb@toprule{\hrule \nobreak \vskip-.1\p@
%    \@@line{\vrule height2\fboxsep \hss \vrule}}
%
% \def\boxverb@split{\ifnum\outputpenalty=\boxverbflag
%    \ifdim\dp\@cclv=\z@
%    \setbox\@cclv\vbox{\unvbox\@cclv\hrule\kern-.4pt}%
%    \null \kern-.7\topskip \boxverb@toprule
%    \fi\fi}
% \end{verbatim}
% That's the end of DA's posted code
%
% I have extended this to provide:
% \begin{itemize}
%  \item A (multipage) boxed verbatim
%  \item A (multipage) boxed verbatim input
%  \item Normally each `page' is boxed, but start/end rules can be switched off
%    at page boundaries
%  \item A heading can be put at the start of `continuation' pages
%  \item Lines of verbatim text can be numbered
%  \item Can be `degraded' to normal verbatim environment
%  \end{itemize}
%
%    Before proceeding with the main, here are some macros for aspects
% of line numbering.
%
% \begin{macro}{\linenumberfont}
% \begin{macro}{\vlvnumfont}
%  Set line numbering font(s).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\linenumberfont}[1]{\def\vlvnumfont{#1}}
%%% \linenumberfont{\small\rmfamily}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\linenumberfrequency}
% \begin{macro}{\linemodnum}
% Set numbering intervals (number modulo). Default is modulus 0.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\linenumberfrequency}[1]{%
  \ifnum #1< \@ne
    \def\linemodnum{0\relax}
    \bvcountlinesfalse
  \else
    \def\linemodnum{#1\relax}
    \bvcountlinestrue
  \fi
}
%%%%\linenumberfrequency{0}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\getthelinenumber}
% |\getthelinenumber|\marg{counter} returns |\thecounter| if it is exactly
% divisible by |\linenumberfrequency|, provided this is not zero.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\getthelinenumber}[1]{%
  \ifnum\@ne=\linemodnum
     \@nameuse{the#1}
  \else
    \ifnum\@ne<\linemodnum
      \@tempcnta=\@nameuse{c@#1}
      \divide\@tempcnta\linemodnum \multiply\@tempcnta\linemodnum
      \ifnum\@tempcnta=\@nameuse{c@#1}\@nameuse{the#1}\fi
    \fi
  \fi
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%    OK, on to the main code.
%
% \begin{macro}{\boxverbflag}
% \begin{macro}{\bvboxsep}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\boxverbflag{14 }
\newlength{\bvboxsep}      % user can change this
\setlength{\bvboxsep}{1em}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifbvperpage % start/end lines on every page of multipage verbatim
\bvperpagetrue

%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bvtopofpage}
% \begin{macro}{\b@vtop}
% Can use |\bvtopofpage| to put a heading above continued verbatims.
% For example \\
% |\bvtopofpage{\begin{center}\normalfont (Continued)\end{center}}| \\
% It only works for |\bvperpagetrue|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\bvtopofpage}[1]{%
  \long\def\b@vtop{#1}
}
\def\b@vtop{}  % used in \boxverb@split for heading 

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\theb@vlinenumber}
% \begin{macro}{\resetbvlinenumber}
% |\resetbvlinenumber| reinitializes the line numbering.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{bvlinectr}
\def\theb@vlinenumber{\getthelinenumber{bvlinectr}}
\newcommand{\resetbvlinenumber}{\setcounter{bvlinectr}{0}}
 
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifbvcountlines}
% TRUE for verbatim line numbers to be printed. Default is not
% to print them. Note that |\linenumberfrequency| twiddles with this.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifbvcountlines   % TRUE to print line numbers of verbatim lines
  \bvcountlinesfalse
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\b@vdocount}
% \begin{macro}{\bvnumlength}
% Increment line number if counting. A line number is printed in
% a space width |\bvnumlength|, which is given a temporary value here.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\b@vdocount{\ifbvcountlines\stepcounter{bvlinectr}\fi}
\newlength{\bvnumlength}       
%% \settowidth{\bvnumlength}{\vlvnumfont 9999}
\settowidth{\bvnumlength}{\normalfont 999}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifbvcountinside}
% \begin{macro}{\bvnumbersinside}
% \begin{macro}{\bvnumbersoutside}
% Flag and commands for positioning the numbers. Default is to print
% them inside the box.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifbvcountinside  % TRUE if line numbers inside box
  \bvcountinsidetrue
\newcommand{\bvnumbersinside}{\bvcountinsidetrue}
\newcommand{\bvnumbersoutside}{\bvcountinsidefalse}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\b@vdoinside}
% \begin{macro}{\b@vdooutside}
% Print numbers inside (outside) the box.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\b@vdoinside{%
  \ifbvcountlines\ifbvcountinside%
    \makebox[\bvnumlength][r]{\vlvnumfont \theb@vlinenumber\space}%
  \fi\fi}

\def\b@vdooutside{%
  \ifbvcountlines\ifbvcountinside\else%
    \llap{\makebox[\bvnumlength][r]{\vlvnumfont \theb@vlinenumber\space}}%
  \fi\fi}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\setupboxverb@line}
% Use a macro for the first main part of DA's code for |\boxedverbatim|, 
% adding lots of hooks.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setupboxverb@line}{%
  \par
  \ifbvperpage
    \output=\expandafter{\expandafter\boxverb@split \the\output}
  \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@processline}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \def\verbatim@processline{\leavevmode
    \b@vdocount%
    \bvleftsidehook\vbox{\advance\hsize-.8\p@ \@@line
      {\b@vdooutside\strut\kern\bvboxsep%
       \b@vdoinside%
       \ift@bs
         \tabverbatim@processline
       \else
         \the\verbatim@line
       \fi
       \hss}%
     \kern\bvboxsep}\bvrightsidehook\par}%
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\setupbox@verb}
% Use a macro for the second main part of DA's code, and integrate it
% with the other verbatim codes (e.g., include |\@maybeobeytags|).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setupbox@verb}{%
  \leftskip\z@skip \rightskip\z@skip
  \interlinepenalty\boxverbflag
  \parfillskip\z@ plus\p@ minus\p@
  \lineskip-\bvboxsep \baselineskip\z@skip
  \frenchspacing\@vobeyspaces\@maybeobeytabs
  \boxverb@toprule
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\boxedverbatim}
% Given the two macros above, we can write a briefer version of DA's 
% |\boxedverbatim(*)|
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\boxedverbatim{\begingroup
  \setupboxverb@line
  \@verbatim
  \setupbox@verb
  \verbatim@start
}
\def\endboxedverbatim{\bvendrulehook\endtrivlist\endgroup}

\@namedef{boxedverbatim*}{%
  \let\frenchspacing\@gobble \boxedverbatim}
\@namedef{endboxedverbatim*}{\bvendrulehook\endtrivlist\endgroup}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\boxverb@toprule{\bvtoprulehook
  \@@line{\bvleftsidehook \bvtopmidhook \bvrightsidehook}}

%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\boxverb@split}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\boxverb@split{\ifnum\outputpenalty=\boxverbflag
  \ifdim\dp\@cclv=\z@
    \setbox\@cclv\vbox{\unvbox\@cclv\hrule\kern-.4pt}%
    \null \kern-.7\topskip \b@vtop \boxverb@toprule
  \fi
\fi
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bvtoprulehook}
% \begin{macro}{\bvendrulehook}
% \begin{macro}{\bvleftsidehook}
% \begin{macro}{\bvrightsidehook}
% \begin{macro}{\bvtopmidhook}
% The new hooks, for the top, bottom, left and right of the box.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\bvtoprulehook{\hrule \nobreak \vskip-.1\p@}
\def\bvendrulehook{\hrule}
\def\bvleftsidehook{\vrule}
\def\bvrightsidehook{\vrule}
\def\bvtopmidhook{\rule{0\p@}{2\bvboxsep} \hss}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\boxedverbatiminput}
% \begin{macro}{\boxedverbatim@input}
% |\boxedverbatiminput{filename}| read in filename contents as verbatim
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\boxedverbatiminput}{\begingroup
  \@ifstar{\let\frenchspacing\@gobble 
           \boxedverbatim@input\relax}%
          {\boxedverbatim@input{\frenchspacing\@vobeyspaces}}}

%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\boxedverbatim@input#1#2{%
  \setupboxverb@line
  \IfFileExists {#2}{\@verbatim #1\relax
  \setupbox@verb
    \verbatim@readfile{\@filef@und}\bvendrulehook\endtrivlist\endgroup\@doendpe}%
  {\typeout {No file #2.}\endgroup}
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% Some prepackaged boxing styles.
%
% \begin{macro}{\bvbox}
% Original (default) boxing.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\bvbox}{%
  \bvperpagetrue%
  \renewcommand{\bvtoprulehook}{\hrule \nobreak \vskip-.1\p@}%
  \renewcommand{\bvleftsidehook}{\vrule}%
  \renewcommand{\bvrightsidehook}{\vrule}%
  \renewcommand{\bvendrulehook}{\hrule}%
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\nobvbox}
% No boxing
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\nobvbox}{%
  \bvperpagefalse%
  \renewcommand{\bvtoprulehook}{}%
  \renewcommand{\bvleftsidehook}{}%
  \renewcommand{\bvrightsidehook}{}%
  \renewcommand{\bvendrulehook}{}%
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bvtopandtail}
% Head and foot horizontal lines only
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\bvtopandtail}{%
  \bvperpagefalse%
  \renewcommand{\bvtoprulehook}{\hrule \nobreak \vskip-.1\p@}%
  \renewcommand{\bvleftsidehook}{}%
  \renewcommand{\bvrightsidehook}{}%
  \renewcommand{\bvendrulehook}{\hrule}%
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bvsides}
% Side vertical lines only
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\bvsides}{%
  \bvperpagefalse%
  \renewcommand{\bvtoprulehook}{\vskip 3ex}%
  \renewcommand{\bvleftsidehook}{\vrule}%
  \renewcommand{\bvrightsidehook}{\vrule}%
  \renewcommand{\bvendrulehook}{}%
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \subsection{The framed package}
%
% The following code is the \Lpack{framed} package.
%
% CODE BY DONALD ARSENEAU
%
%    \begin{macrocode}

%%%%% framed.sty   v 0.3   29-Jul-2001
% Copyright (C) 1992-2001 by Donald Arseneau
% These macros may be freely transmitted, reproduced, or modified
% provided that this notice is left intact.
% 
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%
% Create framed or shaded regions that can break across pages using \\
% |\begin{framed} ... \end{framed}|    --- ordinary frame box (box at margin) \\
% |\begin{shaded} ... \end{shaded}|    --- shaded background (into margin)
%
% The |framed| environment puts the text into |\fbox| with the
% settings |\fboxrule=\FrameRule| and |\fboxsep=\FrameSep|.
% You can change these lengths (using |\setlength|) and you
% can even change the definition of |\FrameCommand| to use
% much fancier boxes.
%
% In fact, the |shaded| environment just redefines |\FrameCommand|
% to use |\colorbox{shadecolor}| (and you have to define the
% color |shadecolor|).
%
% The contents of the framed regions are restricted: 
% Floats, footnotes, marginpars and head-line entries will be lost.
% (Some of these may be handled in a later version.)
% This package will not work with the page breaking of multicol.sty,
% or other systems that perform column-balancing.
%
% PW. I have deleted the original tracing code.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%%%% \ProvidesPackage{framed}[2001/07/29 v 0.3: framed text with page breaks]

%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{environment}{framed}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{framed}% using default \FrameCommand
  {\fram@d {\advance\hsize-\width}}%
  {\endfram@d}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
%
% \begin{environment}{framed}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{shaded}{%
  \def\FrameCommand{\colorbox{shadecolor}}%
  \fram@d {}}%
 {\endfram@d}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\fram@d}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\fram@d#1{\par
 \begingroup
 \skip@\lastskip
 \penalty\@M % updates \page parameters
 \ifdim\pagefilstretch=\z@ \ifdim\pagefillstretch=\z@ \if@nobreak\else
    \vskip-\skip@ \penalty-30 \vskip\skip@
 \fi\fi\fi
 \addvspace{\topsep}%
 \endgroup
 % measure added width and height; call result \width and \height
 \setbox\z@\vbox{\vskip-1in \hbox{\hskip-1in 
   \FrameCommand{\hbox{\vrule \@height 1in \@width 1in}}}\vskip\z@skip}%
 \def\width{\wd\z@}\def\height{\ht\z@}%
 \edef\fb@frw{\the\width}\edef\fb@frh{\the\height}%
 \penalty\@M \vskip 2\baselineskip \vskip\height  % clear out pending page break
 \penalty\@M \vskip -2\baselineskip \vskip-\height
 \penalty\@M % updates \pagetotal
 \fb@adjheight 
 \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox\bgroup
   #1% Modifications to \hsize (can use \width and \height)
   \textwidth\hsize \columnwidth\hsize \@parboxrestore
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\endfram@d}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\endfram@d{\par
     \kern\z@ \penalty-100 % put depth into height
 \egroup
 \begingroup \put@frame \endgroup
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\put@frame}
% |\put@frame| takes the contents of |\@tempboxa| and puts all, or a piece,
% of it on the page with a frame (|\FrameCommand|).  It recurses until
% all of |\@tempboxa| has been used up. (|\@tempboxa| must have zero depth.)
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\put@frame{\relax
  \ifdim\pagegoal=\maxdimen \pagegoal\vsize \fi
  \dimen@\pagegoal \advance\dimen@-\pagetotal % natural space left on page
  \ifdim\dimen@>2\baselineskip % there's appreciable room left on the page
     \begingroup 
       \advance\dimen@.8\pageshrink\relax  % maximum space available on page
       \expandafter\endgroup
     \ifdim\dimen@>\ht\@tempboxa % whole box does fit
%    \end{macrocode}
% Box of size |\the\ht\@tempboxa| fits in |\the\dimen@|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \else % box must be split
%    \end{macrocode}
% Box of size |\the\ht\@tempboxa| must be split to fit in |\the\dimen@|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox{% simulate frame and flexiblity of the page:
           \vskip \fb@frh \@plus\pagestretch \@minus.8\pageshrink
           \kern137sp\kern-137sp\penalty-30 
           \unvbox\@tempboxa}%
        \boxmaxdepth\z@ \splittopskip\z@
%    \end{macrocode}
% Box of size |\the\ht\@tempboxa| is split to the |\the\dimen@|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \setbox\tw@\vsplit\@tempboxa to\dimen@
        \setbox\tw@\vbox{\unvbox\tw@}% natural-sized
%    \end{macrocode}
% Natural height of the split box is |\the\ht\tw@|.
%       If the split-to size |> (\vsize-\topskip)|, then set box to full size
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \begingroup
          \advance\dimen@\topskip
          \expandafter\endgroup
        \ifdim\dimen@>\pagegoal
%    \end{macrocode}
%  Frame is too big, use up the full column.
%    \begin{macrocode}
          \dimen@ii\pagegoal
          \advance\dimen@ii -\topskip
          \advance\dimen@ii \FrameHeightAdjust\relax
        \else
          \advance\dimen@.8\pageshrink
          \ifdim\ht\tw@>\dimen@ii
%    \end{macrocode}
%  Box too tall; rebox it to |\the\dimen@|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
            \dimen@ii\dimen@
          \else % use natural size
            \dimen@ii\ht\tw@
          \fi
        \fi
        \advance\dimen@ii -\fb@frh
        \setbox\tw@\vbox to\dimen@ii \bgroup
        \vskip -\fb@frh \@plus-\pagestretch \@minus-.8\pageshrink
        \unvbox\tw@
        \ifdim\lastkern=-137sp % whole box went to next page
%    \end{macrocode}
% Box split at beginning!
%    \begin{macrocode}
           \egroup \eject % (\vskip for frame size was discarded) 
           \fb@adjheight
        \else %
           \egroup
           \ifvoid\@tempboxa % it all fit after all
%    \end{macrocode}
%  Box split at end!
%    \begin{macrocode}
              \setbox\@tempboxa\box\tw@
           \else % it really did split
%    \end{macrocode}
% Box split as expected. Its reboxed height is |\the\ht\tw@|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
              \centerline{\FrameCommand{\box\tw@}}%
              \hrule \@height\z@
              \eject
              \fb@adjheight
              \put@frame
  \fi\fi\fi\fi
  \ifvoid\@tempboxa\else
    \centerline{\FrameCommand{\box\@tempboxa}}%
    \nointerlineskip \null
    \penalty-30 \vskip\topsep
  \fi}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\fb@adjheight}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\fb@adjheight{%
  \vbox to\FrameHeightAdjust{}% get proper baseline skip from above.
  \penalty\@M \nointerlineskip
  \vskip-\FrameHeightAdjust
  \penalty\@M} % useful for tops of pages

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\FrameCommand}
% \begin{macro}{\FrameRule}
% \begin{macro}{\FrameSep}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\providecommand\FrameCommand{\fboxrule=\FrameRule \fboxsep=\FrameSep \fbox}
\newdimen\FrameRule \FrameRule= \fboxrule
\newdimen\FrameSep  \FrameSep = 3\fboxsep

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\FrameHeightAdjust}
% |\FrameHeightAdjust| is the height of the frame above
% the first baseline when |frame| starts a page.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\providecommand\FrameHeightAdjust{6pt}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% END OF ARSENEAU CODE
%
% \subsection{The newfile package}
%
% The following code is from the \Lpack{newfile} package.
% To try and avoid name clashes with other packages, each internal macro
% in this package includes the character string `|stre@m|'.
%
% \begin{macro}{\newoutputstream}
% |\newoutputstream|\marg{stream} creates a new output stream called \meta{stream}.
% Different files may be associated with the \meta{stream}. Note that
% TeX permits no more than 16 output streams.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\newoutputstream}[1]{%
  \@ifundefined{#1outstre@m}%
    {\expandafter\newwrite\csname #1outstre@m\endcsname
     \csname newif\expandafter\endcsname
       \csname ifstre@m#1open\endcsname
     \global\csname stre@m#1openfalse\endcsname
     \expandafter\ifx\csname atstreamopen#1\endcsname\relax
       \global\@namedef{atstreamopen#1}{}%
     \fi
     \expandafter\ifx\csname atstreamclose#1\endcsname\relax
       \global\@namedef{atstreamclose#1}{}%
     \fi
    }%
    {\ClassWarning{memoir}{Output stream #1\space is already defined}}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\newinputstream}
% |\newinputstream|\marg{stream} creates a new input stream called \meta{stream}.
% Different files may be associated with the \meta{stream}. Note that
% TeX permits no more than 16 input streams.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\newinputstream}[1]{%
  \@ifundefined{#1instre@m}%
    {\expandafter\newread\csname #1instre@m\endcsname
     \csname newif\expandafter\endcsname
       \csname ifstre@m#1open\endcsname
     \global\csname stre@m#1openfalse\endcsname
     \expandafter\ifx\csname atstreamopen#1\endcsname\relax
       \global\@namedef{atstreamopen#1}{}%
     \fi
     \expandafter\ifx\csname atstreamclose#1\endcsname\relax
       \global\@namedef{atstreamclose#1}{}%
     \fi
    }%
    {\ClassWarning{memoir}{Input stream #1\space is already defined}}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%    Some checking macros will be useful as some of the checks occur in
% multiple places.
%
% \begin{macro}{\IfStreamOpen}
% |\IfStreamOpen|\marg{stream}\marg{TRUE code}\marg{FALSE code}
% checks if stream \meta{stream} is currently open.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\IfStreamOpen}[3]{%
  \csname ifstre@m#1open\endcsname#2\else#3\fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\instre@mandopen}
% |\instre@mandopen|\marg{stream}\marg{TRUE code} checks if \meta{stream}
% is an input stream and is open. If so, it executes \meta{TRUE code}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\instre@mandopen}[2]{%
  \@ifundefined{#1instre@m}{%
    \ClassWarning{memoir}{#1\space is not an input stream}}%
  {\IfStreamOpen{#1}{#2}{%
    \ClassWarning{memoir}{Input stream #1\space is not open}}}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\instre@mandclosed}
% |\instre@mandclosed|\marg{stream}\marg{TRUE code} checks if \meta{stream}
% is an input stream and is closed (not open). 
% If so, it executes \meta{TRUE code}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\instre@mandclosed}[2]{%
  \@ifundefined{#1instre@m}{%
    \ClassWarning{memoir}{#1\space is not an input stream}}%
  {\IfStreamOpen{#1}{%
    \ClassWarning{memoir}{Input stream #1\space is open}}{#2}}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\outstre@mandopen}
% |\outstre@mandopen|\marg{stream}\marg{TRUE code} checks if \meta{stream}
% is an output stream and is open. If so, it executes \meta{TRUE code}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\outstre@mandopen}[2]{%
  \@ifundefined{#1outstre@m}{%
    \ClassWarning{memoir}{#1\space is not an output stream}}%
  {\IfStreamOpen{#1}{#2}{%
    \ClassWarning{memoir}{Output stream #1\space is not open}}}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\outstre@mandclosed}
% |\outstre@mandclosed|\marg{stream}\marg{TRUE code} checks if \meta{stream}
% is an output stream and is closed (not open). 
% If so, it executes \meta{TRUE code}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\outstre@mandclosed}[2]{%
  \@ifundefined{#1outstre@m}{%
    \ClassWarning{memoir}{#1\space is not an output stream}}%
  {\IfStreamOpen{#1}{%
    \ClassWarning{memoir}{Output stream #1\space is open}}{#2}}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\openoutputfile}
% |\openoutputfile|\marg{filename}\marg{stream} opens the file called 
% \meta{filename} and attaches it to the stream \meta{stream} for
% writing. However, if the |\nofiles| command has been given the
% file is \emph{not} attached to the stream. No more than one file can be 
% attached to a stream at any given time.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\openoutputfile}[2]{%
  \outstre@mandclosed{#2}{%
    \global\@namedef{#1@filename}{#1}%
    \if@filesw 
      \immediate\openout\@nameuse{#2outstre@m}=\@nameuse{#1@filename}%
    \fi
    \global\csname stre@m#2opentrue\endcsname%
    \@nameuse{atstreamopen#2}%
  }%
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\closeoutputstream}
% |\closeoutputstream|\marg{stream} closes the stream \meta{stream}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\closeoutputstream}[1]{%
  \outstre@mandopen{#1}{%
    \@nameuse{atstreamclose#1}%
    \immediate\closeout\@nameuse{#1outstre@m}%
    \global\csname stre@m#1openfalse\endcsname}%
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\openinputfile}
% |\openinputfile|\marg{filename}\marg{stream} opens the file called 
% \meta{filename} and attaches it to the stream \meta{stream} for
% reading. The file is added to the list of files. 
% No more than one file can be attached to a stream at
% any given time.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\openinputfile}[2]{%
  \IfFileExists{#1}{%                   file exists
    \instre@mandclosed{#2}{% 
      \@addtofilelist{#1}%
      \global\@namedef{#1@filename}{#1}%
      \immediate\openin\@nameuse{#2instre@m}=\@nameuse{#1@filename}%
      \global\csname stre@m#2opentrue\endcsname%
      \@nameuse{atstreamopen#2}}}%
  {%                                    file not found
    \typeout{No file #1.}
  }%
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\closeinputstream}
% |\closeinputstream|\marg{stream} closes the stream \meta{stream}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\closeinputstream}[1]{%
  \instre@mandopen{#1}{%
     \@nameuse{atstreamclose#1}%
     \immediate\closein\@nameuse{#1instre@m}%
     \global\csname stre@m#1openfalse\endcsname}%
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{environment}{writeverbatim}
% |\begin{writeverbatim}|\marg{stream} writes the contents of
% the environment as verbatim text to the given \meta{stream}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\writeverbatim#1{%
  \@bsphack
  \let\do\@makeother\dospecials
  \catcode`\^^M\active
  \def\verbatim@processline{%
    \immediate\write\@nameuse{#1outstre@m}{\the\verbatim@line}}%
  \verbatim@start}
\def\endwriteverbatim{\@esphack}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\addtostream}
% |\addtostream|\marg{stream}\marg{text} writes \meta{text} to the
% given \meta{stream}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\addtostream}[2]{%
  \@bsphack
  \outstre@mandopen{#1}{%
    {\let\protect\string
     \immediate\write\@nameuse{#1outstre@m}{#2}%
    }}%
  \@esphack
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifstre@mnoteof}
% \begin{macro}{\checkstre@mnoteof}
% |\checkstre@mnoteof|\marg{stream} sets |\ifstre@mnoteof| to TRUE if
% \meta{stream} is not at the end of the file (i.e., it is the opposite
% of |\ifeof|).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifstre@mnoteof
\newcommand{\checkstre@meof}[1]{%
  \stre@mnoteoftrue\ifeof\@nameuse{#1instre@m}\stre@mnoteoffalse\fi}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\readstream}
% |\readstream|\marg{stream} reads the contents of
% the given \meta{stream} as |\input| text.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\readstream#1{
  \instre@mandopen{#1}{%
    \loop \checkstre@meof{#1} \ifstre@mnoteof
      \read\@nameuse{#1instre@m} to\temptokstre@m
     \temptokstre@m
    \repeat
    }%
}
  
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\readaline}
% |\readaline|\marg{stream} reads what TeX considers to be one line
% from the given \meta{stream} as |\input| text.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\readaline#1{
  \instre@mandopen{#1}{%
    \ifeof\@nameuse{#1instre@m}
      \ClassWarning{memoir}{No more to read from stream #1}
    \else
      \read\@nameuse{#1instre@m} to\temptokstre@m
      \temptokstre@m
    \fi
    }%
}
  
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\readverbatim}
% |\readverbatim|\marg{stream} reads the contents of
% the given \meta{stream} as verbatim text.
%
% The read verbatim code is a slight variation on code from the
% \Lpack{verbatim} package. Most of the setup is done by the macros
% |\stre@mverb@input|\marg{setup}\marg{stream} and
% |\verbatim@readstre@m|\marg{stream}. Finally, |\verbatim@read@file|
% is a \Lpack{verbatim} package macro.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\readverbatim{\begingroup
  \ift@bs
    \def\verbatim@processline{\tabverbatim@processline}%
  \fi
  \@ifstar{\stre@mverb@input{\@maybeobeytabs}}%
          {\stre@mverb@input{\frenchspacing\@vobeyspaces\@maybeobeytabs}}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\stre@mverb@input}
% \begin{macro}{\@verbinstre@m}
% |\stre@mverb@input|\marg{setup}\marg{stream} is a stream
% version of |\verbatim@input|. It defines |\@verbinstre@m|
% to be \meta{stream}.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\stre@mverb@input}[2]{%
  \IfStreamOpen{#2}%
    {\@verbatim #1\relax
     \def\@verbinstre@m{\@nameuse{#2instre@m}}
     \verb@readstre@m\endtrivlist\endgroup\@doendpe}%
    {\ClassWarning{memoir}{Stream #2\space is not open}\endgroup}%
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\verb@readstre@m}
% |\verb@readstre@m| is the stream analogue to |\verbatim@readfile|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\verb@readstre@m}{%
  \verbatim@startline
  \expandafter\endlinechar\expandafter\m@ne
  \expandafter\verbatim@read@stre@m
  \expandafter\endlinechar\the\endlinechar\relax
  \verbatim@finish
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@read@stre@m}
% |\verbatim@read@stre@m| is the analogue to |\verbatim@readfile|.
% It gets its input from the stream |\@verbinstre@m|, which is defined
% in the |\stre@mverb@input| macro.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\verbatim@read@stre@m}{%
  \read\@verbinstre@m to\next
  \ifeof\@verbinstre@m
  \else
    \expandafter\verbatim@addtoline\expandafter{\next}%
    \verbatim@processline
    \verbatim@startline
    \expandafter\verbatim@read@stre@m
  \fi
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\readboxedverbatim}
% |\readboxedverbatim|\marg{stream} is the equivalent of
% |\readverbtim| except that it generates a boxed verbatim.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\readboxedverbatim}{\begingroup
  \@ifstar{\stre@mbvin\relax}%
          {\stre@mbvin{\frenchspacing\@vobeyspaces}}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\stre@mbvin}
% |\stre@mbvin|\marg{setup}\marg{stream} is the workhorse for
% |\readboxedverbatim|, and in its turn it uses |\verb@readstre@m|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\stre@mbvin}[2]{%
  \IfStreamOpen{#2}%
    {\setupboxverb@line
     \@verbatim #1\relax
     \def\@verbinstre@m{\@nameuse{#2instre@m}}%
     \setupbox@verb
     \verb@readstre@m\bvendrulehook\endtrivlist\endgroup\@doendpe}%
    {\ClassWarning{memoir}{Stream #2\space is not open}\endgroup}%
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \section{Utilities}
%
%
% \subsection{Extra `provide' commands}
%
% \begin{macro}{\provideenvironment}
% Works like |\providecommand| but for environments.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/08/04}{Added \cs{provideenvironment} and supports}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\provideenvironment}{\@star@or@long\m@mprovenv}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mprovenv}
% This checks if the environment has been defined. If not it calls
% the kernel code for |\newenvironment| otherwise it calls code to
% discard arguments.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@mprovenv}[1]{\@ifundefined{#1}%
  {\new@environment{#1}}%       % create new environment
  {\ClassWarning{memoir}{Environment `#1' already defined}%
   \m@mgobbleoptsandtwo}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mgobbleoptsandtwo}
% \begin{macro}{\m@mgobbleoptandtwo}
% |\m@mgobbleoptsandtwo| gobbles the |[opt][opt]{begin}{end}| arguments to 
% |\provideenvironment|. It is actually more general than that as it will 
% gobble any sequence of any number of optional arguments followed by
% two required arguments. If there are no optional arguments it disposes
% of the two required ones, other it calls a recursive procedure to
% discard any number of optionals, then two required ones.
%
% |\m@mgobbleoptandtwo| recursively discards optional arguments, then finally
% two required arguments.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@mgobbleoptsandtwo}{%
  \@ifnextchar [{\m@mgobbleoptandtwo}{\@gobbletwo}}
\def\m@mgobbleoptandtwo[#1]{%
  \@ifnextchar [{\m@mgobbleoptandtwo}{\@gobbletwo}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\providecounter}
% Works like the other |\provide...| commands, but for counters.
% Code is based on |\newcounter| in |ltcounts.dtx|.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/17}{Added \cs{providecounter}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\providecounter}[1]{%
  \@ifundefined{c@#1}%
    {\newcounter{#1}}%
    {\ClassWarning{memoir}{Counter `#1' already defined}%
      \@ifnextchar[{\m@mgobbleopt}{}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\m@mgobbleopt}
% Gobble an optional argument.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/07}{Added \cs{m@mgobbleopt}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\m@mgobbleopt[#1]{}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\providelength}
% Works like the other |\provide...| commands, but for lengths.
% Code is based on |\provide@command| in |ltdefns.dtx|.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/17}{Added \cs{providelength}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*{\providelength}[1]{%
  \begingroup
    \escapechar\m@ne\xdef\@gtempa{{\string#1}}%
  \endgroup
  \expandafter\@ifundefined\@gtempa
    {\newlength{#1}}%
    {\ClassWarning{memoir}{Length #1 already defined}}%
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Changing counters}
%
%     In LaTeX, a new counter called, say `ctr', is created by the command
% |\newcounter{ctr}[within]|. If the optional within argument is given
% the the counter `ctr' is reset to zero each time the counter `within'
% changes. The command |\thectr| typesets the value of the counter ctr.
% This is automatically defined by |\newcounter| and is initialised
% to typeset arabic numerals. Sometimes it may be desireable to change
% the counter definitions.
%
% The following code is based on the \Lpack{chngcntr} package~\cite{CHNGCNTR}.
%
% \begin{macro}{\@removefromreset}
% This code uses David Carlisle's |\@removefromreset| command as
% specified in the remreset package~\cite{REMRESET}.
% It is provided here as a convenience to the user, and with
% David Carlisle's permission.
%
% START OF DAVID CARLISLE'S CODE
%    \begin{macrocode}
\providecommand{\@removefromreset}[2]{{%
  \expandafter\let\csname c@#1\endcsname\@removefromreset
  \def\@elt##1{%
    \expandafter\ifx\csname c@##1\endcsname\@removefromreset
    \else
      \noexpand\@elt{##1}%
    \fi}%
  \expandafter\xdef\csname cl@#2\endcsname{%
    \csname cl@#2\endcsname}}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% END OF DAVID CARLISLE'S CODE
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@ifbothcntrs}
% This is called as \\
% |\@ifbothcntrs{|\meta{cntr}|}{|\meta{within}|}{<code when both are counters>}|. 
% This tests if both \meta{cntr} and \meta{within} are counters.
%    \begin{macrocode} 
\newcommand{\@ifbothcntrs}[3]{%
  \@ifundefined{c@#1}{% counter undefined
    \ClassError{memoir}{#1 is not a counter}{\@eha}}%
  {% else counter is defined
    \@ifundefined{c@#2}{% within undefined
      \ClassError{memoir}{#2 is not a counter}{\@eha}}%
    {% else both counter and within  are defined
     #3}}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\counterwithin}
% \begin{macro}{\counterwithin*}
% \begin{macro}{\@csinstar}
% \begin{macro}{\@csin}
%    It is sometimes desireable to change a counter that has been defined
% by |\newcounter{ctr}| to act as though it had been defined as 
% |\newcounter{ctr}[within]|. The command
% |\counterwithin{ctr}{within}| accomplishes this. By default,
% it also redefines the |\thectr| command so that it typesets values
% in the style |\thewithin.\arabic{ctr}|. The starred version of the
% command suppresses the redefinition of |\thectr|. 
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\counterwithin}{\@ifstar{\@csinstar}{\@csin}}
\newcommand{\@csinstar}[2]{%
  \@ifbothcntrs{#1}{#2}{\@addtoreset{#1}{#2}}}
\newcommand{\@csin}[2]{%
  \@ifbothcntrs{#1}{#2}{\@addtoreset{#1}{#2}%
                        \@namedef{the#1}{\@nameuse{the#2}.\arabic{#1}}}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\counterwithout}
% \begin{macro}{\counterwithout*}
% \begin{macro}{\@csoutstar}
% \begin{macro}{\@csout}
%    Likewise, the command |\counterwithout{ctr}{within}| changes a
% counter that has been created by |\newcounter{ctr}[within]| to act
% as though it had been created by |\newcounter{ctr}|. By default it
% also redefines the |\thectr| command so that it just typesets an arabic
% numeral. The starred version of the command suppresses the redefinition
% of |\thectr|.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\counterwithout}{\@ifstar{\@csoutstar}{\@csout}}
\newcommand{\@csoutstar}[2]{%
  \@ifbothcntrs{chngcntr}{#1}{#2}{\@removefromreset{#1}{#2}}}
\newcommand{\@csout}[2]{%
  \@ifbothcntrs{#1}{#2}{\@removefromreset{#1}{#2}%
                        \@namedef{the#1}{\arabic{#1}}}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%    Any number of |\counterwithin{ctr}{...}| and |\counterwithout{ctr}{...}|
% commands can be issued for a given counter, ctr, if you wish to toggle
% between the two styles. The current value of ctr is unaffected by
% |\counterwithin| and |\counterwithout|. If you want to change the value
% after one of these commands, use |\setcounter{ctr}{...}|, and to change
% the typeseting style use |\renewcommand{\thectr}{...}|.
%
% \subsection{Odd/even page checking}
%
% It is difficult to check robustly if the current page is odd or even.
% This code, which is based on the \Lpack{chngpage} package~\cite{CHNGPAGE}, 
% provides a method that has proved (so far) to be robust.
%    It works by writing out a label and on the next LaTeX run checks
% the page reference for the label.
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifoddpage}
% \begin{macro}{\ifstrictpagecheck}
% \begin{macro}{\c@cp@cntr}
% \begin{macro}{\cplabel}
% The boolean |\ifoddpage| is TRUE if the checked page is odd. The
% boolean |\ifstrictpagecheck| is for turning on (TRUE) and off (FALSE)
% the strictest method of page checking. The counter |cp@cntr| is used
% to make unique labels, which start with |\cplabel|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifoddpage
\newif\ifstrictpagecheck
  \strictpagecheckfalse
\newcounter{cp@cntr}
\newcommand{\cplabel}{^_}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cpset@ref}
% \begin{macro}{\cpp@geref}
% We need to be able to handle a particular label not (yet) being in
% the \file{.aux} file when we come to check the |\pageref| number.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\cpset@ref}[3]{%
  \ifx#1\relax
    0% in case no label in the *.aux file (page number made = 0)
  \else
    \expandafter#2#1%
  \fi}
\newcommand{\cpp@geref}[1]{%
  \expandafter\cpset@ref\csname r@#1\endcsname\@secondoftwo{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The \Lpack{hyperref} package screws around with most of the
% LaTeX internals, so special code is needed if the package is
% loaded.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\AtBeginDocument{%  % special code if hyperrref package is used
  \@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{%
    \renewcommand{\cpp@geref}[1]{%
      \expandafter\ifx\csname r@#1\endcsname\relax
        0%    % zero
      \else
        \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
        \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\@car
        \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\@gobble
        \csname r@#1\endcsname\@nil
      \fi}}{}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\checkoddpage}
% This is the user level command to check for odd/even page. It does
% a robust check for |\strictpagecheck| otherwise the simple minded
% check. It sets |\ifoddpage| to TRUE if the page is odd, otherwise
% it sets it to FALSE.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand{\checkoddpage}{%
  \oddpagefalse%
  \ifstrictpagecheck
    \stepcounter{cp@cntr}\label{\cplabel\thecp@cntr}%
    \@memcnta=\cpp@geref{\cplabel\thecp@cntr} % must have a space here
    \ifodd\@memcnta\oddpagetrue\fi
  \else
    \ifodd\c@page\oddpagetrue\fi
  \fi
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%  \subsection{Checking for empty arguments}
%
%  Like page checking, testing for an empty macro argument is more
% difficult than it might appear at first sight.
%
%    The following code is from the \Lpack{ifmtarg} package~\cite{IFMTARG}.
%
% \begin{macro}{\@ifmtarg}
% \begin{macro}{\@ifnotmtarg}
% |\@ifmtarg{|\meta{arg}|}{<code when arg is empty>}{<code when arg not empty>}| \\
% |\@ifnotmtarg{|\meta{arg}|}{<code when arg not empty>}| \\
%    \begin{macrocode}
\begingroup
\catcode`\Q=3
\long\gdef\@ifmtarg#1{\@xifmtarg#1QQ\@secondoftwo\@firstoftwo\@nil}
\long\gdef\@xifmtarg#1#2Q#3#4#5\@nil{#4}
\long\gdef\@ifnotmtarg#1{\@xifmtarg#1QQ\@firstofone\@gobble\@nil}
\endgroup

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%    Some example uses:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \newcommand{\isempty}[1]{%
%    \@ifmtarg{#1}{\typeout{YES}}{\typeout{NO}}}
% \newcommand{\isnotempty}[1]{%
%    \@ifnotmtarg{#1}{\typeout{YES}}}
%
% \isempty{}    -> YES  \isnotempty{}    -> 
% \isempty{   } -> YES  \isnotempty{   } -> 
% \isempty{A}   -> NO   \isnotempty{A}   -> YES 
% \isempty{ A } -> NO   \isnotempty{ A } -> YES 
% \end{verbatim}
%
%
% \subsection{Changing the page layout in the document}
%
%  You should not do this, but\ldots
%
% The following code is essentially from the \Lpack{chngpage} 
% package~\cite{CHNGPAGE}.
%
% \begin{macro}{\ch@ngetext}
% This macro sets the page output parameters.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand{\ch@ngetext}{%
  \setlength{\@colht}{\textheight}\setlength{\@colroom}{\textheight}%
  \setlength{\vsize}{\textheight}\setlength{\columnwidth}{\textwidth}%
  \if@twocolumn%
    \advance\columnwidth-\columnsep \divide\columnwidth\tw@%
    \@firstcolumntrue%
  \fi%
  \setlength{\hsize}{\columnwidth}%
  \setlength{\linewidth}{\hsize}%
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\changetext}
% |\changetext{|\meta{H}|}{|\meta{W}|}{|\meta{E}|}{|\meta{O}|}{|\meta{G}|}|
% adds the given lengths to 5 main bits of the page layout. An empty
% argument means `no change'.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand{\changetext}[5]{%
  \@ifmtarg{#1}{}{\addtolength{\textheight}{#1}}%
  \@ifmtarg{#2}{}{\addtolength{\textwidth}{#2}}%
  \@ifmtarg{#3}{}{\addtolength{\evensidemargin}{#3}}%
  \@ifmtarg{#4}{}{\addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{#4}}%
  \@ifmtarg{#5}{}{\addtolength{\columnsep}{#5}}%
  \ch@ngetext%
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% Any given change lasts until another |\changetext| command is given.
% A |\changetext| command should only be issued between two paragraphs.
%
% |\changetext| should not be used by anyone unless they really
% know what they are doing. If you really know what you are doing
% then you should know enough not to use it.
%
% \subsection{Temporarily changing the text width}
%
%
% \begin{environment}{adjustwidth}
% \begin{environment}{adjustwidth*}
% |\begin{adjustwidth}{|\meta{left}|}{|\meta{right}|}|
% adds the given lengths to the left and right hand margins. A positive
% value will shorten the text and a negative value will widen it. The
% starred version of the environment will cause the
% margin changes to switch between odd and even pages.
%
% This code is based on the \Lpack{chngpage} package.
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Replaced optional arg of adjustwidth by adjustwidth*}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{adjustwidth}[2]{%
  \begin{list}{}{%
    \topsep\z@%
    \listparindent\parindent%
    \parsep\parskip%
    \@ifmtarg{#1}{\setlength{\leftmargin}{\z@}}{\setlength{\leftmargin}{#1}}%
    \@ifmtarg{#2}{\setlength{\rightmargin}{\z@}}{\setlength{\rightmargin}{#2}}%
    }
    \item[]}{\end{list}}

%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{adjustwidth*}[2]{%
  \begin{list}{}{%
    \topsep\z@%
    \listparindent\parindent%
    \parsep\parskip%
    \checkoddpage
    \ifoddpage  % odd numbered page
      \@ifmtarg{#1}{\setlength{\leftmargin}{\z@}}{\setlength{\leftmargin}{#1}}%
      \@ifmtarg{#2}{\setlength{\rightmargin}{\z@}}{\setlength{\rightmargin}{#2}}%
    \else       % even numbered page
      \@ifmtarg{#2}{\setlength{\leftmargin}{\z@}}{\setlength{\leftmargin}{#2}}%
      \@ifmtarg{#1}{\setlength{\rightmargin}{\z@}}{\setlength{\rightmargin}{#1}}%
    \fi
    }
    \item[]}{\end{list}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
% \end{environment}
%
%  The environments only work for complete paragraphs.
%
% \begin{macro}{\calccentering}
% This macro calculates the amount to be added to the spine margin
% (and subtracted from the foredge margin) 
% in order to center the textblock. Call as \\
% |\calccentering{\length}| and it sets |\length|
% to the required value. Then use as \\
% |\begin{adjustwidth*}{\length}{-\length}...|
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\calccentering}[1]{
  #1 = \paperwidth
  \advance #1 by -\textwidth
  \divide #1 by \tw@
  \advance #1 by -\spinemargin
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Moving from the current page}
%
% Much of this code is taken from the \Lpack{nextpage} package~\cite{NEXTPAGE}.
%
% Clear to next page is |\clearpage|.
%
% \begin{macro}{\cleartoevenpage}
%  |\cleartoevenpage[|\meta{text}|}| clears to the next even 
% numbered page, 
%  putting the optional \meta{text} on the skipped page, if any.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\cleartoevenpage}[1][\@empty]{%
  \clearpage%
  \ifodd\c@page\hbox{}#1\clearpage\fi}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% Move to the next page without flushing floats is |\newpage|.
%
% \begin{macro}{\movetoevenpage}
%  |\movetoevenpage[|\meta{text}|}| moves to the next even 
% numbered page without flushing floats, 
%  putting the optional \meta{text} on the skipped page, if any.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\movetoevenpage}[1][\@empty]{%
  \newpage%
  \ifodd\c@page\hbox{}#1\newpage\fi}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% Clear to next odd numbered page is |\cleardoublepage|.
%
% \begin{macro}{\cleartooddpage}
%  |\cleartooddpage[|\meta{text}|}| clears to the next odd
% numbered page, 
%  putting the optional \meta{text} on the skipped page, if any.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\cleartooddpage}[1][\@empty]{%
  \clearpage%
  \ifodd\c@page\else\hbox{}#1\clearpage\fi}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\movetooddpage}
%  |\movetooddpage[|\meta{text}|}| moves to the next odd
% numbered page without flushing floats, 
%  putting the optional \meta{text} on the skipped page, if any.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\movetooddpage}[1][\@empty]{%
  \newpage%
  \ifodd\c@page\else\hbox{}#1\newpage\fi}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% Example uses: \\
% \begin{verbatim}
% \cleartooddpage                         % same as \cleardouble page
% \cleartooddpage[\thispagestyle{empty}]  % No headings on the skipped page
% \cleartoevenpage                        % go to next even numbered page
% Next example puts text on a skipped page
% \cleartoevenpage[\vspace*{\hfill}THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK\vspace*{\hfill}]
% \end{verbatim}
%
%
%
% \subsection{Needing space at the bottom of a page}
%
% \begin{macro}{\needspace}
% |\needspace{|\meta{length}|}| checks if the is \meta{length} amount
% of vertical space left on the page. If there is not it will start
% a new page. The code is from the \Lpack{needspace} package~\cite{NEEDSPACE}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\needspace}[1]{%
  \vskip \z@ \@plus #1\pagebreak[3]\vskip \z@ \@plus -#1\relax}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%  \subsection{Numbers to names}
%
% The macros here convert an integer number in the range 1--99 into
% the natural language name of the number.
%
% \begin{macro}{\iflowernumtoname}
% A flag for lowercasing the initial letters.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\iflowernumtoname
  \lowernumtonamefalse

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\numtoname}
% Integers to lowercased names.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\numtoname}[1]{%
  \lowernumtonametrue%
  \numtoName{#1}%
  \lowernumtonamefalse}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\numtoName}
% Integers to names with first letter uppercase, in the range 1--99.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\numtoName}[1]{%
  \ifnum #1<\@ne
  \else
    \ifnum #1<20\relax
        \ifcase #1\relax
         \or\nNamei\or\nNameii\or\nNameiii\or\nNameiv\or\nNamev\or
            \nNamevi\or\nNamevii\or\nNameviii\or\nNameix\or\nNamex\or
            \nNamexi\or\nNamexii\or\nNamexiii\or\nNamexiv\or\nNamexv\or
            \nNamexvi\or\nNamexvii\or\nNamexviii\or\nNamexix\fi
    \else
      \tenstoName{#1}%    % must have the first comment char 
    \fi
  \fi}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\tenstoName}
% Integers to names in the range 20--99.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\tenstoName}[1]{%
  \@tempcnta=#1\relax \@tempcntb=\m@ne
  \divide\@tempcnta by 10
  \ifcase\@tempcnta\or\or
    \nNamexx%
     \@tempcntb=#1\relax\advance\@tempcntb -20\relax\or
    \nNamexxx%
     \@tempcntb=#1\relax\advance\@tempcntb -30\relax\or
    \nNamexl%
     \@tempcntb=#1\relax\advance\@tempcntb -40\relax\or
    \nNamel%
     \@tempcntb=#1\relax\advance\@tempcntb -50\relax\or
    \nNamelx%
     \@tempcntb=#1\relax\advance\@tempcntb -60\relax\or
    \nNamelxx%
     \@tempcntb=#1\relax\advance\@tempcntb -70\relax\or
    \nNamelxxx%
     \@tempcntb=#1\relax\advance\@tempcntb -80\relax\or
    \nNamexc%
     \@tempcntb=#1\relax\advance\@tempcntb -90\relax\else
    \nNamec%
  \fi%
  \ifnum\@tempcntb>\z@
    \space
    \numtoName{\@tempcntb}%
  \fi}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{A fix for two column headings}
%
%
% This is from a posting by Donald Arseneau to CTT on 23 April 2001 to fix
% a problem --- `When I use |\onecolumn\chapter...| its headline
% is printed lower on the page than for two-column chapters'
%
% DA and I had previously discussed this in relation to the Index
% and I had put a hack into the \Lpack{tocbibind} package to fix the Index.
%
% Donald posted the following.
%
% |\vspace*| gives bad spacing after a pagebreak and |\@makechapterhead|
% starts with |\vspace*|.
% The biggest problem is the definition of |\@topnewpage|, which is used
% for the two-column spanning text. Here is a redefinition:
% \changes{v0.2}{2001/06/03}{Added DA's redefinition of \cs{@topnewpage}}
% \begin{macro}{\@topnewpage}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\long\def \@topnewpage [#1]{%
  \@nodocument
  \@next\@currbox\@freelist{}{}%
  \global \setbox\@currbox
    \vbox {%
      \break
      \prevdepth\z@
      \begingroup
      \normalcolor
      \hsize\textwidth
      \@parboxrestore
      \col@number \@ne
      #1%
      \vskip -\dbltextfloatsep
      \endgroup
      \null % ordinary \baselineskip
      \vskip -\topskip
  }%
  \begingroup %% \showbox\@currbox
    \splitmaxdepth\maxdepth \splittopskip\topskip
    \setbox\@tempboxa \vsplit\@currbox to \z@
  \endgroup %% \showbox\@currbox
  \ifdim \ht\@currbox>\textheight
    \ht\@currbox \textheight
  \fi
  \global \count\@currbox \tw@
  \@tempdima -\ht\@currbox
  \advance \@tempdima -\dbltextfloatsep
  \global \advance \@colht \@tempdima
  \ifx \@dbltoplist \@empty
  \else
    \@latexerr{Float(s) lost}\@ehb
    \let \@dbltoplist \@empty
  \fi
  \@cons \@dbltoplist \@currbox
  \global \@dbltopnum \m@ne
  \ifdim \@colht<2.5\baselineskip
    \@latex@warning@no@line {Optional argument of \noexpand\twocolumn
        too tall on page \thepage}%
    \@emptycol
    \if@firstcolumn
    \else
      \@emptycol
    \fi
  \else
    \global \vsize \@colht
    \global \@colroom \@colht
    \@floatplacement
  \fi
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% The original version of |\@topnewpage| is in \file{ltouput.dtx}, line 159.
%
%
% \section{Experimental code}
%
% Code in this section is probably unstable and possibly may disappear 
% altogether.
%
% \subsection{Sidebars}
%
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/19}{Added experimental code for sidebars}
%
% On 2002/10/22 Donald Arseneau posted the following code to ctt for adding
% sidebars to plain TeX.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \newinsert\sideins
% \skip\sideins=0pt
% \count\sideins=0
% \dimen\sideins=2in
% 
% \def\sidebarvsep{25pt}
% \def\sidebarhsep{15pt}
% 
% \let\mainpagecontents\pagecontents
% 
% \def\sidecontents{%
%   \ifvoid\sideins\else
%       {\advance\hsize\sidebarhsep
%        \moveright\hsize \vtop to0pt{%
%        \vskip-\sidebarvsep \vskip\topskip % offset by difference
%        \unvbox\sideins \vss}%
%     }\fi}
% \def\pagecontents{\sidecontents\mainpagecontents}
% \long\def\sidebar#1{
%   \insert\sideins{%
%     \splittopskip\sidebarvsep\relax
%     \hsize 1.5in \rightskip=0pt plus 20pt \it
%     \noindent \vbox to \sidebarvsep{}\ignorespaces #1%
%     \ifhmode \unskip\strut\fi \par
%    }%
% }
% 
% \end{verbatim}
%
% The following is my attempt to rewrite the above into a form suitable
% for LaTeX, and this class in particular.
%
% \begin{macro}{\sideins}
% Create a new insert called |\sideins|, which also creates a corresponding
% skip, count, dimen, and box. \\
% |\skip\sideins| is the extra vertical space to allow on the page for 
% the insert, \\
% |\count\sideins| is the magnification factor for page breaking, \\
% |\dimen\sideins| is the maximum insertion size (height) per page, \\
% and the inserted material will be in |\box\sideins| when a page is output.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newinsert\sideins
  \skip\sideins=0pt
  \count\sideins=0

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setsidebarheight}
% The macro |\setsidebarheight{|\meta{length}|}| sets the total
% height of sidebars on a page to \meta{length}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setsidebarheight}[1]{\dimen\sideins= #1}
  \setsidebarheight{20\onelineskip}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% 
% \begin{macro}{\sidebarhsep}
% \begin{macro}{\sidebarvsep}
% \begin{macro}{\sidebarwidth}
% The length |\sidebarhsep| is the gap between the typeblock and the sidebar.
% |\sidebarvsep| is the vertical gap between sidebars on a page.
% The maximum number of sidebar lines on a page is 
% |1 + (\dimen\sideins - \sidebarvsep)|, assuming |\dimen\sideins|
% is defined in terms of |\onelineskip|.
% The width of the sidebar is |\sidebarwidth|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\sidebarhsep} \setlength{\sidebarhsep}{\marginparsep}
\newlength{\sidebarvsep} \setlength{\sidebarvsep}{2\onelineskip}
\newlength{\sidebarwidth} \setlength{\sidebarwidth}{\marginparwidth}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sidebarfont}
% The font for typesetting the contents of a sidebar.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\sidebarfont}{\normalfont}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sidecontents}
% This locates the horizontal position of a sidebar. On two column
% pages it is put in the margin next to the column where |\sidebar|
% is called, otherwise it is put in the outer (foredge) margin.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\sidecontents}{
    {\if@twocolumn    %% put outside nearest column
       \if@firstcolumn  %% move to left
         \setlength{\@tempdimc}{\sidebarwidth}%
         \advance\@tempdimc\sidebarhsep
         \moveleft\@tempdimc
       \else            %% move to right
         \setlength{\@tempdimc}{\columnwidth}
         \advance\@tempdimc\sidebarhsep
         \moveright\@tempdimc
       \fi
     \else            %% put into foremargin
       \ifodd\c@page  %% move to right
         \setlength{\@tempdimc}{\hsize}%
         \advance\@tempdimc\sidebarhsep
         \moveright\@tempdimc 
       \else          %% move to left
         \setlength{\@tempdimc}{\sidebarwidth}%
         \advance\@tempdimc\sidebarhsep
         \moveleft\@tempdimc
       \fi
     \fi
     \vtop to0pt{%
     \vskip\onelineskip
     \unvbox\sideins \vss}%
    }
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\sidebar}
% |\sidebar{|\meta{text}|}| puts \meta{text} into a sidebar.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\sidebar}[1]{%%%%\textbf{[sidebar]}%
  \insert\sideins{%
    \splittopskip\sidebarvsep\relax
    \hsize \sidebarwidth \rightskip=0pt plus 20pt \sidebarfont
    \noindent \vbox to \sidebarvsep{}\ignorespaces #1%
    \ifhmode\unskip\strut\fi\par
   }%
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% Now for the nasty bits which involve modifying the LaTeX output
% routine --- always a dangerous thing to do!
%
% \begin{macro}{\memold@makecol}
% \begin{macro}{\mem@makecol}
% A modified version of the kernel |\@makecol|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\memold@makecol\@makecol
\gdef\mem@makecol{%
  \ifvoid\footins
    \setbox\@outputbox \box\@cclv
  \else
    \setbox\@outputbox \vbox{%
    \boxmaxdepth\@maxdepth
    \@tempdima\dp\@cclv
    \unvbox\@cclv
    \vskip-\@tempdima
    \vskip \skip\footins
    \color@begingroup
      \normalcolor
      \footnoterule
      \unvbox \footins
    \color@endgroup
    }
  \fi
  \ifvoid\sideins\else    %%% start of change
    \setbox\@outputbox \vbox{%
      \sidecontents
      \unvbox\@outputbox
    }
  \fi                     %%% end of change
  \xdef\@freelist{\@freelist\@midlist}%
  \global\let\@midlist\@empty
  \@combinefloats
  \ifvbox\@kludgeins
    \@makespecialcolbox
  \else
    \setbox\@outputbox \vbox to\@colht{%
      \boxmaxdepth \maxdepth
      \@texttop
      \dimen@ \dp\@outputbox
      \unvbox \@outputbox
      \vskip -\dimen@
      \@textbottom
    }%
  \fi
  \global \maxdepth \@maxdepth
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\memold@doclearpage}
% \begin{macro}{\mem@doclearpage}
% At the moment this is a straight copy of the kernel |\@doclearpage|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\memold@doclearpage\@doclearpage
\newcommand{\mem@doclearpage}{%
%%%%  \typeout{Redefining @doclearpage}
  \ifvoid\footins
    \setbox\@tempboxa\vsplit\@cclv to\z@ \unvbox\@tempboxa
    \setbox\@tempboxa\box\@cclv
    \xdef\@deferlist{\@toplist\@botlist\@deferlist}%
    \global\let\@toplist\@empty
    \global\let\@botlist\@empty
    \global\@colroom\@colht
    \ifx \@currlist\@empty
    \else
      \@latexerr{Float(s) lost}\@ehb
      \global\let\@currlist\@empty
    \fi
    \@makefcolumn\@deferlist
    \@whilesw\if@fcolmade \fi{\@opcol\@makefcolumn\@deferlist}%
    \if@twocolumn
      \if@firstcolumn
        \xdef\@dbldeferlist{\@dbltoplist\@dbldeferlist}%
        \global\let\@dbltoplist\@empty
        \global\@colht\textheight
        \begingroup
          \@dblfloatplacement
          \@makefcolumn\@dbldeferlist
          \@whilesw\if@fcolmade \fi{\@outputpage
                                    \@makefcolumn\@dbldeferlist}%
        \endgroup
      \else
        \vbox{}\clearpage
      \fi
    \fi
  \else
    \setbox\@cclv\vbox{\box\@cclv\vfil}%
    \@makecol\@opcol
    \clearpage
  \fi
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\memold@reinserts}
% \begin{macro}{\mem@reinserts}
% Almost a copy of the kernel |\@reinserts|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\memold@reinserts\@reinserts
\gdef\mem@reinserts{%
  \ifvoid\footins\else\insert\footins{\unvbox\footins}\fi
  \ifvbox\@kludgeins\insert\@kludegins{\unvbox\@kludgeins}\fi
  \ifvoid\sideins\else\sidecontents\fi
}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@makecol}
% Replace the kernel version of |\@makecol| with the memoir version.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\gdef\@makecol{\mem@makecol}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% I think that the original kernel versions of |\@reinserts| and
% |\@doclearpage| might be alright, but you never know. If they are
% not, then we can treat them like |\@makecol|.
%
%
%
% \section{Initialization} \label{sec:init}
%
% \subsection{Words and phrases}
% 
% This document class is for documents prepared in the English language.
% To prepare a version for another language, various English words 
% and phrases must
% be replaced.  The English elements that require replacement are
% defined below in command names.
%
% \begin{macro}{\abstractname}
% \begin{macro}{\contentsname}
% \begin{macro}{\listfigurename}
% \begin{macro}{\listtablename}
% \begin{macro}{\partname}
% \begin{macro}{\chaptername}
% \begin{macro}{\appendixname}
% \begin{macro}{\appendixtocname}
% \begin{macro}{\appendixpagename}
% \begin{macro}{\bibname}
% \begin{macro}{\indexname}
%
%    This list is for titles of document sections.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\abstractname}{Abstract}
\newcommand{\contentsname}{Contents}
\newcommand{\listfigurename}{List of Figures}
\newcommand{\listtablename}{List of Tables}
\newcommand{\partname}{Part}
\newcommand{\chaptername}{Chapter}
\newcommand{\appendixname}{Appendix}
\newcommand{\appendixtocname}{Appendices}
\newcommand{\appendixpagename}{Appendices}
\newcommand{\bibname}{Bibliography}
\newcommand{\indexname}{Index}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\figurename}
% \begin{macro}{\tablename}
% \begin{macro}{\figurerefname}
% \begin{macro}{\tablerefname}
% \begin{macro}{\pagename}
% \begin{macro}{\pagrefename}
%
%    These are the names and phrases used for general elements.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\figurename}{Figure}
\newcommand{\tablename}{Table}
\newcommand{\figurerefname}{Figure}
\newcommand{\tablerefname}{Table}
\newcommand{\pagename}{page}
\newcommand{\pagerefname}{page}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\partrefname}
% \begin{macro}{\chapterrefname}
% \begin{macro}{\sectionrefname}
% More names for referencing.
% \changes{v1.2}{2002/07/27}{Added \cs{partrefname}, \cs{chapterrefname}
%                            and \cs{sectionrefname}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\partrefname}{Part~}
\newcommand{\chapterrefname}{Chapter~}
\newcommand{\sectionrefname}{\S}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\nNamei}
% \begin{macro}{\nNameii}
% \begin{macro}{\nNameiii}
% \begin{macro}{\nNameiv}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamev}
%    These are the names for numbers 1 to 5.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\nNamei{\iflowernumtoname o\else O\fi ne}
\newcommand*\nNameii{\iflowernumtoname t\else T\fi wo}
\newcommand*\nNameiii{\iflowernumtoname t\else T\fi hree}
\newcommand*\nNameiv{\iflowernumtoname f\else F\fi our}
\newcommand*\nNamev{\iflowernumtoname f\else F\fi ive}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\nNamevi}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamevii}
% \begin{macro}{\nNameviii}
% \begin{macro}{\nNameix}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamex}
%    These are the names for numbers 6 to 10.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\nNamevi{\iflowernumtoname s\else S\fi ix}
\newcommand*\nNamevii{\iflowernumtoname s\else S\fi even}
\newcommand*\nNameviii{\iflowernumtoname e\else E\fi ight}
\newcommand*\nNameix{\iflowernumtoname n\else N\fi ine}
\newcommand*\nNamex{\iflowernumtoname t\else T\fi en}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\nNamexi}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamexii}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamexiii}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamexiv}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamexv}
%    These are the names for numbers 11 to 15.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\nNamexi{\iflowernumtoname e\else E\fi leven}
\newcommand*\nNamexii{\iflowernumtoname t\else T\fi welve}
\newcommand*\nNamexiii{\iflowernumtoname t\else T\fi hirteen}
\newcommand*\nNamexiv{\iflowernumtoname f\else F\fi ourteen}
\newcommand*\nNamexv{\iflowernumtoname f\else F\fi ifteen}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\nNamexvi}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamexvii}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamexviii}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamexix}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamexx}
%    These are the names for numbers 16 to 20.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\nNamexvi{\iflowernumtoname s\else S\fi ixteen}
\newcommand*\nNamexvii{\iflowernumtoname s\else S\fi eventeen}
\newcommand*\nNamexviii{\iflowernumtoname e\else E\fi ighteen}
\newcommand*\nNamexix{\iflowernumtoname n\else N\fi ineteen}
\newcommand*\nNamexx{\iflowernumtoname t\else T\fi wenty}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\nNamexxx}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamexl}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamel}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamelx}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamelxx}
%    These are the names for numbers 30 to 70.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\nNamexxx{\iflowernumtoname t\else T\fi hirty}
\newcommand*\nNamexl{\iflowernumtoname f\else F\fi orty}
\newcommand*\nNamel{\iflowernumtoname f\else F\fi ifty}
\newcommand*\nNamelx{\iflowernumtoname s\else S\fi ixty}
\newcommand*\nNamelxx{\iflowernumtoname s\else S\fi eventy}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\nNamelxxx}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamexc}
% \begin{macro}{\nNamec}
%    These are the names for numbers 80 to 100.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\nNamelxxx{\iflowernumtoname e\else E\fi ighty}
\newcommand*\nNamexc{\iflowernumtoname n\else N\fi inety}
\newcommand*\nNamec{\iflowernumtoname h\else H\fi undred or more}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%
% \subsection{Date}
%
% \begin{macro}{\today}
%    This macro uses the \TeX\ primitives |\month|, |\day| and |\year|
%    to provide the date of the \LaTeX-run.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\today}{\ifcase\month\or
  January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or
  July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi
  \space\number\day, \number\year}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Two column mode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\columnsep}
%    This gives the distance between two columns in two column mode.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\columnsep{10\p@}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\columnseprule}
%    This gives the width of the rule between two columns in two
%    column mode. We have no visible rule.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\columnseprule{0\p@}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{The page style and counters}
%    We use the page style \pstyle{headings} by
%    default and arabic page numbering.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\pagestyle{headings}
\pagenumbering{arabic}

%    \end{macrocode}
%    We set the sectional counters to zero, the |tocdepth| to
%    one (sections and above listed), the |secnumdepth| to
%    two (sections and above numbered), and |\maxsecnumdepth| to
% the same.
% \changes{v1.1a}{2002/04/28}{Added initialisation of \cs{maxsecnumdepth}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\setcounter{part}{0}
\setcounter{chapter}{0}
\setcounter{tocdepth}{1}
\setcounter{secnumdepth}{2}
\maxsecnumdepth{section}

%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Set the |\linenumberfrequency| to zero to prohibit line numbering
% and also set the font for line numbers. Can now set the final space
% for boxed verbatim line numbers.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\linenumberfrequency{0}
\linenumberfont{\small\rmfamily}
\settowidth{\bvnumlength}{\vlvnumfont 9999}

%    \end{macrocode}
%
%
% \subsection{Single or double sided printing}
%
%
%    Unless the \Lopt{twoside} wasn't specified, We do not try to make 
% each page of equal height.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\if@twoside
\else
  \raggedbottom
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%    When the \Lopt{twocolumn} option was specified we call
%    |\twocolumn| to activate this mode. We try to make each column as
%    long as the others, but call |sloppy| to make our life easier.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\if@twocolumn
  \twocolumn
  \sloppy
  \flushbottom
%    \end{macrocode}
%    Normally we call |\onecolumn| to initiate typesetting in one
%    column.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\else
  \onecolumn
\fi

%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{Floats}
%
% \subsubsection{Figure and Table environments and lists}
%
%    Here are the implementations of the figure and table environments
% and their accompanying List of\ldots
%
% \begin{environment}{figure}
% \begin{environment}{figure*}
%    This is the definition of the actual environment. The form with the
%    |*| is used for double column figures. We use |\newfloat| to set it.
% In this class figures are numbered per chapter, but we need to change 
% the default definition of |\thefigure| if a figure
% is in a pre-numbered chapter.
% \changes{v1.3a}{2002/11/22}{Added \cs{kill@lastcounter} after new 
%                             figure float}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newfloat[chapter]{figure}{lof}{\figurename}
  \kill@lastcounter{lofdepth}
\renewcommand{\thefigure}{\thechapter.\@arabic\c@figure}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures}
% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures*}
% These macros request that LaTeX produces a list of figures.
% The LoF heading is added to the ToC unless the starred
% version is used.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{kill@lastcounter} after new 
%                             list of figures}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlistof{listoffigures}{lof}{\listfigurename}
  \kill@lastcounter{lofdepth}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\l@figure}
%  |\l@figure{|\meta{title}|}{|\meta{page}|}| typesets the LoF entry for
% a |figure| caption heading. 
% \changes{v1.3a}{2002/11/22}{Deleted \cs{kill@lastcounter} after new 
%                             figure listentry}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlistentry[chapter]{figure}{lof}{0}
  \cftsetindents{figure}{0em}{2.3em}
%%  \kill@lastcounter{lofdepth}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{environment}{table}
% \begin{environment}{table*}
%  The definition for tables is almost identical.
% \changes{v1.3a}{2002/11/22}{Added \cs{kill@lastcounter} after new 
%                             table float}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newfloat[chapter]{table}{lot}{\tablename}
  \kill@lastcounter{lotdepth}
\renewcommand{\thetable}{\thechapter.\@arabic\c@table}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\listoftables}
% \begin{macro}{\listoftables*}
% These macros request that LaTeX produces a list of tables.
% The LoT heading is added to the ToC unless the starred
% version is used.
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added \cs{kill@lastcounter} after new 
%                             list of tables}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlistof{listoftables}{lot}{\listtablename}
  \kill@lastcounter{lotdepth}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\l@table}
%  |\l@table{|\meta{title}|}{|\meta{page}|}| typesets the LoT entry for
% a |table| caption heading. 
% \changes{v1.3a}{2002/11/22}{Deleted \cs{kill@lastcounter} after new 
%                             table listentry}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlistentry[chapter]{table}{lot}{0}
  \cftsetindents{table}{0em}{2.3em}
%%  \kill@lastcounter{lotdepth}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% The \Lpack{subfigure} package defines |lofdepth| and |lotdepth|
% counters. If is not used, then we have to define them.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\AtBeginDocument{%
  \@ifundefined{c@lofdepth}{\newcounter{lofdepth}\setcounter{lofdepth}{1}}{}
  \@ifundefined{c@lotdepth}{\newcounter{lotdepth}\setcounter{lotdepth}{1}}{}
}

%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{The \Lopt{article} option}
%
% The \Lopt{article} option requires changes to the default chapterstyle,
% and the numbering of floats, etc.
% \changes{v1.0a}{2001/12/07}{Added footnote and chaptername changes to the article option}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifartopt
  \chapterstyle{article}
  \counterwithout{figure}{chapter}
  \counterwithout{table}{chapter}
  \counterwithout{footnote}{chapter}
  \renewcommand{\chaptername}{}
\fi

%    \end{macrocode}
%
%
% \subsection{The \Lopt{ms} option}
%
% This should be done last as it makes various changes to the defaults.
%
% \begin{macro}{\msdoublespacing}
% \begin{macro}{\mssinglespacing}
%  These do nothing unless the \Lopt{ms} option is used; then they change
% the |\baselinestretch|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\msdoublespacing}{}
\newcommand{\mssinglespacing}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifmsdoc
  \renewcommand{\msdoublespacing}{%
    \renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{1.6}\large\normalsize}
  \renewcommand{\mssinglespacing}{%
    \renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{1.0}\large\normalsize}
  \renewcommand{\familydefault}{cmtt}
  \renewcommand{\rmdefault}{cmtt}
  \renewcommand{\sfdefault}{cmtt}
  \renewcommand{\bfdefault}{m}
  \renewcommand{\itdefault}{n}
  \renewcommand{\sldefault}{n}
  \renewcommand{\scdefault}{n}
  \renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{1.6}
  \@twocolumnfalse
  \onecolumn
  \sloppy
  \@twosidefalse
  \raggedbottom
  \pagestyle{plain}
\fi

%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{Use with the \Lpack{natbib} package}
%
% The \Lpack{natbib} package~\cite{NATBIB} uses its own definition for
% the |\thebibliography| environment, which knows nothing about adding
% the Bibliography to the ToC. The following makes appropriate changes
% to \Lpack{natbib} code to support the class.
%
% \changes{v1.1}{2002/03/10}{Added internal support for the natbib package}
% \begin{macro}{\bibsection}
% \begin{macro}{\endthebibliography}
% Natbib provides |\bibsection| for titling the bibliography. I also have
% to extend the end of the |thebibliography| environment to cater for
% |\postbibhook|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\AtBeginDocument{%
  \@ifpackageloaded{natbib}{% natbib is loaded
    \renewcommand{\bibsection}{%
      \chapter*{\bibname}
      \bibmark
      \ifnobibintoc\else
        \phantomsection
        \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\bibname}
      \fi
      \prebibhook}
    \addtodef{\endthebibliography}{}{\vskip-\lastskip\postbibhook}
}{}}

%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Patch file}
%
% At the suggestion of Danie Els (\texttt{DanieEls@sun.ac.za}), Dan Leucking
% (\texttt{luecking@uark.edu}) and others, input a patch file, if one exists,
% as the final act. (This is preferable to my series of \file{memfixa.sty},
% \file{memfixb.sty} packages, and so on, for each release of the class.)
% \changes{v1.3}{2002/11/14}{Added input of mempatch.sty}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\InputIfFileExists{mempatch.sty}

%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    The end of the class definitions.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</class>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%
%
%
% \bibliographystyle{alpha}
%
% \begin{thebibliography}{GMSN94A}
%
% \bibitem[ArWi00]{IFMTARG}
% Donald Arseneau and Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{The ifmtarg package}.
% \newblock March, 2000.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/supported/misc})
%
% \bibitem[Car98a]{ENUMERATE}
% David Carlisle.
% \newblock \emph{The enumerate package}.
% \newblock August, 1998.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
%            \texttt{/macros/latex/required/tools})
%
% \bibitem[Car98b]{REMRESET}
% David Carlisle.
% \newblock \emph{The remreset package}.
% \newblock August, 1998.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/supported/carlisle})
%
% \bibitem[Coc02]{SUBFIGURE}
% Steven Douglas Cochran.
% \newblock \emph{The subfigure package}.
% \newblock March, 2002.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/supported/subfigure})
%
% \bibitem[Dal99]{NATBIB}
% Patrick W. Daly.
% \newblock \emph{Natural Sciences Citations and References}.
% \newblock May, 1999
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/supported/natbib})
%
% \bibitem[Fai98]{MOREVERB}
% Robin Fairbairns.
% \newblock \emph{The moreverb package}.
% \newblock December, 1998.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/supported/moreverb})
%
% \bibitem[Fra00]{CROP}
% Melchior Franz.
% \newblock \emph{The crop package}.
% \newblock February, 2000.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/supported/crop})
%
% \bibitem[GMS94]{GOOSSENS94}
% Michel Goossens, Frank Mittelbach, and Alexander Samarin.
% \newblock {\em The LaTeX Companion}.
% \newblock Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, 1994.
%
%
% \bibitem[LMB99]{CLASSES}
% Leslie Lamport, Frank Mittelbach and Johannes Braams.
% \newblock \emph{Standard Document Classes for LaTeX version 2e}.
% \newblock September, 1999.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN as 
%            \texttt{/macros/latex/base/classes.dtx})
%
% \bibitem[Oos96]{FANCYHDR}
% Piet van Oostrum.
% \newblock \emph{Page layout in LaTeX}.
% \newblock June, 1996.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/supported/fancyhdr})
%
% \bibitem[Rahtz]{HYPERREF}
% Sebastian Rahtz.
% \newblock \emph{Hypertext marks in LaTeX}.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/supported/hyperref})
%
% \bibitem[Sch98]{EVERYSHI}
% Martin Schr\"{o}der.
% \newblock \emph{The everyshi package}.
% \newblock August, 1998.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/supported/ms})
%
% \bibitem[SRR01]{VERBATIM}
% Rainer Sch\"{o}pf, Bernd Raichle and Chris Rowley.
% \newblock \emph{A new implementation of LaTeX's verbatim and verbatim*
%                 environments}.
% \newblock March, 2001.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
%            \texttt{/macros/latex/required/tools})
%
% \bibitem[Wil99]{TOCVSEC2}
% Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{The tocvsec2 package}.
% \newblock January, 1999.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/supported/tocvsec2})
%
% \bibitem[Wil00a]{EPIGRAPH}
% Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{The epigraph package}.
% \newblock February, 2000.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/supported/epigraph})
%
% \bibitem[Wil00b]{ISOCLASS}
% Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{LaTeX files for typesetting ISO standards}.
% \newblock February, 2000.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/supported/isostds/iso})
%
% \bibitem[Wil00c]{NEXTPAGE}
% Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{The nextpage package}.
% \newblock February, 2000.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/supported/misc})
%
% \bibitem[Wil00d]{NEEDSPACE}
% Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{The needspace package}.
% \newblock March, 2000.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/supported/misc})
%
% \bibitem[Wil01a]{ABSTRACT}
% Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{The abstract package}.
% \newblock February, 2001.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/supported/abstract})
%
% \bibitem[Wil01b]{CHNGPAGE}
% Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{The chngpage package}.
% \newblock February, 2001.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/supported/misc})
%
% \bibitem[Wil01c]{APPENDIX}
% Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{The appendix package}.
% \newblock March, 2001.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/supported/appendix})
%
% \bibitem[Wil01d]{CCAPTION}
% Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{The ccaption package}.
% \newblock March, 2001.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/supported/ccaption})
%
% \bibitem[Wil01e]{CHNGCNTR}
% Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{The chngcntr package}.
% \newblock March, 2001.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/supported/misc})
%
% \bibitem[Wil01f]{HANGING}
% Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{The hanging package}.
% \newblock March, 2001.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/supported/hanging})
%
% \bibitem[Wil01g]{TITLING}
% Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{The titling package}.
% \newblock March, 2001.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/supported/titling})
%
% \bibitem[Wil01h]{TOCBIBIND}
% Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{The tocbibind package}.
% \newblock April, 2001.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/supported/tocbibind})
%
% \bibitem[Wil01i]{TOCLOFT}
% Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{The tocloft package}.
% \newblock April, 2001.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/supported/tocloft})
%
% \bibitem[Wil01j]{VERSE}
% Peter Wilson.
% \newblock \emph{Typesetting simple verse with LaTeX}.
% \newblock August, 2001.
% \newblock (Available from CTAN in 
%            \texttt{/macros/latex/contrib/supported/verse})
%
%
%
%
% \end{thebibliography}
%
%
% \Finale
%
\endinput

%% \CharacterTable
%%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
%%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
%%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
%%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
%%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
%%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
%%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
%%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
%%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
%%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
%%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
%%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
%%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
%%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}


